Document

Document
Cat. No. W420-E1-06
SYSMAC CS and CJ Series
CS1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX)
CJ1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX)
Ethernet Units
Construction of Networks
OPERATION MANUAL
CS1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX)
CJ1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX)
Ethernet Units
Construction of Networks
Operation Manual
Revised April 2009
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 2003
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series
Unit Versions
A “unit version” has been introduced to manage Units in the CS/CJ Series
according to differences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades.
Notation of Unit Versions
on Products
The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the
products for which unit versions are being managed, as shown below.
Product nameplate
CS1WUNIT
Unit version
Example for unit version 1.3
Lot No.
Lot No. 040401 0000
OMRON Corporation
Confirming Unit Versions
with Support Software
Ver.1.3
MADE IN JAPAN
CX-Programmer version 4.0 can be used to confirm the unit version using the
Unit Manufacturing Information.
Note The (unit versions of) Pre-Ver. 2.0 Units cannot be confirmed Unit Manufacturing Information. The following dialog box is displayed.
In the IO Table Window, right-click and select Unit Manufacturing information - CPU Unit.
The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed.
Unit version
Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the Unit connected online.
vi
Using Unit Version Label
The following unit version label is provided with the Ethernet Unit.
This label can be attached to the front of the Ethernet Unit to differentiate
between Ethernet Units with different unit versions.
Unit Version Notation
Product nameplate
In this manual, the unit version of a Ethernet Unit is given as shown in the following table.
Notation used in this manual
Ver. 2.0 or later number
shown to right of the lot
number
Ethernet Unit Ver. 1.3 or later
Blank to the right of lot
number
Pre-Ver. 1.3 Ethernet Units
Special remarks
Information without reference to specific Unit
Versions applies to all versions of the Unit
vii
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxi
1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii
2
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii
3
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii
4
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiii
5
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiii
6
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxv
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
Ethernet Unit Function Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
1-3
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
1-4
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
1-5
Overview of Communications Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
1-6
Nomenclature and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
1-7
Comparison with Previous Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
1-8
Unit Version Upgrade Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
SECTION 2
Installation and Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
2-1
Overview of Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
2-2
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
2-3
Mounting to a PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
2-4
Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
2-5
Connecting to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
2-6
Creating I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
2-7
Unit Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
2-8
Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
2-9
Unit Setup for Particular Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
2-10 Communications Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
2-11 Converting from Previous Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
SECTION 3
CX-Programmer Unit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
3-1
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
3-2
FINS/TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
3-3
DNS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
3-4
SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
3-5
POP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
3-6
Mail Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
3-7
Send Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
3-8
Receive Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3-9
Auto Adjust Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
3-10 HTTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
SECTION 4
Ethernet Unit Memory Allocations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
4-1
CIO Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
4-2
DM Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
4-3
Auxiliary Area Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
SECTION 5
Determining IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
5-1
IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
5-2
IP Addresses in FINS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
5-3
Private and Global Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
SECTION 6
FINS Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6-1
Overview of FINS Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
6-2
FINS/UDP Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
6-3
FINS/TCP Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
6-4
Creating Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
6-5
Using FINS Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
6-7
Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
SECTION 7
FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet Units . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7-1
Command Codes and Response Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
7-2
Socket Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
7-3
Command/Response Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
SECTION 8
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
x
8-1
Troubleshooting with Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
204
8-2
Error Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
8-3
Error Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
206
8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
8-5
Results Storage Area Response Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
231
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Appendices
A
Ethernet Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
235
B
Buffer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
237
C
TCP Status Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
239
D
ASCII Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
E
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243
F
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
245
G
Ethernet Unit Web Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
xi
xii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of the CS1W-ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet
Units (100Base-TX) and includes the sections described below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before
attempting to install or operate the Ethernet Unit. Be sure to read the precautions provided in the following section.
Precautions provides general precautions for using the CS1W-ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet
Units (100Base-TX).
Section 1 introduces the features, describes the system configuration and Unit parts, and provides
Unit specifications.
Section 2 explains how to install the Ethernet Unit and make the initial settings required for operation.
Section 3 provides information for setting communications using CX-Programmer.
Section 4 describes the words allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area for Ethernet Units.
Section 5 explains how to manage and use IP addresses.
Section 6 provides information on communicating on Ethernet Systems and interconnected networks
using FINS commands.
Section 7 describes the FINS commands that can be sent to an Ethernet Unit and the responses that
are returned by the Ethernet Unit.
Section 8 describes information and procedures that can be used to troubleshoot problems that sometimes occur with Ethernet Unit and Ethernet communications.
Appendices provide information on Ethernet network parameters, the buffer configuration, TCP status
transitions, ASCII characters, maintenance, and inspections.
The related Ethernet Units Operation Manual Construction of Applications (W421) provides the following information.
Section
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Contents
Overview of functions for constructing applications.
Information on using mail functions to automatically send I/O memory data from
OMRON PLCs to personal computers.
Information on using mail functions to send commands from OMRON PLCs to personal computers.
Information on transferring large files between personal computers and OMRON
PLCs.
Section 5
Information on automatically adjusting the OMRON PLC’s built-in clock.
Section 6
Information on communicating between general applications (applications not using
FINS) and OMRON PLCs.
Information on using personal computer and UNIX machine socket interfaces to create applications using FINS communications.
Section 7
xiii
Relevant Manuals
The following table lists CS and CJ-series manuals that contain information relevant to Ethernet Units.
Manual
number
Model
Name
Contents
W420
CS1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN21
W421
CS1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN21
W343
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
CJ1W-ETN11
Ethernet Units Oper- Describes the installation and operation of the 10Base-5
ation Manual
and 10Base-T Ethernet Units.
W342
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1G/H-CPU-@@EV1
CS1D-CPU@@H
CS1D-CPU@@S
CJ1M-CPU@@
CS1W-SCU21-V1
CS1W-SCB21-V1/41-V1
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@P
CJ1G-CPU@@
CJ1W-SCU21-V1/41-V1
Communications
Commands Reference Manual
Describes the C-series (Host Link) and FINS communications commands used when sending communications
commands to CS-series and CJ-series CPU Units.
W339
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1
Programmable Controllers Operation
Manual
W393
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@P
CJ1M-CPU@@
CJ1G-CPU@@
Programmable Controllers Operation
Manual
Provides an outline of, and describes the design, installation, maintenance, and other basic operations for the CSseries PLCs. Information is also included on features,
system configuration, wiring, I/O memory allocations, and
troubleshooting.
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Programming Manual (W394).
Provides an outline of, and describes the design, installation, maintenance, and other basic operations for the CJseries PLCs. Information is also included on features,
system configuration, wiring, I/O memory allocations, and
troubleshooting.
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Programming Manual (W394).
W394
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1G/H-CPU@@EV1
CS1D-CPU@@H
CS1D-CPU@@S
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@P
CJ1G-CPU@@
CJ1M-CPU@@
Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
Describes programming, tasks, file memory, and other
functions for the CS-series and CJ-series PLCs.
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual (W339 for CS-series PLCs and W393 for CJseries PLCs).
W340
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1G/H-CPU@@EV1
CS1D-CPU@@H
CS1D-CPU@@S
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@P
CJ1G-CPU@@
CJ1M-CPU@@
Programmable Controllers Instructions
Reference Manual
Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions
supported by CS-series and CJ-series PCs. Use together
with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
(W339 for CS-series PLCs and W393 for CJ-series
PLCs), and Programmable Controllers Programming
Manual (W394).
xiv
Ethernet Units Operation Manual
Construction of Networks
(this manual)
Provides information on operating and installing
100Base-TX Ethernet Units, including details on basic
settings and FINS communications.
Refer to the Communications Commands Reference
Manual (W342) for details on FINS commands that can
be sent to CS-series and CJ-series CPU Units when
using the FINS communications service.
Ethernet Units Oper- Provides information on constructing host applications for
ation Manual
100Base-TX Ethernet Units, including functions for sendConstruction of
ing/receiving mail, socket service, automatic clock adjustApplications
ment, FTP server functions, and FINS communications.
Manual
number
W446
Model
Name
Contents
WS02-CXPC@-V8
CX-Programmer
Ver. 8.0 Operation
Manual
W444
CXONE-AL@@C-E
W445
CXONE-AL@@C-E
W341
CQM1H-PRO01-E
CQM1-PRO01-E
C200H-PRO27-E
W336
CS1W-SCB21-V1/41-V1
CS1W-SCU21-V1
CJ1W-SCU21-V1/41-V1
CX-One Setup Man- Describes operating procedures for the CX-One FA Inteual
grated Tool Package.
Refer to this manual for operating procedures for the CXOne FA Integrated Tool Package.
CX-Integrator Opera- Describes operating procedures for the CX-Integrator nettion Manual
work configuration support software for CS/CJ-series
PLCs.
Refer to this manual for operating procedures for the CXIntegrator network configuration support software for CS/
CJ-series PLCs.
Programming ConProvides information on how to operate the Programming
soles Operation
Console.
Manual
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual (W339 for CS-series PLCs and W393 for CJseries PLCs), Programmable Controllers Programming
Manual (W394) and the Programmable Controllers
Instructions Reference Manual (W340) to perform programming.
Serial CommunicaAccessing the PLC connected to the CX-Programmer via
tions Boards and
Ethernet or the host computer or other device connected
Serial Communicato the Serial Communications Board or Unit.
tions Units Operation Describes the use of Serial Communications Units and
Manual
Boards, including details on hardware, software, and
standard system protocols.
Provides information on how to use the CX-Programmer,
a Windows-based programming device, and CX-Net, a
Windows-based network configuration tool.
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual (W339 for CS-series PLCs and W393 for CJseries PLCs), Programmable Controllers Programming
Manual (W394) and the Programmable Controllers
Instructions Reference Manual (W340) to perform programming.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xv
xvi
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xvii
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xviii
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xix
xx
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CS1W-ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Units (100Base-TX).
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Ethernet Units. You
must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate an Ethernet
Unit.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii
xxii
xxii
xxiii
xxiii
xxv
xxv
xxv
xxi
1
Intended Audience
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned applications.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
!Caution Execute online editing only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
xxii
Operating Environment Precautions
4
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
!Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in
burning or malfunction.
4
Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the Ethernet Unit.
!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
• Always connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not
connecting to a ground of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
xxiii
5
Application Precautions
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit, Slaves, and Communications Units before attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF
the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting I/O Units, CPU Units, Memory Packs, or
Master Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the Ethernet Unit or the system, or could damage the Ethernet Unit. Always
heed these precautions.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal
lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable Controller) must be provided by the
customer.
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.
• Do not install the Unit near devices that generate strong high-frequency
noise.
• Do not drop the Unit or subject it to excessive vibration or shock.
• Make sure that all the Backplane mounting screws, terminal block screws,
and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the
relevant manuals. Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power
supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Wire all connections correctly.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors completely.
• Make sure that the terminal blocks, expansion cables, and other items
with locking devices are locked in place.
• When transporting the Unit, use special packing boxes and protect it from
being exposed to excessive vibration or impacts during transportation.
xxiv
6
Conformance to EC Directives
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in unexpected operation.
• Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications
cable.
• Separate the communications cables from the power lines or high-tension lines.
• Do not bend the communications cables past their natural bending radius.
• Do not pull on the communications cables.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of the communications cables.
• Always lay communications cable inside ducts.
• Use appropriate communications cables.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static build-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the
startup operation mode).
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
6
6-1
Conformance to EC Directives
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
6-2
Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the
standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by
the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note
Applicable EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility) and EMI (Electromagnetic
Interference) Standards in the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
Unit/Board
CS1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN21
EMS
EN61000-6-2
EMI
EN61000-6-4
(Radiated emission: 10-m
regulations)
xxv
Conformance to EC Directives
6
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 V AC and 75
to 1,500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC (EN61131-2).
xxvi
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration
This section introduces the features, describes the system configuration and Unit parts, and provides Unit specifications.
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
Ethernet Unit Function Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-1
Overall System Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-2
Determining the Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
1-3-1
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
1-3-2
Devices Required for Constructing a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
1-3-3
Setup Area and Related Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
1-4-1
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
1-4-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
1-4-3
Software Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
Overview of Communications Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
1-5-1
FINS Communications Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
1-5-2
Socket Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
1-5-3
FTP Server Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
1-5-4
Mail Send Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
1-5-5
Mail Receive Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
1-5-6
Automatic Clock Adjustment Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
1-5-7
Specifying Servers by Host Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
Nomenclature and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
1-6-1
Component Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
1-6-2
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
1-7
Comparison with Previous Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
1-8
Unit Version Upgrade Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
1
Section 1-1
Ethernet Unit Function Guide
1-1
Ethernet Unit Function Guide
1-1-1
Overall System Configuration Example
The following diagram shows an example of an overall system configuration
using Ethernet Units.
(1) Connecting the CX-Programmer to the PLCs online via Ethernet
CX-Programmer
Mail software
Mail
FINS
Mail
Internet
IP router
Intranet
(5) Transferring large data files between (6) Configuring an independent communications protocol
personal computers and PLCs
for the host application using TCP/IP (UDP/IP)
Firewall
Server Room
Office Floor
DNS server
POP3 server
SMTP server
SNTP server
FTP software
Mail software
FTP
Ethernet
Router
CX-Programmer
SCADA software
PLC Reporter, Compolet
FinsGateway
(communications driver)
Large files
Independent user
application
UDP/TCP socket
Ethernet
Router
(4) Receiving mail (data, files) at
PLCs
(Factory line)
CX-Programmer
NS-series PT
Receiving mail
Writing
commands
FINS
Ethernet
Ethernet Unit
FINS
Ethernet Unit
(1) Connecting the CX-Programmer to
PLCs online via Ethernet
Sending mail
(3) Capturing PLC changes
and sending the status of
equipment to an operator
(7) Automatically adjusting the
PLC's internal clock
periodically
1-1-2
PLC
PLC
FINS message
communications
Wireless
FINS message
communications
Memory Card
(2) Sending and receiving data via Ethernet
between OMRON PLCs
FINS
Determining the Objectives
Connecting the CX-Programmer to PLCs Online via Ethernet
Connecting within the
Same Segment
2
Use the UDP/IP version of the FINS communications service (i.e., FINS/
UDP). FINS/UDP is supported by many OMRON products and is compatible
with earlier Ethernet Units (CS1W-ETN01/ETN11 and CJ1W-ETN11). The
CX-Programmer can be connected and used with FINS/UDP even if personal
computer middleware (FinsGateway) is not used. FinsGateway (any version)
can also be used together with the CX-Programmer.
Ethernet Unit Function Guide
Section 1-1
Connecting through
Multiple Segments
Use the TCP/IP version of the FINS communications service (i.e., FINS/TCP).
FINS/TCP is a new function supported by these Ethernet Units (CS1WETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21). It provides automatic recovery at the TCP/IP layer
from communications errors (such as packet loss) that occur during multilevel
routing. For CX-Programmer (version 4.0 or higher), FINS/TCP can be used
to directly connect to the PLC online. To use lower versions of the CX-Programmer with FINS/TCP, use FinsGateway (version 2003 or higher) as personal computer middleware.
Using Media with
Unreliable Connections,
Such as a Wireless LAN
Use the TCP/IP version of the FINS communications service (i.e., FINS/TCP).
FINS/TCP is a new function supported by these Ethernet Units (CS1WETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21). It provides automatic recovery at the TCP/IP layer
from communications errors (such as packet loss) resulting from unreliable
connections. For CX-Programmer (version 4.0 or higher), FINS/TCP can be
used to directly connect to the PLC online. To use lower versions of the CXProgrammer with FINS/TCP, use FinsGateway (version 2003 or higher) as
personal computer middleware.
Connecting from a
Personal Computer with a
Dynamic Private IP
Address
Depending on whether or not the connection will be within the same segment,
either use an IP address conversion method for dynamic IP addresses in the
UDP/IP version of the FINS communications service or use the TCP/IP version of the FINS communications service.
It is possible to connect online to a PLC using the CX-Programmer from a
computer serving as a temporarily connected node or a permanent DHCP client.
For CX-Programmer (version 4.0 or higher), FINS/TCP can be used to directly
connect to the PLC online. To use lower versions of the CX-Programmer with
FINS/TCP, use FinsGateway (version 2003 or higher) as personal computer
middleware.
3
Section 1-1
Ethernet Unit Function Guide
Connecting through multiple segments, such as over the Internet:
Use FINS/TCP.
CX-Programmer
FINS
Internet
IP router
Intranet
Firewall
(Server room)
Connecting from a computer with a dynamic private IP address:
Use FINS/TCP or FINS/UDP.
(Office floor)
CX-Programmer
DNS server
POP3 server
SMTP server
SNTP server
FINS
Ethernet
Ethernet
Router
Router
(Production line)
Connecting within the same segment:
Use FINS/UDP.
CX-Programmer
FINS
Ethernet
Ethernet Unit
Ethernet Unit
PLC
Wireless
CX-Programmer
FINS
Reference
Using media with unreliable
connections, such as wireless
LAN: Use FINS/TCP.
SECTION 6 FINS Communications
Exchanging Data between OMRON PLCs using Ethernet
Connecting within the
Same Segment
Use the UDP/IP version of the FINS communications service (i.e., FINS/
UDP), and construct applications using the SEND(090), RECV(098), and
CMND(490) instructions in the ladder program. FINS/UDP is supported by
many OMRON products, and is compatible with earlier Ethernet Units (CS1WETN01/ETN11 and CJ1W-ETN11). The protocol processing for FINS/UDP is
simpler than for FINS/TCP, giving FINS/UDP certain advantages in terms of
performance. Another feature of FINS/UDP is that it can be used for broadcasting.
On the other hand, with FINS/UDP it is necessary to provide measures, such
as retries, for handling communications errors.
Connecting through
Multiple Segments
4
Use the TCP/IP version of the FINS communications service (i.e., FINS/TCP),
and construct applications using the SEND(090), RECV(098), and
CMND(490) instructions in the ladder program. FINS/TCP is the initial function supported by this Ethernet Unit (CS1W-ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21). It provides automatic recovery at the TCP/IP layer from communications errors
(such as packet loss) that occur during multilevel routing.
Section 1-1
Ethernet Unit Function Guide
Intranet
Production line A
Ethernet Unit
Ethernet
Router
FINS message
communications
Connecting through multiple segments:
Use FINS/TCP.
Router
Production line B
Mail
communications
Ethernet Unit
Ethernet Unit
PLC
PLC
FINS message
communications
Memory Card
Connecting within the same segment:
Use FINS/UDP.
Reference
SECTION 6 FINS Communications
Monitoring PLC Changes and Sending Equipment Status to the Operator by E-mail
Operation
When the mail send function is used, automatic communications applications
via the Internet can be constructed relatively easily. With this Ethernet Unit,
the following mail triggers can be set as PLC changes. When these settings
can be used, no special ladder program is required for sending e-mail.
• When a particular bit (the Mail Send Switch) turns ON
• When values change in particular words (=, <>, <, <=, >=, >)
• When a particular bit changes (either OFF to ON or ON to OFF)
• When a change occurs at the Ethernet Unit (stored in error log)
• When a change occurs at the CPU Unit (e.g., a non-fatal error, a fatal
error, or a mode change)
• At regular intervals
The following data can be sent by e-mail:
• Text (user-created text strings (ASCII data), Ethernet Unit error log data,
and status data)
• Attached files (IOM data created automatically by the Ethernet Unit, data
tables, and files in File Memory)
To use the mail send function, there must be a separate SMTP server on the
network. When using the SMTP server of an Internet Service Provider (ISP),
security measures, such as POP before or SMTP, may be required. (This Unit
handles POP before SMTP.) In addition to the IP address, the host name used
for the DNS service can be specified for the SMTP/POP3 server.
5
Section 1-1
Ethernet Unit Function Guide
Mail software
Receiving
e-mail
E-mail
Internet
IP router
Intranet
Firewall
(Server room)
(Office floor)
DNS server
POP3 server
SMTP server
SNTP server
Ethernet
Mail software
Receiving
e-mail
Router
Ethernet
Router
(Production line)
Ethernet
Ethernet Unit
Sending
e-mail
Monitoring PLC changes and
sending equipment status to
the operator by e-mail
Reference
PLC's I/O memory data
sent as attached file
SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual Construction of
Applications
Receiving E-mail (Data and Files) at the PLC
Operation
Use the mail receive function.
When the mail receive function is used, the PLC can be accessed through a
mail address, enabling remote applications via the Internet to be constructed
relatively easily. With the mail receive function, any of the following remote
commands can be specified as e-mail subjects.
• FileWrite (File Write)
• FileRead (File Read)
• ChangeMode (Operating Mode
Change)
• FileDelete (File Delete)
• ErrorLogRead (Error Log Read)
• FileList (File List Read)
• ErrorLogClear (Error Log Clear)
• UMBackup (User Memory
Backup)
• MailLogRead (Mail Log Read)
• PARAMBackup (Parameter Area
Backup)
• Test (Mail Test)
• IOMWrite (I/O Memory Write)
• MailLogClear (Mail Log Clear)
• FinsSend (FINS Command
Send)
• IOMRead (I/O Memory Read)
To use the mail receive function, there must be a separate POP3 server on
the network. Aside from the IP address, the host name used for DNS service
can be specified for the POP3 server.
6
Section 1-1
Ethernet Unit Function Guide
Mail software
Sending e-mail
Internet
IP router
Intranet
Firewall
(Server room)
(Office floor)
DNS server
POP3 server
SMTP server
SNTP server
Ethernet
Mail software
Sending e-mail
Router
Ethernet
Router
(Production line)
Writing command
File attachment enabled
Ethernet
Ethernet Unit
Writing command
File attachment enabled
Receiving e-mail
Receiving e-mail at the PLC
Reference
SECTION 3 Mail Receive Function in the Operation Manual Construction of
Applications
Exchanging Large Files between a Personal Computer and PLC
Operation
Use the FTP server function.
The FTP server function makes it possible to log in to the Ethernet Unit from a
computer (FTP client) as required, and to specify folders and files to be transferred. The following items can be used as PLC File Memory.
• A Memory Card (mounted to the CPU Unit)
• EM File Memory (The portion of the EM Area in the CPU Unit's I/O memory used by the CX-Programmer as File Memory)
Reference
SECTION 4 FTP Server Function in the Operation Manual Construction of
Applications
Creating an Original Communications Procedure Using TCP/IP (UDP/IP) for the Host
Application or Communicating with PLCs from Another Manufacturer
Operation
Using the socket services function, create a communications application in
the ladder program.
With the socket services function, TCP/IP or UDP/IP can be used directly to
receive data. Use the socket services to create applications based on manipulating control bits or the CMND(490) instruction.
Reference
SECTION 4 Socket Service Function in the Operation Manual Construction of
Applications
7
Section 1-2
Features
Automatically Adjusting the PLC's Internal Clock at Regular Intervals
Operation
Use the automatic clock adjustment function.
With the automatic clock adjustment function, the SNTP server's clock is
taken as the standard for automatically adjusting the built-in clock of the PLC
connected to the Ethernet Unit. The adjustment can be regularly executed at
a specified time (once a day) and it can be executed each time by the ladder
program.
To use the automatic clock adjustment function, there must be a separate
SNTP server on the network. Aside from the IP address, the host name used
for DNS service can be specified for the SNTP server.
Reference
1-2
SECTION 5 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function in the Operation Manual
Construction of Applications
Features
Compatibility and Speed
The transmission medium has been upgraded to 100Base-TX, while compatibility with the functions and application interfaces of the existing Ethernet Unit
models (CS1W-ETN01, CS1W-ETN11, and CJ1W-ETN11) has been maintained. Moreover, processing speed has been improved so that the system
response performance for the same FINS message applications is now up to
four times faster.
Various Protocols Available on Ethernet
A variety of protocols makes available a wide range of applications for use on
an Ethernet network. The protocols that can be selected include sending and
receiving data by TCP/IP or UDP/IP (socket services), sending and receiving
commands by OMRON's standard protocol FINS, transferring files by FTP,
sending and receiving e-mail by SMTP/POP3, and automatically adjusting the
PLC's internal clock by SNTP.
A communications service can be selected according to need, allowing the
PLC to be flexibly integrated with the Ethernet information network.
Communications by UDP/IP and TCP/IP (Socket Services Function)
The standard Ethernet protocols, UDP/IP and TCP/IP, are supported, making
it possible to communicate with a wide range of devices, workstations, computers, and Ethernet Units from other manufacturers.
Up to eight ports can be used for various protocols, enabling the use of various applications.
Simplified Socket Services
Without using the CMND(490) instruction, the socket services function for
TCP or UDP can be simplified by presetting parameters and using dedicated
bits. In addition, the size of received data accumulated in the reception buffer
is now stored, and a Data Received Flag has been added. These new features eliminate the need for ladder programs to monitor the timing for completion of instructions and socket service processing, and thus reduce the
amount of labor required for program development.
8
Section 1-2
Features
Starting with unit version 1.5, the performance of sending and receiving has
been improved using optional settings for the TCP or UDP socket services
using specific bits in memory. Also, a linger socket option has been added to
the TCP socket services. Specifying this option enables open processing
immediately with the same port number without having to wait (approximately
1 min.) until the port number opens after the socket closes.
Improved FINS Message Communications
The following functions have been improved over previous Ethernet Unit models. They allow the scale of the system to be increased, and can give greater
flexibility to the system configuration including the host computer.
• Expanded number of nodes (to 254 max., from 126 max.)
• Communications are now enabled even if the host computer's IP address
is dynamic. (DHCP client computers can be handled, including TCP/IP
and UDP/IP.)
→ Previously IP addresses for host computers could be fixed only.
→ For Ethernet Units with Unit Ver. 1.3 or later, the Unit can be protected
against access from nodes with dynamically changed IP addresses (set
to be fixed only).
• An automatic client FINS node address allocation function now makes it
possible to connect online to the PLC even if no FINS node address has
been set for the host computer.
→ Previously online connection to the PLC was possible only after a FINS
node address was set for the host computer.
• FINS message communications are now enabled in TCP/IP (with up to 16
simultaneous connections), so a system can now utilize FINS message
communications in both UDP/IP and TCP/IP.
→ Previously only UDP/IP could be used.
• Multiple FINS applications (such as the CX-Programmer) on the same
computer can now be connected online to the PLC via Ethernet (in either
TCP/IP or UDP/IP).
→ Previously when one FINS application on a computer was connected
online to the PLC, it was impossible to connect any other at the same
time.
Transferring Data Files between Host Computers (FTP Server Function)
A built-in FTP server function enables data files in the PLC to be read from a
workstation or computer with an FTP client function, and for data to be written
to the PLC. Large amounts of data can be transferred at a time from clients,
without requiring ladder programming.
Additional E-mail Functions
With previous Ethernet Unit models (CS1W-ETN01/CS1W-ETN11/CJ1WETN11), e-mail could sent only from the Ethernet Unit, and the data that could
be sent was limited to user-created ASCII text data and system data. Now the
following e-mail functions have been added.
Mail Receive Function
(Receiving Commands for
the PLC by E-mail)
Commands for the PLC (mail remote commands) can be written into e-mail,
and the Ethernet Unit can receive them, execute them, and send responses
by e-mail.
E-mail File Attachment
Function
This function can be linked to the CS/CJ File Memory function.
9
Section 1-2
Features
• The Ethernet Unit can automatically generate data files (6,000 words
maximum per file) from the CPU Unit's I/O memory status, and send them
to specified e-mail addresses as e-mail attachments. It can also send program files from the Memory Card (up to 1 MB) to specified e-mail
addresses as e-mail attachments.
• In addition to using the existing Mail Send Switch, or having e-mail sent at
regular intervals, it is possible to set triggers for sending e-mail (for example, by having e-mail sent when a PV in the CPU Unit's I/O memory
reaches a certain value (size comparison), or when the bit at a specified
address turns ON).
• Up to eight of these e-mail send conditions (destination, trigger type, etc.)
can be preregistered so that e-mail will be sent automatically whenever
the conditions are met.
Note
The e-mail functions require a separate mail server (SMTP/POP3).
Automatic PLC Internal Clock Adjustment
The built-in clock of the PLC connected to the Ethernet can be automatically
adjusted, with the SNTP server clock taken as the standard. Automatic adjustments through the entire system enable the various records generated by production equipment to be managed according to clock information and
analyzed.
Note
The automatic clock adjustment requires a separate SNTP server.
Specification of Servers by Host Name
In addition to directly specifying the IP address for a SMTP, POP3, or SNTP
server, it is also possible (by means of the Ethernet Unit's DNS client function)
to specify the server by host name. This enables automatic searches for IP
addresses for purposes such as system checking, even when the IP
addresses for servers have been changed.
Note
(1) A separate DNS server is required to specify servers by host name using
DNS.
(2) The IP address is specified directly for the DNS server.
Classless IP Address Settings Using CIDR
Starting from unit version 1.5, it is possible to use classless inter-domain routing (CIDR) by specifying the subnet class using an option setting. This
enables greater flexibility in specification by eliminating the need to have the
network ID component of the IP address be dependent on the class.
Use Web Function to Read Ethernet Unit Settings and Status
A Web function is provided in Ethernet Units with Unit Ver. 1.3 or later. This
enables use of a Web browser to read the Ethernet Unit’s system settings and
statuses.
Network Connection with Controller Link
The Ethernet information network can be connected to the Controller Link
control system network by using the FINS communications service function.
This enables a PLC on a Controller Link network to be monitored from a PLC
on an Ethernet network, and it allows data to be exchanged between them.
10
Section 1-3
System Configuration
Full Range of Functions for Handling Troubles
A full range of functions is provided for promptly handling any troubles that
may arise.
• Self-diagnostic function when power is turned ON
• Remote node connection check by PING command
• Remote node connection check by internode test
• Error log for recording error information when an error occurs
• Notification by e-mail when an error occurs
1-3
1-3-1
System Configuration
System Configuration
CX-Programmer
CX-Integrator
FinsGateway
(3) Hub
(2) Twisted-pair cable
100 m
max.
(1) CS1W-ETN21
Ethernet Unit
(100Base-TX)
(1) CJ1W-ETN21
Ethernet Unit
(100Base-TX)
CS-series
PLC
1-3-2
CJ-series
PLC
Devices Required for Constructing a Network
The basic configuration for a 100Base-TX Ethernet System consists of one
hub to which nodes are attached in star form using twisted-pair cable.
The devices shown in the following table are required to configure a network
with 100Base-TX-type CS1W-ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Units, so
prepare them in advance.
Network device
Contents
(1) CS-series Ethernet
Units (CS1W-ETN21)
or CJ-series Ethernet
Units (CJ1W-ETN21)
(2) Twisted-pair cable
These Ethernet Units are Communications Units that
connect a CS-series or CJ-series PLC to 100Base-TX
Ethernet networks. (They can also be used as 10Base-T.)
(3) Hub
Recommended Hubs
This is twisted-pair cable for connecting 100Base-TX-type
Ethernet Units to the hub, with an RJ45 Modular Connector at each end.
Use a category 3, 4, 5, or 5e UTP (unshielded twistedpair) or STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable.
This is a relay device for connecting multiple nodes in a
star LAN.
For details on recommended devices for constructing a network, refer to 2-4
Network Installation.
11
Section 1-3
System Configuration
1-3-3
Setup Area and Related Peripheral Devices
Making Settings in the
CPU Bus Unit System
Setup Area (with the CXProgrammer)
For the Ethernet Unit to function as a node on an Ethernet network, make the
settings, as required, in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area allocated in
non-volatile memory in the CPU Unit.
Use the CX-Programmer to make the settings (by connecting online from the
I/O Table Window, selecting the Ethernet Unit, and then selecting Unit Setup).
Each time the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted, it reads and uses the
contents of the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area as the settings for the communications services.
If setting items for expanded functionality of the Ethernet Unit are not displayed, make the settings after updating the Support Software using an auto
update or by using the Web function of the Ethernet Unit.
Personal computer
running Windows
CX-Programmer
Unit Setup
Ethernet Unit
CPU Bus Unit System
Setup Area
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
Making Settings in the
Routing Table Area (with
CX-Integrator)
OMRON Communications Units use OMRON's original FINS network system.
Make the settings for the FINS network and the relay path, as required, in the
Routing Table Area allocated to the non-volatile memory in the CPU Unit.
Use CX-Integrator to make the settings. (CX-Integrator is software that comes
with the CX-One and is automatically installed when the CX-One is installed.)
Each time the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted, it reads the contents of
the Routing Table Area as the settings for FINS network.
Personal computer
running Windows
CX-Integrator
Routing table
settings
Ethernet Unit
Routing Table Area
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
Middleware for FINS
Communications
Applications on a
Personal Computer
(FinsGateway)
FinsGateway can be used as middleware when constructing communications
applications on a personal computer for a FINS network, using Visual C++ or
Visual BASIC. The CX-Programmer and CX-Integrator can also be connected
online through FinsGateway. When FINS/UDP is used in the FINS communications service, all versions of FinsGateway can be used.
When FINS/TCP is used in the FINS communications service, only FinsGateway Version 2003 or higher can be used.
12
Section 1-3
System Configuration
When the CX-Programmer and CX-Integrator are connected online by FINS/
TCP, FinsGateway Version 2003 or higher must be used.
For CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or higher, FINS/TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online.
Personal computer running Windows
User-created
software
CX-Programmer
FinsGateway
Windows
Ethernet Unit
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
13
Section 1-4
Specifications
1-4
1-4-1
Specifications
General Specifications
CS-series Ethernet Unit
Item
Specifications
Model number
Type
CS1W-ETN21
100Base-TX (Can be used as 10Base-T)
Applicable PLCs
Unit classification
CS-series PLCs
CS-series CPU Bus Unit
Mounting location
Number of Units that can be mounted
CPU Rack or Expansion Rack
4 max. (including Expansion Racks)
Transfer
specifications
Media access method
Modulation method
CSMA/CD
Baseband
Transmission paths
Baud rate
Star form
100 Mbit/s (100Base-TX)
Transmission media
Unshielded twisted-pair (UDP) cable
Unshielded twisted-pair (UDP) cable
Categories: 5, 5e
Categories: 3, 4, 5, 5e
Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable
Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable
Categories: 100 Ω at 5, 5e
Categories: 100 Ω at 3, 4, 5, 5e
100 m (distance between hub and node)
Transmission distance
Number of cascade connections
10 Mbit/s (10Base-T)
No restrictions if switching hubs are used.
Current consumption (Unit)
Weight
380 mA max. at 5 V DC
200 g max.
Dimensions
Other general specifications
35 × 130 × 101 mm (W × H × D)
Conform to general specifications for the SYSMAC CS Series.
CJ-series Ethernet Unit
Item
Specifications
Model number
Type
CJ1W-ETN21
100Base-TX (Can be used as 10Base-T)
Applicable PLCs
Unit classification
CJ-series PLCs
CJ-series CPU Bus Unit
Mounting location
Number of Units that can be mounted
CPU Rack or Expansion Rack
4 max. (including Expansion Racks)
Transfer
specifications
Media access method
Modulation method
CSMA/CD
Baseband
Transmission paths
Baud rate
Star form
100 Mbit/s (100Base-TX)
Transmission media
Unshielded twisted-pair (UDP) cable
Unshielded twisted-pair (UDP) cable
Categories: 5, 5e
Categories: 3, 4, 5, 5e
Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable
Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable
Categories: 100 Ω at 5, 5e
Categories: 100 Ω at 3, 4, 5, 5e
100 m (distance between hub and node)
Transmission distance
Number of cascade connections
10 Mbit/s (10Base-TX)
No restrictions if switching hubs are used.
Current consumption (Unit)
Weight
370 mA max. at 5 V DC
100 g max.
Dimensions
Other general specifications
31 × 90 × 65 mm (W × H × D)
Conform to general specifications for the SYSMAC CJ Series.
14
Section 1-4
Specifications
1-4-2
Dimensions
CS1W-ETN21
ETN21
100M
ERH
TCP
FTP
HOST
RUN
ERC
SD
RD
LNK
UNIT
NO.
0
1
×161
×160
130
NODE
NO.
0
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
35
101
(Unit: mm)
CJ1W-ETN21
Back
Front
• Unit Version 1.5 or Later
ETN21
65
31
2.7
2.7
31
• Unit Version 1.4 or Earlier
ETN21
ERC
SD
RD
LINK
RUN
ERC
SD
RD
LINK
100M ERH
TCP
FTP
HOST
100M ERH
TCP
FTP
HOST
EF012
EF012
EF012
EF012
345
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
EF012
NODE
No.
x160
6789
x161
6789
345
6789
345
345
UNIT
No.
6789
6789
345
ABCD
RUN
UNIT
No.
NODE
No.
x161
ABCD
EF012
6789
345
90
90
ABCD
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
2.7
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
2.7
x160
(Unit: mm)
15
Section 1-4
Specifications
1-4-3
Software Configuration
The software supported by the Ethernet Unit runs in the layers shown in the
following diagram. The components that form the various layers are defined
below the diagram.
Memory Card /
EM File Memory
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
FINS communication service
7. FINS
Socket
services
FINS/UDP
11. SMTP
Socket
services
E-mail
E-mail
transmis- reception
sion
9. SMTP 10. POP3
FINS/TCP
FTP
8. FTP server
6. TCP
5. UDP
2. IP
3. ICMP
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
4. ARP
Ethernet
Unit
1. Ethernet (Ver. 2.0)
1,2,3...
1. Ethernet (Ver. 2.0)
The Version 2.0 Ethernet frame format is used for communications.
2. IP (Internet Protocol)
Transfers datagrams to destination nodes using IP addresses.
3. ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol)
Supports IP communications by signalling errors in data transfers.
4. ARP (Address Resolution Protocol)
Determines the Ethernet address (i.e., physical address) by broadcasting
based on the target IP address.
5. UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
Performs data communications. Data resends, priority control, flow control,
and other measures to ensure communications reliability are not performed for UDP communications, so the transmitted data may not arrive at
the destination node. To increase reliability, it is necessary to program special measures into the user applications.
6. TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
Performs communications after establishing a connection (i.e., a virtual circuit) with the destination node, providing a highly reliable communications
service.
7. FINS (Factory Interface Network Service)
A protocol that sends messages between PLCs on any of various OMRON
FA networks. To ensure that transmitted messages arrive at the destination
node, it is necessary to program special measures such as retry processing into the user's applications.
8. FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
Transfers data files.
9. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A communications protocol for sending e-mail by TCP/IP.
10. POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.0)
A communications protocol for receiving e-mail by TCP/IP.
11. SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
A communications protocol for automatic clock adjustment by UDP/IP.
12. DNS (Domain Name System)
A communications protocol for determining IP address names according
to UDP/IP and TCP/IP.
16
Section 1-5
Overview of Communications Functions
1-5
1-5-1
Overview of Communications Functions
FINS Communications Service
Basic Functions
FINS commands can be sent to or received from other PLCs or computers on
the same Ethernet network by executing SEND(090), RECV(098), or
CMND(490) instructions in the ladder diagram program. This enables various
control operations such as the reading and writing of I/O memory between
PLCs, mode changes, and file memory operations.
Ethernet
IP
UDP or TCP
FINS
IP
UDP or TCP
FINS
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
Ethernet Unit
Ethernet Unit
Ethernet Unit
User program
SEND(090),
RECV(098), or
CMND(490)
instruction
Executing, from the host computer, FINS commands with UDP/IP or TCP/IP
headers enables various control operations, such as the reading and writing
of I/O memory between PLCs, mode changes, and file memory operations.
For example, it is possible to connect online via Ethernet from FINS communications applications such as the CX-Programmer, and to perform remote programming and monitoring. (See note.)
Note
Use CX-Programmer version 4.0 to use TCP/IP. For lower versions of CX-Programmer, FinsGateway Version 2003 or higher is required to use TCP/IP.
Ethernet
IP
UDP or TCP
FINS
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
Ethernet Unit
The FINS gateway function enables access to PLCs on not only the same
Ethernet network but on various other networks, including SYSMAC LINK and
Controller Link.
Upgraded Functions
With the CS1W-ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21, the following functions have been
upgraded.
• The FINS communications service can be executed not only with UDP/IP
but also with TCP/IP, and it is even possible to use FINS communications
with both UDP/IP and TCP/IP together on the same network. Using TCP/
IP makes FINS communications highly reliable.
17
Section 1-5
Overview of Communications Functions
• Even if the IP address and UDP port number of the host computer (a
DHCP client computer) are changed, it is still possible for the host computer to send FINS commands to PLCs on the Ethernet network and to
receive responses. When UDP is used, either the automatic generation
(dynamic) method or the IP address table method must be selected for IP
address conversion. When TCP is used, changes in IP address and TCP
port numbers are handled automatically.
• Multiple FINS applications (CX-Programmer and user-created application
programs) at the same computer can be connected online to a PLC via
Ethernet (using either TCP/IP or UDP/IP).
1-5-2
Socket Services
The socket services allow devices on the Ethernet to send and receive various data using either the UDP or TCP protocol.
Manipulating Dedicated
Control Bits
One way to use socket services is to set the required parameters in the
parameter area allocated in the DM Area, and then to request particular UDP
or TCP socket services by turning ON dedicated control bits in memory. When
the Ethernet Unit has completed the requested process, the same bit is
turned OFF to provide notification. Data that is sent or received is automatically handled according to the I/O memory locations specified in the parameter area.
There is no need to execute the CMND(490) instruction or to monitor the completion timing and actual processing of the instruction, so this helps to simplify
ladder programming.
A total of eight ports (UDP and TCP combined) can be used for socket services.
Starting with unit version 1.5, the performance of sending and receiving has
been improved by using the option settings.
UNIX computer, etc.
(node with socket
services interface)
Ethernet
TCP/UDP
protocol
Ethernet Unit
TCP/UDP
protocol
IP
UDP TCP
Socket
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
Ethernet Unit
18
Service request switch
Parameters
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
Section 1-5
Overview of Communications Functions
Executing CMND(490)
Another way to use socket services is to request a UDP or TCP socket service by sending a FINS command to the Ethernet Unit by executing
CMND(490) from the CPU Unit. When the Ethernet Unit receives the socket
service request, it returns a response to the CPU Unit to confirm that it
received the request, and then begins the requested processing. When the
processing is completed, the results are stored in the Results Storage Area in
the CPU Unit.
Eight TCP ports and eight UDP ports can be used.
The TCP socket interface has been improved. The size of received data accumulated in the reception buffer is now stored, and a Data Received Flag has
been added, enabling the TCP socket's receive program to be executed after
the required data has been accumulated in the Ethernet Unit's reception
buffer. The keep-alive setting has also been enabled for TCP socket services.
UNIX computer, etc.
(node with socket
services interface)
Ethernet
TCP/UDP
protocol
Ethernet Unit
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
FINS
commands
TCP protocol
UDP protocol
IP
UDP TCP
Socket
Improved TCP Socket
Interface
FINS
responses
CMND
Results Storage
Area
Processing
results
Socket interface
Ethernet Unit CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
19
Section 1-5
Overview of Communications Functions
1-5-3
FTP Server Function
The Ethernet Unit has a built-in FTP server, so other computers on the Ethernet can read or write individual files on a Memory Card mounted to the CPU
Unit or in EM File Memory. This allows files to be exchanged between the host
computer and the PLC, with the host computer functioning as an FTP client
and the PLC as an FTP server.
Host computer
(FTP client)
Ethernet
FTP commands
Ethernet Unit
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
Memory Card or
EM File Memory
Host computer to PLC
PLC to host computer
File data
File data
Memory Card or
EM File Memory
1-5-4
Memory Card or
EM File Memory
Mail Send Function
This function automatically sends data in the CPU Unit's I/O memory (or a file
on a Memory Card) as an e-mail attachment from the Ethernet Unit to specified e-mail addresses when a pre-specified PLC condition is met. User-created data (in ASCII), error log data, and status data in the CPU Unit can all be
sent as text.
E-mail can be sent over the Internet, and not just within the intranet.
SMTP server
Ethernet
E-mail
Ethernet Unit
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
The e-mail can be sent on any of the following types of timing:
When the Mail Send Switch turns ON
When the value of a specified word meets a condition
When the value of a specified bit meets a condition
When an error is recorded in the Ethernet Unit's error log
When the CPU Unit's operating mode is changed
At regular intervals
Note
20
(1) Depending on the Internet service provider (ISP), the use of POP before
SMTP may be defined from the standpoint of security considerations.
(This Unit handles POP before SMTP.)
Section 1-5
Overview of Communications Functions
(2) An SMTP server is required to use the mail send function.
(3) Mail server settings require specialized knowledge, so they should always be handled by the network administrator.
(4) Be sure that you have a clear understanding of the mail system before using this function.
(5) Mail my not always be delivered. Depending on factors such as the condition of the network, mail that has been sent may not arrive at its destination.
1-5-5
Mail Receive Function
With the mail receive function, the user writes a command into the e-mail and
then sends the e-mail to the Ethernet Unit. The Ethernet Unit receives e-mail
at regular intervals, executes the commands, and sends back responses by email.
E-mail can be received over the Internet, and not just from within the intranet.
POP3 server
Ethernet
E-mail
Ethernet Unit
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
The following types of commands can be sent to the PLC: I/O memory read
and write, backup, operating mode changes, and file transfers (of 1 Mbyte or
less).
Note
(1) A POP3 server is required to use the mail receive function.
(2) Mail server settings require specialized knowledge, so they should always be handled by the network administrator.
(3) Be sure that you have a clear understanding of the mail system before using this function.
(4) Mail may not always be delivered. Depending on factors such as the condition of the network, mail that has been sent may not arrive at its destination.
21
Section 1-5
Overview of Communications Functions
1-5-6
Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
The Ethernet Unit can acquire clock information from the SNTP server at a
particular time or when a dedicated bit turns ON, and it can refresh the internal clock information of the CPU Unit to which it is mounted.
SNTP server
Ethernet
Clock information
Ethernet Unit
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
Note
(1) An SNTP server is required to use this function.
(2) SNTP server settings require specialized knowledge, so they should always be handled by the network administrator.
(3) Be sure that you have a clear understanding of the mail system before using.
(4) When using the Internet, depending on the condition of the network it
may not be possible to acquire the clock information.
1-5-7
Specifying Servers by Host Name
POP servers, SMTP servers, and SNTP servers can be specified by host
name rather than by IP address by using of the DNS client function.
DNS server
IP address
Ethernet
Host name
Ethernet Unit
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
Note
22
A DNS server is required to specify servers by host name.
Section 1-6
Nomenclature and Functions
1-6
Nomenclature and Functions
This section describes Ethernet Unit component names, settings, and LED
indicators.
1-6-1
Component Names
CS-series Ethernet Units
CS1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX)
Front
ETN21
UNIT
NO.
NODE
NO.
Indicators
Display the operating status of the Unit.
100M
ERH
TCP
FTP
HOST
RUN
ERC
SD
RD
LNK
0
0
Unit Number Switch
Used to set the Ethernet Unit's unit
number in one digit hexadecimal.
1
×161
×160
Node Address Switches
Used to set the Ethernet Unit's FINS
node number in two digits hexadecimal.
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
Ethernet Connector
Used to connect the Ethernet twisted-pair cable.
Each communications device connected to the Ethernet network is allocated
a unique Ethernet address. For the Ethernet Unit, this Ethernet address is
shown on the right side of the Unit as a 12-digit hexadecimal number.
CS1W-ETN21
ETHERNET UNIT
Lot No.
OMRON Corporation
MADE IN JAPAN
@@@@@@@@@@@@
Ethernet Address
Ethernet address (12 digits)
Note
The Ethernet address can also be checked using the FINS command, CONTROLLER DATA READ. For details, refer to 7-3-2 CONTROLLER DATA
READ on page 162.
23
Section 1-6
Nomenclature and Functions
CJ-series Ethernet Units
CJ1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX)
Front
• Unit Version 1.5 or Later
• Unit Version 1.4 or Earlier
Slider
For mounting to other Units.
ETN21
EF012
ABCD
EF012
ABCD
EF012
NODE
No.
x160
345
6789
x161
6789
345
6789
345
UNIT
No.
345
6789
6789
345
RD LINK
EF012
100M ERH TCP FTP HOST
RUN ERC SD
100M ERH TCP FTP HOST
EF012
RD LINK
ABC
RUN ERC SD
ABCD
ETN21
Indicators
Display the operating status of the Unit.
UNIT
No.
NODE
No.
x161
ABCD
EF012
6789
345
ABCD
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
x160
Unit Number Switch
Used to set the Ethernet Unit's unit
number in one digit hexadecimal.
Node Number Switches
Used to set the Ethernet Unit's FINS
node number in two digits hexadecimal.
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
Ethernet Connector
Used to connect the Ethernet twisted-pair cable.
Mounting Pin for DIN Track
Used when mounting the Unit to DIN Track.
Slider
For mounting to other Units.
Note
24
An IP address label is provided with the Unit. Writing the IP address and the
subnet mask on this label and then attaching it to the front of the Unit allows
the IP address and subnet mask to be easily confirmed.
Section 1-6
Nomenclature and Functions
• Unit Version 1.5 or Later
• Unit Version 1.4 or Earlier
ETN21
Example
ETN21
100M ERH TCP FTP HOST
100M ERH TCP FTP HOST
EF012
EF012
EF012
EF012
345
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
EF012
ABCD
NODE
No.
x160
6789
x161
6789
345
6789
345
345
UNIT
No.
6789
6789
345
RD LINK
RUN ERC SD
RD LINK
RUN ERC SD
UNIT
No.
NODE
No.
x161
ABCD
EF012
6789
ABCD
133.113.
0
x16
IP ADDRESS
0. 42
133.113.
0. 42
255.255.255.0
Attach the label to the front
of the Ethernet Unit between
the node number switches
and the Ethernet connector.
0. 42
SUBNET MASK
SUBNET MASK
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
133.113.
SUBNET MASK
345
IP ADDRESS
IP ADDRESS
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
Each communications device connected to the Ethernet network is allocated
a unique Ethernet address. For the Ethernet Unit, this Ethernet address is
shown on the right side of the Unit as a 12-digit hexadecimal number.
CJ1W-ETN21
ETHERNET UNIT
Lot No.
OMRON Corporation
MADE IN JAPAN
@@@@@@@@@@@@
Ethernet Address
Ethernet address (12 digits)
Note
1-6-2
The Ethernet address can also be checked using the FINS command, CONTROLLER DATA READ. For details, refer to 7-3-2 CONTROLLER DATA
READ on page 162.
Indicators
The status of the indicators show the operating status of the Ethernet Unit, as
shown below.
CS1W-ETN21
(100Base-TX)
CJ1W-ETN21
(100Base-TX)
ETN21
ETN21
RUN
ERC
SD
RD
LNK
RUN ERC SD
100M
ERH
TCP
FTP
HOST
RD LNK
100M ERH TCP FTP HOST
25
Section 1-6
Nomenclature and Functions
Indicator
Color
Green
Status
Not lit
100M
(Transfer speed)
Green
Lit
Not lit
Normal operation
10 Mbps (10Base-T)
ERC
(Ethernet Unit error)
Red
Lit
Not lit
100 Mbps (100Base-TX)
Unit normal
Lit
Node address not between 1 and 254
A hardware (e.g., internal memory) error has occurred.
ERH
(CPU Unit error)
Red
Not lit
Lit
CPU Unit normal
An error has occurred at the CPU Unit.
There is an error in the I/O table, unit number, unit setup, or routing
table settings.
An illegal IP address has been set. With automatic address generation, the rightmost two digits of the IP address do not match the
node address.
RUN
Flashing
Meaning
Operation stopped
Hardware error
SD
(Send Data)
Yellow
Not lit
Lit
Not sending data (ready to send)
Sending data
RD
(Receive Data)
Yellow
Not lit
Lit
Not receiving data (ready to receive)
Receiving data
LNK
(Link status)
Yellow
Not lit
Lit
Link not established between hubs.
Link established between hubs.
TCP
(TCP socket in use)
Yellow
Not lit
FTP
(FTP Server Service)
Yellow
Not lit
None of the eight TCP sockets provided for socket services is in
use.
At least one of the eight TCP sockets provided for socket services
is in use.
FTP server on standby.
HOST
(Server connection status)
Yellow
Lit
Not lit
FTP server operating (one user connected).
Server (DNS, SMTP, POP3, or SNTP) not being used.
Flashing
Lit
An error has occurred in the server connection.
The server connection is normal.
Lit
26
Section 1-7
Comparison with Previous Models
1-7
Comparison with Previous Models
Item
Previous models
CS1W-ETN11
CJ1W-ETN11
10Base-T
CS1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN21
100Base-TX, 10Base-T
Number of nodes
PLC maintenance via the Internet
126
Not possible to send FINS
commands from a personal
computer to the PLC via the
Internet.
254
Can send commands (including FINS commands) by e-mail over the Internet from a
personal computer to the PLC (using the
mail receive function).
Server specification
Specification by IP address
only
Specification by IP address or by host name
(using the DNS client function)
Not possible for a computer
automatically acquiring IP
addresses to send commands
to the PLC and receive
responses.
A computer automatically acquiring IP
addresses can send commands to the PLC
and receive responses.
(UDP/IP: By automatic generation
(dynamic) IP address conversion method;
TCP/IP: Automatic)
Model number
Physical layer
Communi- FINS comcations ser- municavice
tions
service
Automatic IP
address acquisition (DHCP client) by personal
computer
FINS communi- Not possible
cations with personal computers
without fixed
node addresses
New models
Possible (with Automatic allocation by
Ethernet Unit)
(Client FINS automatic node address allocation function, TCP/IP only)
Handling TCP/
IP
Simultaneous
connection of
multiple applications in a personal computer
Mail functions
With FINS communications,
only UDP/IP possible.
Not possible
With FINS communications, both UDP/IP
and TCP/IP possible.
Possible (with both UDP/IP and TCP/IP)
Mail send function only
E-mail attachments with I/O memory data
are now possible for the mail send function.
(SMTP client function, file attachment function)
With the mail receive function, commands
can be received from the PLC. (POP3 client
function, mail receive function)
FTP server function
Socket services function
Same
---
Automatic clock information
adjustment
Not possible
The following features have been added to
the TCP socket services function:
• Use of keep-alive
• Number of bytes of data received for TCP
socket Nos. 1 to 8
• Status of TCP socket Nos. 1 to 8: Data
Received Flag
CPU Unit built-in clock can be adjusted from
SNTP server. (SNTP client function)
27
Section 1-8
Unit Version Upgrade Information
1-8
Unit Version Upgrade Information
The details of the upgrade to the Ethernet Unit version are as follows:
■
Unit Version 1.3
Upgrade
■
The unit settings and status monitoring for the Ethernet Unit
can be easily performed from a Web browser.
Function prohibiting
access using FINS/
UDP from nodes
with dynamically
changed IP
addresses
Access to change the remote IP address from a node using
FINS/UDP can be prohibited (IP address protection).
Unit Version 1.4
Upgrade
ETN11-compatible
mode added to the
ETN21 settings for
FINS/UDP.
■
Details
Web function added
Details
A mode compatible with the CS1W-ETN11/CJ1W-ETN11 was
added in the operating specifications for FINS/UDP messages
sent from a different UDP port number than the FINS/UDP
port number set in the Ethernet Unit.
Unit Version 1.5
Upgrade
Details
Added CIDR function An option setting has been added to the subnet mask settings
to subnet mask set- to enable CIDR. Enabling CIDR enables using the IP address
tings.
with classless subnet mask settings.
Added option for
high-speed socket
services.
Added linger option
to socket options for
TCP open request.
Enabling high-speed socket services improves the performance of sending and receiving for socket services using specific bits. If high-speed socket services are disabled,
performance is the same as previously.
It is possible to specify the linger option in the option settings
for the TCP open request (both passive and active).
Changed position of The position of the node address setting switches was
node address setchanged. The setting method and setting range are the same
ting switches (CJ1W- as previously.
ETN21 only)
28
SECTION 2
Installation and Initial Setup
This section explains how to install the Ethernet Unit and make the initial settings required for operation.
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
Overview of Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
2-2-1
CS-series Ethernet Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
2-2-2
CJ-series Ethernet Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
Mounting to a PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
2-3-1
Mounting to a CS-series PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
2-3-2
Mounting to a CJ-series PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
2-4-1
Basic Installation Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
2-4-2
Recommended Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
2-4-3
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
2-4-4
Using Contact Outputs (Common to All Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Connecting to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
2-5-1
Ethernet Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
2-5-2
Connecting the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
Creating I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
2-6-1
I/O Table Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
2-6-2
Connecting Programming Devices to the PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
2-6-3
Procedure for Creating I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
Unit Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
2-7-1
Using the CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
2-7-2
Using the Web Browser Setting Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
2-8
Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
2-9
Unit Setup for Particular Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
2-10 Communications Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
2-10-1 PING Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
2-10-2 Ethernet Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
2-10-3 Host Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
2-11 Converting from Previous Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
29
Section 2-1
Overview of Startup Procedure
2-1
Overview of Startup Procedure
The following procedure is the same for the CS Series and CJ Series.
Determine the local IP address
and address conversion method.
Refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses.
Set the unit number.
Refer to 2-2 Switch Settings.
Set the node number.
Refer to 2-2 Switch Settings.
Mount the Unit to the PLC.
Refer to 2-3 Mounting to a PLC.
Connect to the network
using twisted-pair cable.
Refer to 2-4 Network Installation.
Turn ON power to the CPU Unit.
Refer to 2-6 Creating I/O Tables.
Create the I/O tables.
(See note 3.)
Setting only the IP address (not
making other Unit settings) for
simple application or operating
with only the Programming
Console (setting possible with CXProgrammer or Programming
Console).
Connecting to the Ethernet Unit
without making any settings.
Setting system settings freely
(setting possible with
CX-Programmer or Web function).
(See note 2.)
(See note 1.)
Set local IP address in DM Area
words allocated for CPU Unit Units.
Use the default IP address.
Refer to IP Address in 2-8 Basic Settings.
Create the routing tables.
Perform Unit setup.
(Create IP router tables.)
Refer to IP Address in 2-8 Basic Settings.
Refer to 4-2 DM Area Allocations.
Refer to 6-4 Creating Routing
Tables.
(See note 4.)
Set the local IP address in the
CPU Bus Unit setup area.
Routing tables must be set to enable the following.
• Using the FINS communications service
• Using the CMND instruction with more than one
Communications Unit mounted to the PLC.
Refer to SECTION 3 CX-Programmer Unit Setup.
Refer to IP Address in 2-8 Basic Settings.
(See note 5.)
Check communications.
(PING command and/or
echo test).
Refer to 2-9 Unit Setup for Particular Applications.
Note 1: Used mainly when a Programming Console is used to set only the local IP address (set in allocated DM words). When using this method, always
leave the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area set to the default value of 0.0.0.0 If the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area contains any other
value, any setting made in the allocated DM words will be overwritten with it.
2: The local IP address and other parameters can be set with the CX-Programmer.
3: A PLC Programming Device is required: CX-Programmer, CX-Integrator, Programming Console, etc.
4: The CX-Integrator is required.
5: The CX-Programmer is required.
30
Refer to IP
Address in 2-8
Basic Settings.
Section 2-2
Switch Settings
2-2
2-2-1
Switch Settings
CS-series Ethernet Units
Setting the Unit Number
The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than
one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC. Use a small screwdriver to
make the setting, taking care not to damage the rotary switch. The unit number is factory-set to 0.
Setting range:
0 to F
Note
(1) Turn OFF the power supply before setting the unit number.
(2) If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed, then I/O tables
must be created for the PLC.
(3) With CS-series and CJ-series PLCs, words are automatically allocated in
the CIO Area and DM Area according to the unit numbers that are set.
For details, refer to SECTION 4 Ethernet Unit Memory Allocations.
Setting the Node Address
With the FINS communications service, when there are multiple Ethernet
Units connected to the Ethernet network, the Ethernet Units are identified by
node addresses. Use the node address switches (NODE NO.) to set the node
address between 01 and FE hexadecimal (1 to 254 decimal). Do not set a
number that has already been set for another node on the same network.
×161
×160
Setting range:
01 to FE (1 to 254 decimal)
The left switch sets the sixteens digit (most significant digit) and the right
switch sets the ones digit (least significant digit). The node address is factoryset to 01.
Note
Turn OFF the power supply before setting the node address.
Relation to IP Addresses
When using the automatic generation method (either dynamic or passive) for
address conversion, set the rightmost byte of the IP address set for the Ethernet Unit to the same value as the node address. If this is not possible, either
the IP address table method or the combined method must be used for
address conversion. (For details, refer to 5-2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications.) If the FINS communications service is not used on the Ethernet network, then it is all right to overlap with other Ethernet Units. The setting,
however, must be made within a range of 01 to FE. If a value outside of this
range is set, the ERC indicator will light.
Unit Operating Mode
Change Function
If the node address is set to 00, the Unit operating mode change function will
start.
This function changes the format for the Unit Setup (in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area) when converting to a CS1W-ETN21 or CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Unit from one of the previous models (CS1W-ETN01/11 or CJ1W-ET11).
For details, refer to 2-11 Converting from Previous Models.
31
Section 2-2
Switch Settings
2-2-2
CJ-series Ethernet Units
Setting the Unit Number
The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than
one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC. Use a small screwdriver to
make the setting, taking care not to damage the rotary switch. The unit number is factory-set to 0.
EF01
6789
2345
ABCD
Note
UNIT
No.
Setting range:
0 to F
(1) Turn OFF the power supply before setting the unit number.
(2) If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed, then I/O tables
must be created for the PLC.
(3) With CS-series and CJ-series PLCs, dedicated areas are automatically
allocated in the CIO Area and DM Area according to the unit numbers that
are set. For details, refer to SECTION 4 Ethernet Unit Memory Allocations.
Setting the Node Address
With the FINS communications service, when there are multiple Ethernet
Units connected to the Ethernet network, the Ethernet Units are identified by
node addresses. Use the node address switches to set the node address
between 01 and FE hexadecimal (1 to 254 decimal). Do not set a number that
has already been set for another node on the same network.
• Unit Version
1.5 or Later
EF012
EF012
ABCD
EF012
345
ABCD
x16
NODE
No.
x160
6789
1
6789
345
6789
345
• Unit Version
1.4 or Earlier
NODE
No.
x161
Setting range
01 to FE (1 to 254 decimal)
ABCD
EF012
6789
345
x160
ABCD
The left switch sets the sixteens digit (most significant digit) and the right
switch sets the ones digit (least significant digit). The node address is factoryset to 01.
Note
Relation to IP Addresses
32
Turn OFF the power supply before setting the node address.
When using the automatic generation method (either dynamic or passive) for
address conversion, set the rightmost byte of the IP address set for the Ethernet Unit to the same value as the node address. If this is not possible, either
the IP address table method or the combined method must be used for
address conversion. (For details, refer to 5-2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications.) If the FINS communications service is not used on the Ethernet network, then it is all right to overlap with other Ethernet Units. The setting,
however, must be made within a range of 01 to FE. If a value outside of this
range is set, the ERC indicator will light.
Mounting to a PLC
Section 2-3
Unit Operating Mode
Change Function
If the node address is set to 00, the Unit operating mode change function will
start.
This function changes the format for the Unit Setup (in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area) when converting to a CS1W-ETN21 or CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Unit from one of the previous models (CS1W-ETN01/11 or CJ1W-ET11).
For details, refer to 2-11 Converting from Previous Models.
2-3
2-3-1
Mounting to a PLC
Mounting to a CS-series PLC
Ethernet Units can be mounted to any slots in either a CS-series CPU Rack or
a CS-series Expansion CPU Rack, but the number of slots to which they can
be mounted depends on the Backplane. Up to four Ethernet Units can be
mounted to a single PLC. If it is mounted in combination with other CPU Bus
Units (e.g., Controller Link Units), the maximum total number of CPU Bus
Units that can be mounted is 16.
Note
Tighten PLC Backplane mounting screws to a torque of 0.9 N⋅m, and the
Unit’s screws to a torque of 0.4 N⋅m.
PS
CPU
CS1W-BC023/BC033/BC053/BC083/BC103 CPU Backplane
CS-series CPU Rack
Can mount to any position,
with 2, 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots.
2, 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots
(Expansion Backplane not possible with 2-slot CPU Backplane.)
CS1W-BI033/BI053/BI083/BI103 CS-series Expansion Backplane
PS
CS-series Expansion Rack
Up to four Units can be mounted
to the slots shown in the diagrams
on the left.
Can mount to any position,
with 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots.
3, 5, 8, or 10 slots
C200H Expansion I/O Backplane
PS
C200H Expansion Rack
Ethernet Unit cannot be
mounted to any slots.
CPU: CPU Unit
PS: Power Supply Unit
Note
2-3-2
The CS1W-ETN21 Ethernet Unit’s maximum current consumption is 380 mA.
Make sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the
same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output
capacity of the Power Supply Unit.
Mounting to a CJ-series PLC
Ethernet Units can be connected to either a CJ-series CPU Rack or a CJseries Expansion CPU Rack. Connect the Ethernet Unit in any of the positions shown below using the sliders on the top and bottom of the Unit. Up to
four Ethernet Units can be mounted to a single PLC. If it is mounted in combination with other CPU Bus Units (e.g., Controller Link Units), the maximum
total number of CPU Bus Units that can be mounted is 16.
33
Section 2-4
Network Installation
CPU Rack
10 Units max.
End cover
P C I
S P C
U
Expansion Backplane
10 Units max.
End cover
P I
S I
Up to four Ethernet
Units can be mounted.
Expansion Backplane
10 Units max.
End cover
P I
S I
Expansion Backplane
10 Units max.
End cover
P I
S I
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
IC: I/O Control Unit
II: I/O Interface Unit
The CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Unit’s maximum current consumption is 370 mA.
Make sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the
same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output
capacity of the Power Supply Unit.
2-4
2-4-1
Network Installation
Basic Installation Precautions
• Take the greatest care when installing the Ethernet System, being sure to
follow ISO 8802-3 specifications. You must obtain a copy of these specifications and be sure you understand them before attempting to install an
Ethernet System. Unless you are already experienced in installing communications systems, we strongly recommend that you employ a professional to install your system.
• Do not install Ethernet equipment near sources of noise. If noise-prone
environments are unavoidable, be sure to take adequate measures
against noise interference, such as installing network components in
grounded metal cases, using optical links in the system, etc.
34
Section 2-4
Network Installation
2-4-2
Recommended Products
The following products are recommended for use with the CS1W-ETN21
Ethernet Unit.
Part
Hub
Maker
Model
number
100BASE-TX
PHOESWITCH
NIX
5TX
CONTACT
10BASE-T
MR820TLX
Allied
Telesis
Twisted-pair
cable
Specifications
Inquires
10/100 Mbit/s 5-port hub
9-port hub with 10Base-5 Allied Telesis
backbone port
(0120) 86-0442
(in Japan only)
100BASE-TX
Fujikura
F-LINK-E
0.5mm x 4P
STP (shielded twistedpair) cable: Category 5,
5e
Note: Impedance is limited to 100 Ω.
Fujikura
CTP-LAN5
0.5mm x 4P
UTP (unshielded twistedpair) cable: Category 5,
5e
Fujikura
F-LINK-E
0.5mm x 4P
Fujikura
CTP-LAN5
0.5mm x 4P
STP (shielded twistedpair) cable: Category 3,
4, 5, 5e
Note: Impedance is limited to 100 Ω.
UTP (unshielded twistedpair) cable: Category 3,
4, 5, 5e
---
10BASE-T
Connectors
(Modular
plug)
2-4-3
STP Plug
MPS588
Panduit
Corp
---
UTP Plug
Panduit
MP588-C
Corp
---
Precautions
Precautions on Laying Twisted-pair Cable
Basic Precautions
• Press the cable connector in firmly until it locks into place at both the hub
and the Ethernet Unit.
• After laying the twisted-pair cable, check the connection with a 10Base-T
cable tester.
Environment Precautions
• The UTP cable is not shielded, and the hub is designed for use in OA
environments. In environments subject to noise, construct a system with
shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable and hubs suitable for an FA environment.
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable together with high-voltage lines.
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable near devices that generate noise.
35
Section 2-4
Network Installation
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable in locations subject to high temperatures
or high humidity.
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable in locations subject to excessive dirt and
dust or to oil mist or other contaminants.
Hub Installation
Environment Precautions
• Do not install the hub near devices that generate noise.
• Do not install the hub in locations subject to high temperatures or high
humidity.
• Do not install the hub in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to
oil mist or other contaminants.
Hub Connection Methods
If more hub ports are required, they can be added by connecting more than
one hub. There are two possible connection methods for hubs: Cascade and
stacked.
Cascade Connections
• Connect two hubs to each other as follows: Connect an MDI port to an
MDI-X port with a straight cable; connect two MDI ports with a cross
cable; and connect two MDI-X ports with a cross cable.
Note
It is very difficult to distinguish cross cables and straight cables by appearance. Incorrect cables will cause communications to fail. We recommend
using cascade connections with straight cables whenever possible.
• With cascade connections, up to 5 segments can be connected using up
to 4 repeaters (i.e., 4 hubs).
MDI ports
MDI-X port
(cross)
Hub
Stack Connections
Straight cable
Cross cable
Hub
Hub
Hub
• Connect the hubs using special cables or special racks.
• Normally there is no limit to the number of hubs in a stack, and each stack
is treated as one hub. Some hubs, however, are limited in the number of
hubs per stack.
Hub
Four stackable hubs
Stack cable
36
Two stackable hubs
Stack cable
Section 2-4
Network Installation
2-4-4
Using Contact Outputs (Common to All Units)
Communications errors can occur when Contact Output Units are mounted to
the same Rack or connected to the same PLC as an Ethernet Unit due to
noise generated by the contact outputs. Use one or more of the following
measures when installing Contact Output Units and Ethernet Units on the
same Rack.
Mounting Location
Mount (or connect) any Contact Output Units as far away from the Ethernet
Unit as possible.
Contact Output Unit
Ethernet Unit
Transceiver/Hub
Contact outputs
Cable Location
Separate the transceiver cable or twisted-pair cable connecting the Ethernet
Unit as far from the wiring to the Contact Output Units as possible. The coaxial cable must also be placed as far away from the Contact Output Units and
their wiring as possible.
Contact outputs
Contact Output Unit
Ethernet Unit
To transceiver/hub
37
Section 2-5
Connecting to the Network
2-5
2-5-1
Connecting to the Network
Ethernet Connectors
The following standards and specifications apply to the connectors for the
Ethernet twisted-pair cable.
• Electrical specifications: Conforming to IEEE802.3 standards.
• Connector structure:
2-5-2
RJ45 8-pin Modular Connector
(conforming to ISO 8877)
Connector pin
Signal name
1
Transmission data +
Abbr.
TD+
Signal direction
Output
2
3
Transmission data –
Reception data +
TD–
RD+
Output
Input
4
5
Not used.
Not used.
-----
-----
6
7
Reception data –
Not used.
RD–
---
Input
---
8
Hood
Not used.
Frame ground
--FG
-----
Connecting the Cable
!Caution Turn OFF the PLC’s power supply before connecting or disconnecting twistedpair cable.
!Caution Allow enough space for the bending radius of the twisted-pair cable as shown
in below.
35 mm
1,2,3...
1. Lay the twisted-pair cable.
2. Connect the cable to the hub. Be sure to press in the cable until it locks into
place.
Request cable installation from a qualified professional.
38
Section 2-6
Creating I/O Tables
3. Connect the cable to the connector on the Ethernet Unit. Be sure to press
in the cable until it locks into place.
Example: CS1W-ETN21
RJ45 Modular Connector
Ethernet Unit
2-6
2-6-1
Creating I/O Tables
I/O Table Overview
I/O tables are used to identify Units mounted to the PLC, and to allocate I/O to
them. With CS-series and CJ-series PLCs, whenever there is a change to the
Unit configuration it is necessary to create I/O tables and register the Units to
the CPU Unit.
The I/O tables can be created in the following ways.
• Using the CX-Programmer offline.
• Using the CX-Programmer online, with the Units mounted to the PLC.
• Using the Programming Console, with the Units mounted to the PLC.
• Using the CPU Unit's automatic I/O allocation at startup. (This method is
available for the CJ Series only.)
From here on, operations involving the Programming Console are
described.
2-6-2
Connecting Programming Devices to the PLC
To create the I/O tables, connect a Programming Device (such as a CX-Programmer or Programming Console) to the PLC.
Applicable Programming
Devices
The following Programming Devices can be used with CS/CJ-series PLCs.
Programming Console
Model number
C200H-PRO27-E
CQM1-PRO01-E
Key Sheet (required)
CS1W-KS001-E
Recommended cable (required)
CS1W-CN224 (cable length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN624 (cable length: 6.0 m)
CS1W-CN114 (cable length: 0.1 m)
CX-Programmer (Version 3.20 or Higher) and CX-Integrator
The operations are explained here using a Programming Console. For details
regarding the CX-Programmer and the CX-Integrator, refer to the CX-Programmer User’s Manual. Refer to the CX-Integrator Operation Manual (W445)
for connection procedures and operating procedures for the CX-Integrator.
CX-Integrator is software that comes with CX-One and is automatically
installed when CX-One is installed.
39
Section 2-6
Creating I/O Tables
Connecting Programming
Devices
2-6-3
To connect a Programming Console, attach a CS/CJ-series Key Sheet and
then connect the Console to the CPU Unit’s peripheral port. (It cannot be connected to the RS-232C port.)
Procedure for Creating I/O Tables
The procedure for creating I/O tables is shown here, taking as an example I/O
tables that is generated automatically for a PLC connected online. In this
example, a Programming Console is used for creating the I/O tables. For an
explanation of how to create I/O tables using a CX-Programmer, refer to the
CX-Programmer User’s Manual.
Use the following procedure to create the I/O tables.
Note
With the CJ Series, it is necessary to create I/O tables only when I/O allocation is performed by the user. With the CS Series, it is always necessary to
create I/O tables.
Initial screen
SHIFT
CH
*DM
000000 I/O TBL ?
CHG
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
????
WRITE
Password
000000CPU BU ST?
0:CLR 1:KEEP
or
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT OK
40
(Save or clear the CPU Bus Unit System Setup.)
Section 2-7
Unit Setup Procedure
2-7
2-7-1
Unit Setup Procedure
Using the CX-Programmer
Use the CX-Programmer (Ver. 3.20 or higher) for the Ethernet Unit Setup, and
follow the procedure described below. Some functions added with unit version
1.3 require CX-Programmer version 5.0 or higher for setting.
1,2,3...
1. Connect the CX-Programmer online.
The CX-Programmer can be connected to the PLC in either of the following
ways:
a. Connect the personal computer to the PLC by serial cable, through either a peripheral port or RS-232C port.
b.
Connect the personal computer to the PLC by Ethernet.
When Ethernet Unit is registered in the I/O tables in the CPU Unit, the
Ethernet Unit will operate using the default IP address
(192.168.250.node_number). This default IP address can be used initially
to connect online.
For details on connecting the CX-Programmer to the PLC by serial cable,
refer to the CX-Programmer operation manual.
For details on connecting the CX-Programmer to the PLC by Ethernet, refer to 6-5 Using FINS Applications.
2. Use the mouse to select I/O table in the Project Window. Either doubleclick or right-click to display the Properties Menu, and select Open. The
I/O Table Window will then be displayed.
41
Unit Setup Procedure
Section 2-7
3. Read the I/O tables from the PLC and select the Rack to which the Ethernet Unit is mounted.
4. Move the cursor to the Ethernet Unit and right-click. Select Unit Setup from
the popup menu to display the window for making the Ethernet Unit Setup.
The default settings are shown below.
At the point where the Ethernet Unit is mounted and the I/O tables has just
been created, the default values are in effect for all of the settings.
42
Section 2-7
Unit Setup Procedure
5. Make the required settings (i.e., the IP address in this case).
6. Transfer the settings to the PLC.
Click on Yes in the following dialog box.
7.
In order for the Ethernet Unit Setup to go into effect, the Unit must be restarted.
Click on Yes in the following dialog box.
8. Check the Ethernet Unit's LED indicators.
After the RUN indicator has turned OFF and then turned ON again, the
Ethernet will recognize the new settings (i.e., the IP address in this case).
2-7-2
Using the Web Browser Setting Function
For Ethernet Units with Unit Ver. 1.3 or later, the Ethernet Unit’s system settings can be set using the Web browser of a personal computer or other
device. The Ethernet Unit’s Web window is displayed by accessing the following URL from the Web browser.
URL: http://(Ethernet Unit’s IP address)/0
Use the following procedure to set the Unit’s system settings (IP address in
this example) using Internet Explorer version 6.0 and the Ethernet Unit’s Web
function.
43
Unit Setup Procedure
1,2,3...
Section 2-7
1. Connect to the Ethernet Unit from the Web browser.
In this example, the URL is specified as http://192.168.250.1/0 using the
Ethernet Unit’s default IP address.
2. Select Settings from the menu on the left side of the window to display the
Settings Menu.
44
Section 2-7
Unit Setup Procedure
3. Select 1. IP address and Protocols - System to display the Login Password field on the right of the window.
4. Input the default password (“ETHERNET” all in upper case) and click the
Login Button.
5. The settings in the System menu will be displayed.
The following window shows the default system settings.
45
Section 2-8
Basic Settings
6. Make the required settings (i.e., the IP address in this example).
7. After entering the correct values, click the Set Button followed by the Regist Button to register them.
The Set Button is used to transfer the entered values from the personal computer, and temporarily register them in the Ethernet Unit.
The Regist Button stores the set values that have been temporarily registered
in the Ethernet to the flash memory (non-volatile memory) of the CPU Unit.
The Ethernet Unit reads the unit settings from flash memory (non-volatile
memory) when the power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted. Therefore,
when making the unit settings using the Web function, always click the Set
Button before the Regist Button. Otherwise the entered set values will not be
used. The Set Button and Regist Button are provided on the window for each
setting item.
The functions of the other buttons are as follows:
• Cancel Button
Use this button to cancel the entered value and display the value that was
previously set with the Set Button again. If the Set Button has not been
clicked, the value that was read from the CPU Unit’s flash memory (nonvolatile memory) when the Ethernet Unit was started will be displayed.
• Reload Button
Use this button read and display the values saved in the CPU Unit’s flash
memory (non-volatile memory).
8. To enable the unit settings that have been registered in the CPU Unit’s
flash memory (non-volatile memory, turn the power to the PLC OFF and
ON again, or restart the Ethernet Unit.
2-8
Basic Settings
The following items comprise the basic settings in the Ethernet Unit
(100Base-TX) setup. Each item is described in detail below.
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Broadcast settings
• Baud rate
• TCP/IP keep-alive
• IP router table
■ IP Address
For the IP address, set the Ethernet Unit's local IP address.
46
Section 2-8
Basic Settings
Depending on the value that is set, the IP address has a great influence on
the connectability of the Ethernet Unit. To make full use of the Ethernet functions, it is necessary to study the applications and network system design
when determining IP address allocations. Before setting the IP address, refer
to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses.
There are several ways to set IP addresses.
Default Setting
The Ethernet Unit operates using the default IP address when the Unit is
mounted to the PLC and initially registered in the I/O tables (i.e., when the
Unit settings have not been made and the IP Address Display/Setting in the
CPU Bus Unit Words Allocated in the DM Area is still all zeros).
The default IP address is determined as follows:
Default IP address = 192.168.250.FINS node address
The FINS node address is set by the rotary switch on the front of the Ethernet
Unit. If the defaults are used for the IP address and the Unit settings, the settings will be as shown below.
IP address
Item
Operation status
192.168.250.FINS node address
Subnet mask
Broadcast settings
255.255.255.0 (Class C mask)
4.3BSD
Baud rate
TCP/IP keep-alive
Auto
120 min.
IP router table
None (IP router not enabled)
Setting the IP Address in the CPU Bus Unit Words Allocated in the DM
Area
This method sets the IP address in the IP Address Display/Setting Area in the
CPU Bus Unit Words Allocated in the DM Area, when the IP address is not set
in the Unit Setup. When the IP address is set in the Unit Setup, the IP Address
Display/Setting Area becomes the area for displaying the settings.
To make settings in the IP Address Display/Setting Area, use the CX-Programmer or Programming Console to write the values. In order for the new
settings to go into effect, either the Ethernet Unit must be restarted or the
power must be turned ON again to the PLC.
m+98
15
14 13
(1)
m+99
(5)
12
11
10 09
(2)
08
(6)
07
06 05
(3)
04
(7)
03
02 01
(4)
00
(8)
IP address: (1)(2).(3)(4).(5)(6).(7)(8) (hexadecimal)
If only the IP address is set, according to the IP Address Display/Setting Area,
and the defaults are used for all other Unit settings, the settings will be as
shown below.
Item
IP address
Status
Words allocated for CPU Bus Unit (m+98 to m+99)
Subnet mask
Broadcast settings
Uses value corresponding to IP address class.
4.3BSD specifications
Baud rate
TCP/IP keep-alive
Auto
120 minutes
IP router table
Not set. (IP routing not supported.)
47
Section 2-8
Basic Settings
Unit Setup
This method sets the IP address by first selecting the Ethernet Unit from the
CX-Programmer's I/O Table Window while connected online, and then setting
the IP address from the Unit Setup.
Example: Using the CX-Programmer to Set the IP Address to 10.3.65.1
When an IP address is set in the Unit Setup, that value is displayed in the IP
Address Display/Setting Area in the DM Area words allocated for CPU Bus
Units.
When the IP address is set by the CX-Programmer, and the defaults are used
for all other Unit settings, the settings will be as shown below.
Item
IP address
Status
Set by CX-Programmer.
Subnet mask
Uses value corresponding to IP address class when
not using CIDR.
Broadcast settings
Baud rate
4.3BSD specifications
Auto
TCP/IP keep-alive
IP router table
120 minutes
Not set. (IP routing not supported.)
■ Subnet Mask
For the subnet mask, all bits corresponding to the bits in the IP address used
as either the net number or the subnet number are set to 1, and the bits corresponding to the host number are set to 0. These settings must be made when
using an address conversion method other than the IP address table method.
Starting from unit version 1.5, it is possible to use classless inter-domain routing by enabling CIDR. Enabling CIDR enables setting 192.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.252 for the subnet mask regardless of the IP address class.
48
Section 2-8
Basic Settings
If CIDR is not enabled and a subnet mask is not set (i.e., the default of 0.0.0.0
is set) or an illegal value is set, one of the following values will be set as the
network mask according to the class of the local IP address.
Class
Class A
Subnet mask
255.0.0.0
Class B
Class C
255.255.0.0
255.255.255.0
If classes are normally used, it is recommended to set a subnet mask values
corresponding to the class.
■ Broadcast Settings
Set the method for specifying IP addresses when broadcasting.
Setting
All 1 (4.3BSD)
(Default)
All 0 (4.2BSD)
Contents
Broadcast with all ones for Host ID (4.3BSD specifications).
Broadcast with Host ID all zeros (4.2BSD specifications).
■ Baud Rate
Set the baud rate.
Setting
Contents
Auto (Default)
Automatically detects the baud rate between hubs.
Operates with 100Base-TX (full duplex) whenever possible.
10Base-T
Operates with 10Base-T (half duplex).
■ TCP/IP Keep-alive Setting
Set the Liveness-Checking Interval. (This setting is enabled only when
FINS/TCP or TCP/IP socket services are used.)
When the keep-alive function is used with FINS/TCP or TCP/IP socket services, the keep-alive communications frame is used to check the status of the
connection with the remote node (either a server or client) if there are no communications during the time interval set here. Up to nine checks are executed
at 75-second intervals. and if there is no response to any of them then the
connection is terminated.
The default setting (0) is for a specified value of 120 minutes for the LivenessChecking Interval. When the prescribed value is used as is, it may not be suitable for control system applications. Set the checking time as required for the
system. The setting range is 0 to 65,535 minutes.
■ IP Router Table
An IP router table is a table of correspondences for finding IP addresses for
the IP routers that relay target segments when the Unit communicates via IP
routers with nodes on other IP network segments.
130.25.X.X (Network ID)
Node A
130.26.X.X (Network ID)
130.25.36.253
130.26.2.254
Node B
IP router
49
Section 2-9
Unit Setup for Particular Applications
For the IP network address, set the network number (i.e., the net ID) of the
other IP network segment with which communications are to be executed.
The length of the network number (i.e., the number of bytes) will vary depending on the IP address class. Four bytes are reserved for setting the IP network
address, so set the network number from the beginning and then set 00 in the
remaining space.
A maximum of eight settings can be registered. The default is for nothing to be
set.
Settings
In this example setting for Node A (refer to the diagram above), a node with an
IP address of 130.26.1.1 is connected to an IP router with an IP address of
130.25.36.253.
Only one default IP router can be set.
The default IP router is selected when no Network ID exists in the IP router
table for the destination network number. To set the default IP router, set
0.0.0.0 for the IP address and set the default IP router's IP address for the
router address.
2-9
Unit Setup for Particular Applications
Aside from the basic settings, the required settings vary depending on the
particular communications applications that are used.
For details on settings, refer to SECTION 3 CX-Programmer Unit Setup.
FINS/UDP
CX-Programmer tab
Settings
Setup
Conversion
FINS/UDP Port No.
IP Address Table
Destination IP Address
Change Dynamically
For details, refer to SECTION 6 FINS Communications Service in the Operation Manual Construction of Networks.
Use CX-Integrator to make routing table settings as required.
FINS/TCP
CX-Programmer tab
Setup
FINS/TCP
Settings
FINS/TCP Port No.
FINS/TCP Connection Setup
For details, refer to SECTION 6 FINS Communications Service in the Operation Manual Construction of Networks.
50
Section 2-9
Unit Setup for Particular Applications
Use CX-Integrator to make routing table settings as required.
Socket Services
CX-Programmer tab
Setting
Setup
Keep-alive
FTP
CX-Programmer tab
Setup
Login
Settings
Password
Port No
For details, refer to SECTION 4 FTP Server Function in the Operation Manual
Construction of Applications.
Mail
CX-Programmer tab
DNS
SMTP
Settings
IP Address
Port No.
Retry timer
Server specification type
IP Address
Host name
Port No.
Local mail address
Mail Address
Use POP before SMTP
Mail address 1
Send Mail
Mail address 2
Transmission trigger setting
Trigger classification
Interval time
Mail address
Transmission data classification
For details, refer to SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual
Construction of Applications.
Mail Reception
CX-Programmer tab
DNS
IP Address
Settings
Port No.
Retry timer
POP
Server specification type
IP Address
Host name
Port No.
Account Name
Mail password
Server access interval time
51
Section 2-10
Communications Test
CX-Programmer tab
Settings
Receive Mail
Posting Mail Address Protection Setting
Receive Attached File Setting
Receive Command Setting
For details, refer to SECTION 3 Mail Receive Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications.
Automatic Clock Adjustment
CX-Programmer tab
DNS
Auto Adjust Time
Settings
IP Address
Port No.
Retry timer
SNTP Server Setup
Auto Adjust Time
Server specification type
IP Address
Host name
Port No.
Retry timer
Adjust Time
For details, refer to SECTION 5 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function in the
Operation Manual Construction of Applications.
Web Functions
CX-Programmer
tab
HTTP
Setting item
Use Web function
Password
Port No.
For details, refer to Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function.
2-10 Communications Test
If the basic settings (in particular the IP address and subnet mask) have been
made correctly for the Ethernet Unit, then it should be possible to communicate with nodes on the Ethernet.
This section describes how to use the PING command to perform communications testing between Ethernet Units.
2-10-1 PING Command
The PING command sends an echo request packet to a remote node and
receives an echo response packet to confirm that the remote node is communicating correctly. The PING command uses the ICMP echo request and
responses. The echo response packet is automatically returned by the ICMP.
The PING command is normally used to check the connections of remote
nodes when configuring a network. The Ethernet Unit supports both the ICMP
echo request and reply functions.
52
Section 2-10
Communications Test
If the remote node returns a normal response to the PING command, then the
nodes are physically connected correctly and Ethernet node settings are correct.
Remote Node
(host computer or Ethernet Unit)
PLC
Ethernet Unit
TCP
UDP
ICMP
IP
Ethernet
Echo request
Echo response
2-10-2 Ethernet Unit
The Ethernet Unit automatically returns the echo response packet in
response to an echo request packet sent by another node (host computer or
other Ethernet Unit). An echo request packet can be sent to another node by
issuing the FINS command to execute the PING command from the PLC.
Refer to page 184 for details on the PING command.
2-10-3 Host Computer
The PING command can be executed from the host computer to send an
echo request packet to an Ethernet Unit. The method for using the PING command from a UNIX computer is given next.
Method
Input the following at the host computer prompt ($):
$ ping IP_address(host_name)
The destination is specified by its IP address or host name. If the host name is
used, the host name must be defined in file /etc/hosts.
Note
The PING command is not supported by some host computers.
Application Examples
These examples show sending the PING command to the node at IP address
130.25.36.8. The “$” in the example represents the host computer prompt.
User inputs are underlined. Comments are placed after semicolons.
Normal Execution
; Executes PING command
PING 130.25.36.8: 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 130.25.36.8: icmp_seq=0. time=0.ms
64 bytes from 130.25.36.8: icmp_seq=0. time=0.ms
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
64 bytes from 130.25.36.8: icmp_seq=0. time=0.ms
←Enter Ctrl+C Key to cancel.
––––130.25.36.8 PING Statistics––––
9 packets transmitted, 9 packets received, 0% packets loss
round–trip (ms) min/avg/max = 0/1/16
$ ping 130.25.36.8
$
53
Section 2-11
Converting from Previous Models
Abnormal Execution
; Executes PING command
PING 130.25.36.8: 56 data bytes
←Enter Ctrl+C Key to cancel.
––––130.25.36.8 PING Statistics––––
9 packets transmitted, 0 packets received, 100% packets loss
$ ping 130.25.36.8
$
Refer to operating system documentation for your host computer for details
about using the host computer’s PING command.
2-11 Converting from Previous Models
The specifications for these Ethernet Units (CS1W-ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21)
are compatible with those for previous models (CS1W-ETN01/ETN11 and
CJ1W-ETN11), so previous models being used with existing equipment can
be easily replaced by the new models. Many of the specifications for the new
Ethernet Units have been expanded, however, so there will be a number of
limitations if the Unit is simply replaced.
In particular, the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area is formatted for the previous models, so there is no way to make the settings for the expanded specifications.
To remove these limitations, it is necessary to change the CPU Bus Unit System Setup format from “ETN11 mode” to “ETN21 mode.” Refer to Changing
the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area Format below for instructions on how to
make the change.
If the format change is from ETN11 mode to ETN21 mode, then there will be
no effect on previous applications. If the change is from ETN21 mode to
ETN11 mode, however, then certain limitations will go into effect.
The following table shows the limitations that apply when operating in ETN11
mode.
Item
Baud rate
Subnet mask
FINS node address setting range
IP address conversion: Automatic
generation method
• Dynamic only
TCP keep-alive
FINS/TCP
• No time setting (Uses default setting)
• Server only for all connections (Uses default
setting)
• Socket option (keep-alive setting): Yes
• Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket
Nos. 1 to 8: Yes
• Data Received Flag: Yes
• Socket high-speed option: No
• Port No. setting: No (Uses default setting)
TCP socket services
FTP server function
54
Specifications in ETN11 mode
• Automatic detection (100Base-TX or
10Base-T)
• CIDR is not used.
• Operation is performed with the default network mask if the subnet mask specification is
less than the network mask for each class.
• 1 to 254
Section 2-11
Converting from Previous Models
Note
Item
Mail send function
Specifications in ETN11 mode
• The specifications for previous Units apply.
• The mail transmission status is as follows:
• Status of user mail transmission → Status
of transmission condition setting 5
• Status of periodic mail transmission → Status of transmission condition setting 6
• Status of mail transmission when error
occurs → Status of transmission condition
setting 7
Mail receive function
Automatic clock adjustment function
• Cannot be used
• Cannot be used
DNS server host name
• Cannot be used
(1) These limitations do not apply when the CPU Bus Unit System Setup
Area format is in ETN21 mode.
(2) When I/O tables are created using one of the new Ethernet Unit models,
the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area format is in ETN21 mode from the
beginning.
Checking the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area Format
Checking with the CX-Programmer's Software Switch Monitor - Status Tab Page
55
Section 2-11
Converting from Previous Models
Checking with the CX-Programmer's Unit Setup Window
■ Window Display in ETN21 Mode
■ Window Display in ETN11 Mode
■ Checking by Reading Words Allocated in the CIO Area
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
n+17
System Setting Format
56
01
00
Section 2-11
Converting from Previous Models
11
0
0
Bit address
10 09 08
0
0
Other
Changing the CPU Bus
Unit System Setup Area
Format
0
0
0
1
Format classification
ETN11 mode
ETN21 mode
Reserved
The CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area format can be changed in either of the
following two ways. Select the method that can be used in the system in which
the Unit is to be replaced.
• By means of the CX-Programmer's Unit Setup
• By manipulating the rotary switches for the node address with a precision
screwdriver
■ Using the Change ETN21 Mode Command from the Options Menu in the
I/O Table Window of the CX-Programmer
1. Select Change ETN21 Mode from the Options Menu in the I/O Table Window.
2. The following confirmation message will be displayed. To change the
mode, click Yes.
3. After the mode has been changed, the following confirmation message will
be displayed. Click OK to restart the Ethernet Unit.
After the Unit has been restarted, it will begin to operate in ETN21 mode.
57
Section 2-11
Converting from Previous Models
■ Manipulating the Rotary Switches for the Node Address with a Precision
Screwdriver
Converting from ETN11 Mode to ETN21 Mode
1. Turn OFF the power to the PLC, and set the Ethernet Unit's rotary switches
for the node address as follows:
Node address
×161
0
×6
0
0
Indicators
RUN
ERC
ERH
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
2. Turn ON the power to the PLC. The Unit's indicators will change as follows:
Node address
×161
×16
0
0
0
RUN
Indicators
ERC
ERH
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
3. Set the rotary switches for the node address to 01. There will be no change
to the indicators.
Node address
×61
0
×16
1
0
Indicators
RUN
ERC
ERH
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
4. Set the rotary switches for the node address to F1. The RUN indicator will
begin to flash.
Node address
×16
1
F
×16
0
1
RUN
Indicators
ERC
ERH
Flashing
Lit
Not lit
5. Set the rotary switches for the node address to 01. The Unit mode change
function will start, and the ERH indicator will flash for approximately five
seconds.
Node address
×161
0
×16
1
0
Indicators
RUN
ERC
ERH
Flashing
Lit
Flashing
6. After the mode has been changed, the indicators will appear as shown below, depending on whether the change was completed normally or if an error occurred.
• If the Mode Change was Completed Normally
Node address
×161
0
58
×16
1
0
Indicators
RUN
ERC
ERH
Flashing
Lit
Lit
Section 2-11
Converting from Previous Models
• If an Error Occurred in the Mode Change
Node address
×16
1
0
×16
0
1
Note
RUN
Indicators
ERC
ERH
Flashing
Lit
Not lit
If an error occurs in the mode change, remove the Ethernet Unit,
create the I/O tables, and correct the settings using the procedures
described in this section.
7. Turn OFF the power to the PLC and return the Ethernet Unit's rotary
switches for the node address to its original setting.
8. Turn ON the power to the PLC.
Node address
×16
1
-
×16
0
-
RUN
Indicators
ERC
ERH
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
Converting from ETN21 Mode to ETN11 Mode
1. Turn OFF the power to the PLC, and set the Ethernet Unit's rotary switches
for the node address as follows:
Node address
×161
×160
RUN
Indicators
ERC
0
0
Not lit
Not lit
ERH
Not lit
2. Turn ON the power to the PLC. The Unit's indicators will change as follows:
Node address
×161
0
×160
0
Indicators
RUN
ERC
ERH
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
3. Set the rotary switches for the node address to 0F. There will be no change
to the indicators.
×161
Node address
×160
RUN
Indicators
ERC
ERH
0
F
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
4. Set the rotary switches for the node address to FF. The RUN indicator will
begin to flash.
×161
Node address
×160
RUN
Indicators
ERC
ERH
F
F
Flashing
Lit
Not lit
5. Set the rotary switches for the node address to 0F. The Unit mode change
function will start, and the ERH indicator will flash for approximately five
seconds.
Node address
×161
×16
0
F
0
RUN
Indicators
ERC
ERH
Flashing
Lit
Flashing
6. After the mode has been changed, the indicators will appear as shown below, depending on whether the change was completed normally or if an error occurred.
59
Section 2-11
Converting from Previous Models
• If the Mode Change was Completed Normally
Node address
×16
1
0
×16
0
F
RUN
Indicators
ERC
ERH
Flashing
Lit
Lit
• If an Error Occurred in the Mode Change
Node address
×161
0
Note
×16
F
0
Indicators
RUN
ERC
ERH
Flashing
Lit
Not lit
If an error occurs in the mode change, remove the Ethernet Unit,
create the I/O tables, and correct the settings using the procedures
described in this section.
7. Turn OFF the power to the PLC and return the Ethernet Unit's rotary
switches for the node address to its original setting.
8. Turn ON the power to the PLC.
Node address
×16
-
60
1
×16
-
0
Indicators
RUN
ERC
ERH
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
SECTION 3
CX-Programmer Unit Setup
This section describes how to install the Ethernet Unit and make the initial settings required for operation.
3-1
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
3-2
FINS/TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
3-3
DNS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
3-4
SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
3-5
POP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
3-6
Mail Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
3-7
Send Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
3-8
Receive Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
3-9
Auto Adjust Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
3-10 HTTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
61
Section 3-1
Setup
3-1
Setup
Item
Contents
Set the method for specifying IP addresses for broadcasting in FINS/
UDP.
• All 1 (4.3BSD): Broadcast with host number set to all ones.
• All 0 (4.2BSD): Broadcast with host number set to all zeros.
Normally the default setting should be used.
Default
All 1 (4.3BSD)
IP Address
Set the local IP address for the Ethernet Unit.
0.0.0.0 (FINS node
address
192.168.250.)
Sub-net Mask
Set the subnet mask for the Ethernet Unit.
This is required if a method other than the IP address table method is
used for address conversion.
Enable CIDR
0.0.0.0
(default subnet
mask for IP address
setting)
Disabled
Set the specifications for the subnet mask.
• Disabled: Set for the range of class A, class B, and class C.
• Enabled: Classless setting range (192.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.252)
Specify the local UDP port number to be used for the FINS communica- 9,600
tions service. The UDP port number is the number used for UDP identification of the application layer (i.e., the FINS communications service in
this case).
• Default (9,600)
• User defined (Setting range: 1 to 65,535)
Note: Make the settings so that UDP port number 123 for SNTP does
not overlap with UDP port number 53 for DNS.
Broadcast
FINS/UDP Port
FINS/TCP Port
62
Specify the local TCP port number to be used for the FINS communica- 9,600
tions service. The TCP port number is the number used for TCP identification of the application layer (i.e., the FINS communications service in
this case).
• Default (9,600)
• User defined (Setting range: 1 to 65,535)
Note: Make the settings so that TCP port numbers 20 and 21 for the
FTP server, TCP port number 25 for SMTP, TCP port number 110 for
POP3, and TCP port number 53 for DNS do not overlap.
Section 3-1
Setup
Item
Conversion
Destination IP Address
(Change Dynamically)
Contents
Select any of the following as the method for finding and converting IP
addresses from FINS node addresses. (Enabled for FINS/UDP only.)
• Automatic generation (dynamic): Auto (dynamic)
• Automatic generation (static): Auto (Static)
• IP address table method: Table used
• Combined method: Mixed
Select to dynamically change the remote (destination) IP address for
FINS/UDP. To prohibit dynamic changes, deselect this box.
Default
Auto (dynamic)
Checked
(Change Dynamically)
Auto
Baud Rate
Select the Ethernet baud rate for the Ethernet Unit.
Select either automatic detection or 10Base-T. (For 100Base-TX, select
automatic detection.)
TCP/IP keep-alive
Set the liveness-checking interval. When socket services using either
0
FINS/TCP or TCP/IP are used, the connection will be terminated if there (120 minutes)
is no response from the remote node (either a server or client) within the
time set here. (Enabled for socket services using FINS/TCP or TCP/IP
only.)
Setting range: 0 to 65,535 minutes
This setting applies to the keep-alive setting for each connection set
with the FINS/TCP tab.
Set the IP address table that defines the relationship between FINS
None
node addresses and IP addresses.
With FINS/UDP, this is enabled only when the IP address table method
is set as the IP address conversion method.
IP Address Table
IP Router Table
Set when the Ethernet Unit is to communicate through the IP router with None
nodes on another IP network segment.
FTP
Sets the login name for connecting to the Ethernet Unit by FTP.
Sets the password for connecting to the Ethernet Unit by FTP.
Login
Password
Port No.
High-speed Socket Services
None
None
(“CONFIDENTIAL”)
0
Set the FTP port number for the Ethernet Unit.
(Number 21 is
There is normally no need to change this number.
Two ports are used for FTP: a control port and a data transfer port. This used.)
setting sets only the control port, and then the data transfer port uses
the number that is one less than the control port.
Selecting this option improves the performance of processing for send- Disabled
ing and receiving using specific bits for socket services. For information
on communications performance, refer to 6-9-5 Times Required for
Sending and Receiving for Socket Services in the Ethernet Units Construction of Applications Operation Manual. When the High Speed
Option is selected, socket services that are implemented using a
CMND(490) instruction will cause an error.
Note
(1) The setting to enable or disable dynamic changing of remote IP addresses is available for Ethernet Units with Unit Ver. 1.3 or later.
(2) Make settings using the unit settings function in the CX-Programmer (to
be included in version 5.0 and higher) or using the Web function (refer to
Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function).
(3) The Enable CIDR Option and High Speed Option for performance of
socket service are supported starting with unit version 1.5.
63
Section 3-2
FINS/TCP
3-2
FINS/TCP
FINS/TCP Connection Setup
Item
No.
Use IP address
to protect
64
Contents
Default
Shows the connection number. This is a network API
used when TCP is used for the FINS communications service. It corresponds to a socket in the socket
services. Up to 16 can be used at a time, and they
are identified by connection numbers 1 to 16. The
Ethernet Unit can thus simultaneously execute the
FINS communications service by TCP with up to 16
remote nodes.
When this option is selected, if the Ethernet Unit is
Not proset for use as a server, and if a connection number tected
other than 0.0.0.0 is set for a destination IP address,
any connection request from other than the number
set for that IP address will be denied.
Select this option to prevent faulty operation (by
FINS commands) from specific nodes from affecting
the PLC.
Section 3-2
FINS/TCP
The following settings can be made for each connection number.
Item
Contents
Default
FINS/TCP Mode For each connection number, this setting specifies Server
the Ethernet Unit for use as either a server or a client.
• When the Ethernet Unit is used as a server:
The Ethernet Unit opens a connection with that
connection number and waits for service requests
(FINS commands) from clients. Connection numbers are used in ascending order and allocated to
clients in the order connections are made.
• When the Ethernet Unit is used as a client:
The Ethernet Unit establishes a connection with
the server set as the destination IP address. Once
the connection has been established, FINS/TCP is
used for FINS communications.
IP Address
Auto allocated
FINS node
keep-alive
• When the Ethernet Unit is used as a server:
If the option is selected to use IP addresses to protect, set the IP addresses as required at clients
from which connection is permitted. If not set for
those connections, the default setting of 0.0.0.0
can be used.
• When the Ethernet Unit is used as a client:
Set the IP address for the remote Ethernet Unit
(i.e., the server) that is to be connected by FINS/
TCP. It is required that an IP address be set for the
remote Ethernet Unit.
If the client (normally a personal computer) application supports FINS/TCP, and if FINS node
addresses are not fixed, the client will take 0 as its
node address. Then, when a FINS command
arrives, the number set here (from 239 to 254) will
automatically be allocated as the client's FINS node
address.
For details on automatic allocation of FINS node
addresses, refer to the Operation Manual Construction of Applications.
0.0.0.0
From 239 to
254, for connection Nos.
1 to 16
For each connection number, set whether or not the Use
remote node connection check function is to be
used for the FINS/TCP server and client.
If the keep-alive box is checked here, then, when
the remote node goes without responding for longer
than the monitor time set in the Setup, the connection will be terminated. If a remote node turns OFF
without warning, the connection will remain open
indefinitely, so this option should be used whenever
possible.
For details, refer to SECTION 6 FINS Communications Service in the Operation Manual Construction of Networks.
65
Section 3-3
DNS
3-3
DNS
DNS Server Setup
Item
IP Address
Contents
Default
Set the IP address for the DNS server.
None
The DNS server is required when specifying the POP3,
SMTP, or SNTP servers by host name for the mail send
function or mail receive function.
Port No.
Set the port to be used for connecting to the DNS
server.
This setting does not normally need to be changed.
Retry Timer Set the time to elapse before retrying when a connection to the DNS server fails.
This setting does not normally need to be changed.
66
0
(Number 53 is
used.)
0 (10 s)
Section 3-4
SMTP
3-4
SMTP
SMTP Server Setup
Item
Designation
Method
IP Address
Contents
Default
Select whether the SMTP server used for send- IP Address
ing mail is to be specified by IP address or the
host's domain name (i.e., host name).
Set the IP address for the SMTP server used for 0.0.0.0
sending mail.
This setting is enabled only when “IP address” is
selected as the method for specifying the server.
Host Name
Set the host domain name (i.e., the host name) None
for the SMTP server that is to be used for sending mail.
This setting is enabled only when “host name” is
selected as the method for specifying the server.
Port No.
Set the port to be used for connecting to the
0
SMTP server that is to be used for sending mail. (No. 25 is used.)
This setting does not normally need to be
changed.
Set the mail address for the Ethernet Unit.
None
Local Mail
Address
Use POP before Select whether or not to use the mail receiving
Not checked
SMTP
method (POP before SMTP) in which the POP
server must be accessed (to receive mail) before
the SMTP server is accessed (to send mail).
For details, refer to SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual
Construction of Applications.
67
Section 3-5
POP
3-5
POP
POP Server Setup
Item
Designation
Method
IP Address
Host Name
Contents
Default
Select whether the POP3 server used for receiving IP Address
mail is to be specified by IP address or the host's
domain name (i.e., host name).
Set the IP address for the POP3 server used for
0.0.0.0
receiving mail.
This setting is enabled only when “IP address” is
selected as the method for specifying the server.
Set the host domain name (i.e., the host name) for None
the POP3 server that is to be used for receiving
mail.
This setting is enabled only when “host name” is
selected as the method for specifying the server.
Port No.
Set the port to be used for connecting to the POP3
server that is to be used for receiving mail.
This setting does not normally need to be changed.
Account Name Set the account name to be used for sending and
receiving mail.
Only alphanumeric characters can be used.
If no account name is set, the portion of the local email address to the left of the @ will be used.
0
(Number 110
is used.)
Mail Password
Set a password for the account that is to be used
for sending and receiving mail.
None
Server Access
Interval
Set the interval for sending and receiving mail. Mail 0
will be automatically sent and received at the inter- (5 minutes)
val set here.
None
For details, refer to SECTION 3 Mail Receive Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications.
68
Section 3-6
Mail Address
3-6
Mail Address
Destination Mail Address Setup
Item
Contents
Default
Mail Address 1 Set one of the addresses to which the Ethernet Unit None
is to send mail. (Up to two address can be set.)
Note: Mail can be sent to multiple addresses by
punctuating the mail address with commas.
Mail Address 2 Set one of the addresses to which the Ethernet Unit None
is to send mail. (Up to two address can be set.)
Note: Mail can be sent to multiple addresses by
punctuating the mail address with commas.
For details, refer to SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual
Construction of Applications.
69
Section 3-7
Send Mail
3-7
Send Mail
Item
Send Trigger
Use send trigger
70
Contents
Default
Select a number as the trigger condition for send- --ing mail. Up to eight trigger numbers can be registered.
Sets whether or not the selected mail trigger is to Not checked
be enabled.
Section 3-7
Send Mail
Item
Mail
Softtrigger ware
type
switch
(Select
only
one.)
Word
value
change
Contents
Default
If this option is selected, mail is sent whenever the Checked
Mail Send Switch turns ON.
The Mail Send Switch is bit 03 of word n in the
words allocated for CPU Bus Units. (n = 1500 + 25
x unit number)
If this option is selected, the value of a specified
Not checked
address is compared with a standard comparison
value using one of the following comparison functions, and mail is sent whenever the condition is
satisfied.
=, <>, <, <=, >=, >
Select the address for storing the comparison
value from the drop-down list.
Bit value If this option is selected, mail is sent whenever a
change specified bit turns ON or whenever it turns OFF.
Select the bit address from the drop-down list
below.
ETN
If this option is selected, mail is sent whenever a
condition new error is stored in the Ethernet Unit's error log.
CPU
If this option is selected, mail is sent whenever any
condition of the following conditions occur at the CPU Unit.
The drop-down list at the right can be used to
select which of these three are to serve as mail
triggers.
• When a non-fatal error occurs
• When a fatal error occurs
• When the operating mode is changed
Interval If this option is selected, mail is sent at fixed time
time
intervals.
(PeriThe time interval (in minutes) can be set in the
odic
interval time box.
timer)
Mail address
Select the destination mail address.
The mail destination is the one set under the Mail
Address tab.
Send user data
If this option is selected, user-created data is sent
in the body of the mail.
The location for storing the user-created data is
set by the user-defined mail address setting
below.
Send Error Log
If this option is selected, the error log is included in
information
the body of the mail.
Send status infor- If this option is selected, status information is
mation
included in the body of the mail.
Not checked
Not checked
Not checked
Not checked
Address 1
Not checked
Not checked
Not checked
Send file data/I/O If this option is selected, any of the following types Not checked
memory data
of data can be sent as file attachments to e-mail.
• I/O memory data (.IOM)
• I/O memory data (.TXT)
• I/O memory data (.CSV)
• File data (any file)
Select the type of data to be attached from the
checkboxes below. If I/O memory data is selected,
then also select, in “I/O memory data” below, the
address and range of data to be sent.
Attached file
If the above setting is checked so that files can be None
name
sent as attachments, then specify the name of the
file that is to be sent.
71
Section 3-8
Receive Mail
Item
Interval time
When “Periodic
timer” is set as
the mail trigger
type
When “Bit value
change” or
“Word value
change” is set
as the mail trigger type
Contents
Default
Set the time interval for sending 0
mail.
(10 minutes)
1 to 1,440 (10 to 14,400 min), in
units of 10 min
Set the time interval for monitor- 0
ing the value at a specified
(1 second)
address.
1 to 1,000 (1 to 1,000 s), in units
of 1 s
Default: 0000
For details, refer to SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual
Construction of Applications.
3-8
Receive Mail
Posting Mail Address Protection Setting
72
Item
Protect by mail
address
Contents
Default
If this option is selected, mail from sources
Not checked
other than specified addresses is denied.
Use the “Mail address” text box below to specify the sources from which to receive mail.
Source mail
Set the mail address if the option has been
checked to protect using mail address.
Mail will not be accepted from sources other
than the mail address set here.
None
Section 3-8
Receive Mail
Receive Attached File Setting
Item
Receive a specified
extension file only
Contents
Default
If this option is selected, only file attachments Not
with specified extensions is accepted with mail. checked
Use the checkboxes below to select which file
extensions are to be accepted. Multiple extensions can be selected.
OBJ
If this option is selected, an OBJ file (which can Checked
be created using the CX-Programmer) containing all cyclic task and interrupt task programs in
the CPU Unit will be received.
If this option is selected, an STD file containing
the PLC Setup, registered I/O tables, routing
tables, Unit Setups, etc. (which can be read
from the CPU Unit using the CX-Programmer)
will be received.
If this option is selected, an IOM file containing
bit data from beginning to end of a memory
area (which can be created using the CX-Programmer) will be received.
STD
IOM
CSV
If this option is selected, CSV files (created by
programs such as Excel) can be received.
TXT
If this option is selected, text files can be
received.
If this option is selected, files with extensions
specified by the user can be received.
Custom 1 to 3
Receive Command Setting
Item
Contents
Default
Checked
FileWrite
If this option is selected, only specified
remote mail commands are executed.
The commands to be received can be
specified in the checkboxes below.
If checked, files can be written.
FileRead
FileDelete
If checked, files can be read.
If checked, files can be deleted.
Checked
Not checked
FileList
UMBackup
If checked, files can be listed.
If checked, the user program can be
backed up.
Checked
Checked
PARAMBackup
If checked, the parameter area can be
backed up.
Checked
IOMWrite
If checked, writing to the I/O memory
area is permitted.
Not checked
IOMRead
ErrorLogRead
If checked, the I/O memory area can be Checked
read.
If checked, the operating mode can be Not checked
changed.
If checked, the error log can be read.
Checked
ErrorLogClear
MailLogRead
If checked, the error log can be cleared. Checked
If checked, the mail log can be read.
Checked
MailLogClear
Test
If checked, the mail log can be cleared. Checked
If checked, the mail receive test can be Checked
executed.
If checked, FINS commands can be
Not checked
executed.
Receive a specified command only
ChangeMode
FinsSend
Not checked
73
Section 3-9
Auto Adjust Time
For details, refer to SECTION 3 Mail Receive Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications.
3-9
Auto Adjust Time
SNTP Server Setup
Item
Contents
Obtain clock
If this option is selected, the CPU Unit's clock is set to
data from SNTP the time at the SNTP server's clock.
server
The clock can be changed only for the CPU Unit to
which the Ethernet Unit is mounted.
Auto Adjustment Set the time at which the SNTP server is to be
accessed to synchronize the clocks.
When the time that is set here arrives, the SNTP
server is accessed and the CPU Unit clock is
adjusted to match the SNTP server clock.
Designation
Select whether the SNTP server used for automatic
Method
clock adjustment is to be specified by IP address or
by host domain name (i.e., by host name).
IP Address
Set the IP address for the SNTP server that is to be
used for automatic clock adjustment.
This setting is enabled only when server specification
by IP address has been selected.
74
Default
Not
checked
0:0:0
IP Address
0.0.0.0
Host Name
Set the host domain name (i.e., the host name) for
None
the SNTP server that is to be used for automatic
clock adjustment.
This setting is enabled only when server specification
by host name has been selected.
Port No.
Set the port number for connecting to the SNTP
server that is to be used for automatic clock adjustment. This setting does not normally need to be
changed.
0
(Number
123 is
used.)
Section 3-10
HTTP
Item
Retry Timer
Time Lag
Adjustment
Contents
Default
Set the time to elapse before retrying when a connec- 0
tion to the SNTP server fails. This setting does not
(10 s)
normally need to be changed.
This sets in the CPU Unit's clock data the time differ- +0:0
ence made up from the SNTP server's clock data.
To use the clock data from the SNTP server just as it
is, input 0.
For details, refer to SECTION 5 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function in the
Operation Manual Construction of Applications.
3-10 HTTP
HTTP Server Setup
Item
Use WEB functions
Password
Port No.
Contents
Select to use or prohibit the Web
function. Deselect this option to prohibit use of the Web function.
Sets the password for accessing
the Ethernet Unit’s settings and status monitoring information using a
Web browser.
Default
Checked (Web function is used.)
None
(“ETHERNET” is used.)
Sets the port No. used to connect to 0 (80 is used.)
the Web browser.
For details, refer to Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function.
Note
(1) The HTTP Server Setup is supported by Ethernet Units with Unit Ver. 1.3
or later.
(2) Make settings using the unit settings function in the CX-Programmer (to
be included in version 5.0 and higher) or using the Web function (refer to
Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function).
75
HTTP
76
Section 3-10
SECTION 4
Ethernet Unit Memory Allocations
This section describes the words allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area for Ethernet Units.
4-1
CIO Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
4-2
DM Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
4-3
Auxiliary Area Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
77
Section 4-1
CIO Area Allocations
4-1
CIO Area Allocations
The various kinds of data are stored in the offset positions shown in the following diagram, from the beginning word in the area for each Unit.
The beginning word n is calculated by the following equation:
Beginning word n = CIO 1500 + (25 × unit number)
Offset
Bit
15
08 07
00
Data direction
Related communications services
Unit Control Switch
CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit
Socket Services
n+1
UDP Socket No. 1 Status
Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit
n+2
UDP Socket No. 2 Status
(Refer to Operation Manual,
Construction of Applications,
SECTION 6.)
n+3
UDP Socket No. 3 Status
n+4
UDP Socket No. 4 Status
n+5
UDP Socket No. 5 Status
n+6
UDP Socket No. 6 Status
n+7
n+8
UDP Socket No. 7 Status
UDP Socket No. 8 Status
n+9
TCP Socket No. 1 Status
n+10
TCP Socket No. 2 Status
n+11
TCP Socket No. 3 Status
n+12
TCP Socket No. 4 Status
n+13
TCP Socket No. 5 Status
n+14
TCP Socket No. 6 Status
n+15
TCP Socket No. 7 Status
n+16
TCP Socket No. 8 Status
n+17
Service Status
FTP Service, etc.
n+18
Error Status
All error conditions
n
n+19
Socket Service Request Switches 2
Socket Service Request Switches 1
n+20
Socket Service Request Switches 4
Socket Service Request Switches 3
n+21
Socket Service Request Switches 6
Socket Service Request Switches 5
n+22
Socket Service Request Switches 8
Socket Service Request Switches 7
n+23
n+24
FINS/TCP Connection Status
Mail Function
(Refer to Operation Manual,
Construction of Applications,
SECTION 2.)
Socket Services
(Refer to Operation Manual,
Construction of Applications,
SECTION 6.)
CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit
Socket Services
(Refer to Operation Manual,
Construction of Applications,
SECTION 6.)
Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit
(Not used.)
FINS Communications
(Refer to SECTION 6 FINS Communications.)
The following items in the diagram can also be checked using software switch
settings on the CX-Programmer.
• The status of UDP/TCP sockets 1 to 8 (Opening Flag, Receiving Flag,
Sending Flag, Closing Flag, Results Storage Error Flag, Socket Open
Flag)
• Service status (FTP status)
• FINS/TCP Connection Status
For explanations of how to use the related communications services listed in
the above diagram, refer to the indicated sections.
78
Section 4-1
CIO Area Allocations
Unit Control Bits (CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit)
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n
Socket Force-close Switch
Mail Send Switch
Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch
Bit
00 to 01
(Not used.)
---
Manipulated
by
---
02
Socket Force-close
Switch
ON
03
04
05 to 15
Switch
Mail Send Switch
Automatic Clock
Adjustment Switch
(Not used.)
Status
Unit operation
Reference
---
---
User
All sockets are forcibly closed when
this bit turns ON.
OFF
Unit
ON
User
OFF
Unit
ON
User
Turned OFF by Unit after sockets
are closed.
User mail is sent when this bit turns
ON.
Turned OFF by Unit after user mail
has been sent.
The automatic clock adjustment is
executed when this bit turns ON.
Operation Manual, Construction of Applications, SECTION 6
OFF
Unit
---
---
Turned OFF by Unit after automatic
clock adjustment has been completed.
---
Operation Manual, Construction of Applications, SECTION 2
Operation Manual, Construction of Applications, SECTION 5
---
Socket Force-close Switch (Bit 02)
All UDP and TCP sockets used for socket services can be force-closed by
turning ON this switch. This can be used for operations such as error processing.
Be careful not to force-close sockets during communications, or an error will
occur. After all sockets have been force-closed, the Ethernet Unit will turn the
switch OFF again. Do not attempt to forcibly manipulate this switch before it is
automatically turned OFF by the Unit.
Ports used exclusively by the Ethernet Unit will not be closed.
Mail Send Switch (Bit 03)
User mail can be sent by turning ON this switch. The contents of the user mail
are set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup.
After the user mail has been sent, the Ethernet Unit will turn this switch OFF
again. Do not attempt to forcibly manipulate this switch before it is automatically turned OFF by the Unit.
Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch (Bit 04)
The automatic clock adjustment can be executed by turning this switch ON.
The SNTP server required for the automatic clock adjustment is set in the Unit
Setup.
After the automatic clock adjustment has been completed, the Ethernet Unit
will automatically turn this switch OFF. Until then, do not forcibly manipulate
the switch.
79
Section 4-1
CIO Area Allocations
Status of UDP/TCP Sockets 1 to 8 (Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit)
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n+1 to n+16
Data Received Flag
Opening Flag
Results Storage Error Flag
Receiving Flag
TCP/UDP Open Flag
Sending Flag
Closing Flag
Bit
00
01
02
03
04 to 12
13
14
15
Flag
Status
Opening Flag
Receiving Flag
Sending Flag
Closing Flag
TCP/UDP Open
Flag
Note
80
Unit operation
ON
Unit
OFF
Unit
ON
Unit
OFF
Unit
ON
Unit
OFF
Unit
ON
Unit
ON during close processing. (Turns
ON when close request is received.)
OFF
Unit
OFF when close processing has
been completed.
--Unit
--ON when data from a remote node
has been received at an open TCP
socket.
OFF when receive processing has
been requested for an open TCP
socket.
(Not used.)
--Data Received Flag ON
Results Storage
Error Flag
Manipulated
by
Reference
ON during open processing. (Turns Operation Manual, ConON when open request is received.) struction of Applications, SECTION 6
OFF when open processing has
been completed.
ON during receive processing.
(Turns ON when receive request is
received if high-speed option is disabled and remains OFF when highspeed processing is enabled.)
OFF when receive processing has
been completed.
ON during send processing. (Turns
ON when receive request is received
if high-speed option is disabled and
remains OFF when high-speed processing is enabled.)
OFF when send processing has
been completed.
OFF
Unit
ON
Unit
OFF
Unit
ON
Unit
ON when open processing has been
completed.
OFF
Unit
OFF when close processing has
been completed. (Stays OFF for
abnormal open processing completion.)
--Operation Manual, Construction of Applications, SECTION 6
ON if there is an error in storing the
results when socket services are
used by means of the CMND(490)
instruction.
Turns OFF when the next request is
received. (Connected by TCP.)
The status of these flags can also be checked using the software switch settings on the CX-Programmer.
Section 4-1
CIO Area Allocations
Opening Flag (Bit 00)
Turns ON when an open request is received either by control bit manipulation
or the CMND(490) instruction, and turns OFF again when the open processing has been completed. When CMND(490) is used, the Results Storage
Error Flag (bit 14) will turn ON at the same time as the Opening Flag turns
OFF if there is an error in the Results Storage Area designation.
Receiving Flag (Bit 01)
Turns ON if the High-Speed Option is not selected when a receive request is
received either by control bit manipulation or the CMND(490) instruction.
Remains OFF if the High-Speed Option is selected. Turns OFF again when
the receive processing has been completed. When CMND(490) is used, the
Results Storage Error Flag (bit 14) will turn ON at the same time as the
Receiving Flag turns OFF if there is an error in the Results Storage Area designation.
Sending Flag (Bit 02)
Turns ON if the High-Speed Option is not selected when a send request is
received either by control bit manipulation or the CMND(490) instruction and
turns OFF again when the send processing has been completed. Remains
OFF if the High-Speed Option is selected. When CMND(490) is used, the
Results Storage Error Flag (bit 14) will turn ON at the same time as the Sending Flag turns OFF if there is an error in the Results Storage Area designation.
Closing Flag (Bit 03)
Turns ON when a close request is received either by control bit manipulation
or the CMND(490) instruction, and turns OFF again when the close processing has been completed. When CMND(490) is used, the Results Storage
Error Flag (bit 14) will turn ON at the same time as the Closing Flag turns OFF
if there is an error in the Results Storage Area designation.
Data Received Flag (Bit 13)
This bit turns ON when data is received from a remote node at an open TCP
socket. Linked to this flag, the number of bytes of data saved in the reception
buffer is stored in Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket in the words allocated in the DM Area. The bit is turned OFF when a receive request is made
by either bit manipulation or the CMND(490) instruction. If any data remains in
the reception buffer after the receive request processing is complete, the
number of bytes is stored in Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket and
the Data Received Flag turns ON again.
The status of this flag is checked before a receive request is executed.
Results Storage Error Flag (Bit 14)
Turns ON if there is an error in the Results Storage Area for a socket service
request (open, receive, send, close) made using CMND(490). This flag turns
ON at the same time as the services request processing flags (bits 0 to 3) turn
OFF. It remains ON until the next services request is received, and then it
turns OFF again. When this flag turns ON, check the set values in the Results
Storage Area.
The Results Storage Error Flag does not operate when socket services are
requested by control bit manipulation.
81
Section 4-1
CIO Area Allocations
TCP/UDP Open Flag (Bit 15)
Remains ON while a socket is open by means of control bit manipulation or
the CMND(490) instruction. In the case of TCP, it indicates a connection.
When the socket is closed, this flag turns OFF again. (If the socket did not
close properly, the flag remains ON.)
Check to be sure that this flag is ON before executing a send or receive
request.
Service Status (Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit)
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n+17
FTP Status
System Setup Format
Accessing Memory,
Sending Mail
Link Status
Accessing Memory,
Receiving Mail
Bit
00
01
Name
FTP Status Flag
Status
ON
Manipulated
by
Unit
OFF
Unit
Accessing Memory, ON
Sending Mail
OFF
02
03 to 07
08 to 11
12 to 13
14
15
Accessing Memory, ON
Receiving Mail
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit operation
Reference
FTP server operating. (FTP client
connected.)
FTP server on standby. (FTP client
not connect.)
ON while CPU Unit memory is being
accessed to create a file to be
attached using the mail send function.
Operation Manual, Construction of Applications, SECTION 4
Operation Manual, Construction of Applications, SECTION 2
OFF when the file to be attached
has been created.
ON while CPU Unit memory is being Operation Manual, Conaccessed to store an attached file
struction of Applicausing the mail receive function.
tions, SECTION 3
OFF
Unit
OFF when the attached file has
been stored.
(Not used.)
System Setup Format
--ON
--Unit
OFF
Unit
----Shows the current format in the CPU SECTION 2 Installation
Bus Unit System Setup Area by the and Initial Setup
ON/OFF status of a combination of
bits.
(Not used.)
Link Status
--ON
--Unit
--ON while a link is established
between hubs.
OFF
Unit
OFF when the link between hubs is
terminated.
---
---
---
(Not used.)
-----
---
FTP Status (Bit 00)
Turns ON while connected to an FTP client, and OFF while not connected.
With the FTP server function only one FTP client can be connected at a time,
so while this bit is ON no other clients can connect to the server.
The FTP status is also shown by the Ethernet Unit’s FTP indicator, as follows:
Not lit: FTP server on standby. (FTP status: OFF)
Lit:
FTP server operating. (FTP status: ON)
82
Section 4-1
CIO Area Allocations
Accessing Memory (Sending Mail) (Bit 01)
This bit turns ON while CPU Unit memory is being accessed to create a file to
be attached using the mail send function, and it turns OFF when the file has
been created.
ON while CPU Unit memory is being accessed to store an attached file using the mail
receive function.
Accessing Memory (Receiving Mail) (Bit 02)
This bit turns ON while CPU Unit memory is being accessed to store an
attached file using the mail receive function, and it turns OFF after the file has
been stored.
System Setup Format (Bits 08 to 11)
These bits show the format classification in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup
Area.
Bit address
11
0
10
0
0
0
Other
Error Status (Ethernet Unit
to CPU Unit)
Format classification
09
0
08
0
0
1
ETN11 mode
ETN21 mode
Reserve
The status of errors that occur at the Ethernet Unit is reflected as shown in the
following diagram.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n+18
Bit 02: IP address setting error
Bit 03: IP address table error
Bit 04: IP router table error
Bit 05: DNS server error
Bit 06: Routing table error
Bit 11: SNTP server error
Bit 12: SMTP server error
Bit 13: POP server error
Bit 14: Address disagreement
Bit 15: EEPROM error
Bit
Error
Status Manipulated by
Unit operation
00 to 01 (Not used.)
02
IP address setting error
--ON
--Unit
--ON if any of the following conditions apply to the IP
address.
• All bits in the host ID are 0 or 1.
• All bits in the network ID are 0 or 1.
• All bits in the subnet ID are 1.
• The IP address begins with 127 (0x7F)
03
IP address table error
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit
OFF when the IP address is normal.
On if the IP address table information is incorrect.
04
IP router table error
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit
OFF when the IP address table is normal.
ON if the IP router table information is incorrect.
OFF
Unit
OFF when the IP address table is normal.
83
Section 4-1
CIO Area Allocations
05
Bit
Error
DNS server error
06
Routing table error
Status Manipulated by
Unit operation
ON
Unit
ON when the following errors occur during DNS server
operation:
• An illegal server IP address is set.
• A timeout occurs during communications with the
server.
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit
OFF when DNS server operation is normal.
ON if the routing table information is incorrect.
07 to 10 (Not used.)
OFF
---
Unit
---
OFF when the routing table is normal.
---
11
SNTP server error
ON
Unit
OFF
Unit
ON when the following errors occur during SNTP
server operation:
• An illegal server IP address or host name is set.
• A timeout occurs during communications with the
server.
OFF when SNTP server operation is normal.
12
SMTP server error
ON
Unit
OFF
Unit
ON when the following errors occur during SMTP
server operation:
• An illegal server IP address or host name is set.
• A timeout occurs during communications with the
server.
• The verification time from the server has expired
(when POP before SMTP is set).
OFF when SMTP server operation is normal.
13
POP server error
ON
Unit
ON when the following errors occur during POP server
operation:
• An illegal server IP address or host name is set.
• A server verification error (user name or password)
occurs.
• A timeout occurs during communications with the
server.
14
Address disagreement
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit
OFF when use of the POP server is normal.
ON if the remote IP address is set to automatic generation but the local IP address host number and FINS
node address do not agree.
15
EEPROM error
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit
OFF under all other circumstances.
ON if an error has occurred in the EEPROM memory.
OFF
Unit
OFF when the EEPROM memory is normal.
Socket Service Request
Switches 1 to 8 (CPU Unit
to Ethernet Unit)
When a socket service request is executed by control bit manipulation, it is the
following bits that are manipulated. For details, refer to Operation Manual,
Construction of Applications, SECTION 6.
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
n+19 to n+22
UDP Open Request Switch
TCP Passive Open Request Switch
TCP Active Open Request Switch
Send Request Switch
Receive Request Switch
Close Request Switch
84
Section 4-1
CIO Area Allocations
Bit
08
00
09
01
10
02
11
03
12
13
14
15
04
05
06
07
Switch
Status Manipulated
Unit operation
by
UDP Open Request ON
User
UDP socket opened when switch is turned
Switch
ON.
OFF
Unit
Unit turns OFF switch when open processing
has been completed (i.e., when a connection
has been made).
User
Passive TCP socket opened when switch is
TCP Passive Open ON
Request Switch
turned ON.
OFF
Unit
Unit turns OFF switch when open processing
has been completed (i.e., when a connection
has been made).
TCP Active Open
ON
User
Active TCP socket opened when switch is
Request Switch
turned ON.
OFF
Unit
Unit turns OFF switch when open processing
has been completed (i.e., when a connection
has been made).
Send Request
ON
User
Send processing executed when switch is
Switch
turned ON.
(The protocol (TCP/UDP) is determined when
the socket is opened.)
Receive Request
Switch
Close Request
Switch
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
OFF
Unit
Unit turns OFF switch when send processing
has been completed.
ON
User
OFF
Unit
ON
User
Receive processing executed when switch is
turned ON.
(The protocol (TCP/UDP) is determined when
the socket is opened.)
Unit turns OFF switch when receive processing has been completed.
Close processing executed when switch is
turned ON.
(The protocol (TCP/UDP) is determined when
the socket is opened.)
OFF
Unit
Unit turns OFF switch when close processing
has been completed.
-----
-----
-----
FINS/TCP Connection
Status
Reference
Operation Manual, Construction of
Applications,
SECTION 6
-----
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n+23
85
Section 4-2
DM Area Allocations
These bits show the status of FINS/TCP connections.
Bit
00
Switch
Status
FINS/TCP Connection No.1
ON
OFF
01
FINS/TCP Connection No.2
to
14
to
FINS/TCP Connection No.15
15
FINS/TCP Connection No.16
4-2
ON
Manipulated
Unit operation
by
Unit
Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is
established.
Unit
Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection
is terminated.
Unit
Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is
established.
OFF
Unit
Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection
is terminated.
to
ON
to
Unit
OFF
Unit
to
Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is
established.
Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection
is terminated.
ON
Unit
Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is
established.
OFF
Unit
Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection
is terminated.
Reference
SECTION 6
FINS Communications Service
DM Area Allocations
The various kinds of data are stored in the offset positions shown in the following diagram, from the beginning word in the area for each Unit.
The beginning word m is calculated by the following equation:
Beginning word m = D30000 + (100 x unit number)
Offset
Bit
15
08 07
00 Data direction
Related communications services
Send Mail function
m
Send Mail Status 1
m+1
TCP Socket No. 1 Number of Bytes Received
Operation Manual, Construction of
Applications, Section 2
Socket Services
Operation Manual, Construction
of Applications, Section 6
m+8
TCP Socket No. 8 Number of Bytes Received
m+9
TCP Socket No. 1 Connection Status
Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit
m+16
TCP Socket No. 8 Connection Status
m+17
Send Mail Status 2
m+18
Socket Services Parameter Area 1
Socket Services
m+28
Socket Services Parameter Area 2
Operation Manual, Construction
of Applications, Section 6
m+88
Socket Services Parameter Area 8
Send Mail function
m+98
IP Address Display/Setting Area
m+99
86
Operation Manual, Construction of
Applications, Section 2
Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit or
CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit
Section 4-2
DM Area Allocations
The meanings of the items shown in the above diagram are explained on the
following pages. For details regarding the related communications services
shown in the diagram, refer to the indicated sections.
Send Mail Status 1, 2 (Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit)
Send Mail Status 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
m
Status of Send Condition Setting 1
Status of Send Condition Setting 2
Status of Send Condition Setting 3
Status of Send Condition Setting 4
Send Mail Status 2
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
m+17
Status of Send Condition Setting 5
Status of Send Condition Setting 6
Status of Send Condition Setting 7
Status of Send Condition Setting 8
The transmission status of user mail, periodic mail, and error log mail are
stored in this word as shown in the following table.
Bits
Status
02
06
01
05
00
04
10
14
09
13
08
12
OFF
OFF
OFF
Mail is either waiting to be sent or can be sent using the Mail
Send Switch. No mail is being sent.
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Mail is being sent.
Mail is either waiting to be sent or can be sent using the Mail
Send Switch. The previous mail transmission was completed
normally.
Mail is either waiting to be sent or can be sent using the Mail
Send Switch. An error occurred in the previous mail transmission.
ON
ON
ON
Mail cannot be sent (system setting error).
While mail is being sent, the transmission status of the three bits each for
send condition settings 1 to 8, i.e., bits 02, 01, and 00; bits 06, 05, and 04; or
bits 10, 09, an 08 are 0, 0, and 1 respectively. After the transmission has been
completed normally, they become 0, 1, and 0. If the transmission is ended
with an error, they become 1, 1, and 0.
Check this transmission status in the ladder program as required.
87
Section 4-2
DM Area Allocations
TCP Socket No. (1 to 8): Number of Bytes Received (Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit)
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
m+1 to m+8
Number of Bytes Received (0000 to 07C0 hex)
For each TCP socket, the number of bytes of data in the reception buffer is
stored in one word. A maximum of 4,096 bytes of data can be held in the
reception buffer, but a value of only up to the maximum value (1,984 bytes)
that can be set for receive requests by manipulating control bits or using
CMND(490) is stored.
0000 hex: 0 bytes
07C0 hex: 1,984 bytes
The Data Received Flag in the CIO Area turns ON and OFF linked to this
word. This area is given a value of 0000 hex when a receive request is executed by manipulating control bits or using the CMND(490) instruction. If any
data remains in the reception buffer after the receive request processing is
completed, the remaining number of bytes is stored and the Data Received
Flag turns ON again.
Before a receive request is executed, a check is performed to confirm that the
required data is available.
TCP Socket No. (1 to 8): Connection Status (Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit)
15 14 13 12 11 10
09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
m+9 to m+16
TCP connection status
The connection status for each TCP socket is stored by code in this word. For
details, refer to Appendix C TCP Status Transitions.
Socket Services Parameter Area 1 to 8 (Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit)
Offset
+0
Socket
No. 1
m+18
+1
m+19
m+89
+2
m+20
m+90
m+21
m+91
+4
m+22
+5
+6
m+23
m+24
m+25
+8
m+26
+9
m+27
...
...
...
Socket
No. 8
m+88
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Socket option
UDP/TCP socket number (1 to 8)
Local UDP/TCP port number (0000 to FFFF Hex)
m+92
m+93
m+94
m+95
...
Remote IP address
(00000000 to FFFFFFFF Hex)
Remote UDP/TCP port number (0000 to FFFF Hex)
Number of send/receive bytes (0000 to 07C0 Hex (1984))
Send/receive data address
(Same as FINS variable area designation method.)
m+96
Timeout value (0000 to FFFF Hex)
m+97
Response code
When socket services are requested by control bit manipulation, the settings
must be made in advance in a Socket Service Parameter Area. The parameters used will vary depending on the service requested. For details, refer to
Operation Manual, Construction of Applications, SECTION 6.
88
Section 4-2
DM Area Allocations
IP Address Display/Setting Area
m+98
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
m+99
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
IP address: (1)(2).(3)(4).(5)(6).(7)(8) (Hex)
If the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup is set to a value
other than 0.0.0.0, this area (words m+98 and m+99) will act as an IP Address
Display Area and the local IP address set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup
will be read and stored here when the power is turned ON or the Unit
restarted. If the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup is set to
0.0.0.0 (the default setting), this value is read by the Ethernet Unit when the
power is turned ON or the Unit restarted and is used as the local IP address.
Note
Choose the method used to set the local IP address as follows:
Set the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup when making
other settings in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup. The settings are made with
CX-Programmer.
Set the local IP address in the allocated words in the DM Area when using the
CPU Bus Unit System Setup at its default settings (i.e., for simple operation).
The setting is usually made with a Programming Console.
Application
Simple operation (i.e., The CPU
Unit Bus System Setup is used at
its default settings. Only the IP
address is set.)
Setting device
Programming Console (CX-Programmer can also be
used.)
Operation with the CPU Unit Bus CX-Programmer
System Setup set as desired (i.e.,
The default settings are not used.)
Replacing the previous CS1W--ETN01/CS1W-ETN11 and using
the previous settings.
Note
Setting area
Allocated words in
the DM Area
CPU Unit Bus System Setup
---
Remarks
The setting in the allocated words in
the DM Area is enabled only when the
IP address in the CPU Unit Bus System Setup is set to 0.0.0.0.
If the IP address in the CPU Unit Bus
System Setup is set to a value other
than 00.00.00.00, this value is stored in
the allocated words in the DM Area.
The IP address set in the CPU Unit Bus
System Setup is stored in the allocated
words in the DM Area.
The IP address is set using a rotary
switch in the previous CS1W-ETN01/
CS1W-ETN11 Ethernet Units. In the
new Ethernet Units, the IP address set
with the rotary switch is displayed in the
DM Area. This area is backed up by the
battery, so the IP address can be used
without resetting.
(1) If a value other than 00.00.00.00 is set as the local IP address in the CPU
Bus Unit System Setup, even if an IP address is set in the allocated words
in the DM Area, it will be overwritten with the setting in the CPU Bus Unit
System Setup.
(2) It is not possible to set the following IP addresses. If any of these values
are set, the ERH indicator will flash.
• IP addresses where all network number bits are 0 or 1.
• IP addresses where all host number bits are 0 or 1.
• IP addresses where all subnet number bits are 1.
• IP addresses that start with 127 (7F hexadecimal, e.g., 127.35.21.16).
89
Section 4-3
Auxiliary Area Data
4-3
Auxiliary Area Data
The following table and descriptions cover the words and bits in the Auxiliary
Area of PLC memory that are related to the Ethernet Unit.
Read-only Bits/Words
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Name
A202
A202.00 to Communications
A202.07
Port Enabled Flags
Function
Bits A202.00 to A202.07 turn ON when a network
instruction (SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR) can be
executed with the corresponding port number. Bits
00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
Settings
0: Network communications running
1: No network communications running
A203 to
A210
---
0000: No error
Not 0000: Error code
A219
A219.00 to Communications
A219.07
Port Error Flags
These words contain the completion codes for the
corresponding port numbers when network
instructions (SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR) have
been executed. Words A203 to A210 correspond to
communications ports 0 to 7.
Bits A219.00 to A219.07 turn ON when an error
occurred during execution of a network instruction
(SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR). Bits 00 to 07
correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
A302
A302.00 to CPU Bus Unit
A302.15
Initializing Flags
Bits A302.00 through A302.15 turn ON while the
corresponding CPU Bus Units (Units #0 through
#15, respectively) are initializing. The bits will turn
ON either when power is turned ON or when a CPU
Bus Unit Restart Bit (A501.00 to A501.15) is turned
ON.
A402
A402.03
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Bit A402.03 is turned ON when the CPU Bus Units
actually installed differ from the Units registered in
the I/O tables. The ERR/ALM indicator on the front
of the CPU Unit will flash, but CPU operation will
continue.
The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is
stored in word A427.
0: Not initializing
1: Initializing (System
will automatically turn
the flag OFF when initialization has been
completed.)
0: No setting error
1: Setting error
A402.07
CPU Bus Unit Error Bit A402.07 is turned ON when an error occurs
0: No unit number
Flag
during the transmission of data between the CPU
error
(Non-fatal error)
and CPU Bus Units. The ERR/ALM indicator on the 1: Unit number error
front of the CPU Unit will flash, but CPU operation
will continue. The Unit where the error occurred will
stop.
The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is
stored in word A422.
A403
A410
90
Communications
Port Completion
Codes
A403.00 to Memory Error
A403.08
Location
When a memory error occurs, the Memory Error
Flag (A401.15) is turned ON and one of the following flags is turned ON to indicate the memory area
where the error occurred.
A403.00: User program
A403.04: PLC Setup
A403.05: Registered I/O Tables
A403.07: Routing Table
A403.08: CPU Bus Unit Settings
The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit
will light and CPU operation will stop.
A410.00 to CPU Bus Unit Num- The Duplication Error Flag (A401.13) and the
A410.15
ber Duplication
corresponding flag in A410 will be turned ON when
Flags
a CPU Bus Unit’s unit number has been
duplicated. Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers
0 to F.
The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit
will light and CPU operation will stop.
0: Normal end
1: Error end
0: Normal
1: Error
0: No duplication
1: Duplication
Section 4-3
Auxiliary Area Data
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Name
Function
Settings
A417
A417.00 to CPU Bus Unit Error, When an error occurs in a data exchange between 0: No error
A417.15
Unit Number Flags the CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit, the CPU Bus
1: Error
Unit Error Flag (A402.07) and the corresponding
flag in A417 are turned ON. Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit
will flash, but CPU operation will continue.
A427
A427.00 to CPU Bus Unit SetA427.15
ting Error, Unit
Number Flags
When a CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs,
0: No setting error
A402.03 and the corresponding flag in A27 are
1: Setting error
turned ON. Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers
0 to F.
The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit
will flash, but CPU operation will continue.
Read/Write Bits (User Settings)
Word
A501
Bits
Name
A501.00 to CPU Bus Unit
A501.15
Restart Bits
Description
Bits A501.00 through A501.15 can be turned ON to
reset CPU Bus Units number #0 through #15,
respectively.
The Restart Bits are turned OFF automatically when
restarting is completed.
The CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags (A302.00 to
A302.15) will turn ON when initialization of the Units
begins and turn OFF when it is completed.
Settings
OFF to ON:
Unit restarted.
Automatically turned
OFF by system after
restart processing
has been completed.
91
Auxiliary Area Data
92
Section 4-3
SECTION 5
Determining IP Addresses
This section explains how to manage and use IP addresses.
5-1
5-2
5-3
IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
5-1-1
IP Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
5-1-2
Allocating IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
5-1-3
Ethernet Unit IP Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
5-1-4
Subnet Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
IP Addresses in FINS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
5-2-1
Specifying Nodes in FINS Communications Services . . . . . . . . . . .
96
5-2-2
Pairing Addresses in Internal Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
5-2-3
Application Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
5-2-4
Related Products and Communications/Setting Methods. . . . . . . . .
106
5-2-5
Pairing IP Addresses and FINS Node Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
Private and Global Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
5-3-1
Private and Global Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
5-3-2
Using a Private Address for the Ethernet Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
5-3-3
Ethernet Unit with a Global Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
93
Section 5-1
IP Addresses
5-1
IP Addresses
Ethernet networks use IP addresses for communications. IP addresses identify both the Ethernet network and the node (host computer, Ethernet Unit,
etc.). IP addresses must be set and controlled so that they are not duplicated.
5-1-1
IP Address Configuration
IP addresses are made up of 32 bits of binary data divided into four 8-bit fields
called octets. These four octets provide the network number (net ID) and host
number (host ID). The network number identifies the network, and the host
number identifies the node (or host) on the network.
The network numbers in an IP address are divided into three classes, A, B,
and C, so that the address system can be selected according to the scale of
the network. (Classes D and E are not used.) The configuration of the IP
address for each of these classes is shown in the following diagram.
Class A
Bit 31
23
0 Network number (7 bits)
0
Class B
Bit 31
1 0
Class C
Bit 31
1 1 0
Class D
Bit 31
1 1 1 0
Multicast address
Class E
Bit 31
1 1 1 1
Identification address
Host number (24 bits)
15
Network number (14 bits)
0
Host number (16 bits)
7
Network number (21 bits)
0
Host number (8 bits)
0
(Cannot be used.)
0
(Cannot be used.)
The number of networks in each class and the number of nodes possible on
the network differ according to the class.
Class
Number of networks
Number of hosts
Class A
Small
224−2 max. (16,777,214 max.)
Class B
Medium
216−2 max. (65,534 max.)
Class C
Large
28−2 max. (254 max.)
The 32 bits of an IP address are divided into four sections of eight bits each,
and expressed as a punctuated number. IP addresses are represented by the
decimal equivalent of each of the four octets in the 32-bit address, each separated by a period. For example, the binary address 10000010 00111010
00010001 00100000 would be represented as 130.58.17.32.
Note
5-1-2
The same network number must be set for every node on the same Ethernet
network.
Allocating IP Addresses
IP (Internet Protocol) is a standard communications protocol used throughout
the world, and is designed to enable communications between any Ethernet
nodes regardless of the networks on which they exist. To achieve this, network numbers are allocated by the Network Solutions, InterNIC Registration
Services, to ensure that all Ethernet networks have unique numbers regardless of where they exist. The local system administrator is left the responsibility of allocating unique host numbers locally. You therefore should obtain a
network number from the InterNIC Registration Services to ensure uniqueness and allow for future network expansions if required.
94
Section 5-1
IP Addresses
5-1-3
Ethernet Unit IP Address Settings
An IP address must be set even for the Ethernet Unit before Ethernet communications can proceed. Either use the default for the Ethernet Unit's IP
address, or else use a peripheral device to set it in the DM Area words allocated to the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit or in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup.
For details, refer to 2-7 Unit Setup Procedure.
5-1-4
Subnet Masks
Operation and management of a network can become very difficult if too
many nodes are connected on a single network. In such a case it can be helpful to configure the system so that a single network is divided up into several
subnetworks. This can be done by using part of the host number as a subnet
number. Internally the network can be treated as a number of subnetworks,
but from the outside it acts as a single network and uses only a single network
ID.
To establish subnetworks, the host ID in the IP address is divided into a subnet ID and a host ID by using a setting called the subnet mask. The subnet
mask indicates which part of the host ID is to be used as the subnet ID. All bits
in the subnet mask that correspond to the bits in the IP address used either as
the network ID or subnet ID are set to “1,” and the remaining bits, which correspond to the bits in the IP address actually used for the host ID, are set to “0.”
The following example shows the subnet mask for an 8-bit subnet ID used in a
class-B IP address.
Bit 31 30
Class B
1
16 15
00
Network ID (14 bits)
0
Host ID (16 bits)
The network mask depends on the class. Apply the subnet mask for this.
Network mask
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 0 0
0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0
0
= FF FF 00 00
+
Subnet mask
1 1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
0 0
0
= FF FF FF 00
Subnet mask
1 1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
0 0
0
= FF FF FF 00
Network ID
Subnet ID
Host ID
Set the same subnet mask value for all of the nodes on that subnetwork.
If a subnet mask is not set (default setting of 0.0.0.0) or if an illegal value is
set, the following subnet mask values will be used depending on the class of
the local IP address.
Class
Class A
Subnet mask value
255.0.0.0
Class B
Class C
255.255.0.0
255.255.255.0
If classes are normally used, it is recommended to set subnet mask values
corresponding to the class.
5-1-5
CIDR
Starting with unit version 1.5, it is possible to use CIDR by selecting the CIDR
option. CIDR stands for “classless inter-domain routing,” which allows allocating IP addresses without using classes. An IP address that uses a class has
the disadvantage of inefficient allocation of IP address space (i.e., number of
hosts) because the IP address is divided into block units with a network ID
95
Section 5-2
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
component and host ID component. Because CIDR does not use a class, it is
possible to divide the IP address space as desired, which enables efficient
use of IP address space (i.e., number of hosts). For example, it is possible to
build a horizontally distributed network exceeding 254 nodes by setting a network mask using CIDR even if class C (192.168, . . .) is used.
Subnet mask range
192.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.252
5-2
5-2-1
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Specifying Nodes in FINS Communications Services
With FINS communications services on an Ethernet network, IP addresses,
UDP port numbers, and TCP port numbers are paired with FINS node
addresses to specify nodes on the network.
Application level
FINS
Transport level
UDP
Internet level
IP
Node number
TCP
UDP port
number
TCP port
number
Must be allocated.
IP address
Physical level
Automatically allocated
Ethernet
Ethernet address
Note
Use the “Node No.” rotary switch on the front of the Ethernet Unit to set the
FINS node address.
Allocating Addresses to Ethernet Units
Ethernet Unit FINS
Message Reception
The IP address, FINS/UDP port number, and FINS/TCP port number set for
the Ethernet Unit are mainly used when receiving FINS communications messages.
Application level
FINS
Transport level
UDP
Internet level
IP
Physical level
Ethernet
Node number
TCP port
number
IP address
Ethernet address
Ethernet V2
96
TCP
UDP port
number
IP
UDP
Receives communications data
conforming to Ethernet address,
IP address, UDP port number,
and FINS node number.
FINS header
FINS data
• Ethernet address:
A fixed number is assigned to each Ethernet Unit
and it cannot be changed.
• IP address:
Either use the default IP address
(192.168.250.FINS_node number), or set the
address in the word allocated in the DM Area or
in the Unit Setup from the CX-Programmer.
Section 5-2
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
• FINS/UDP port number: Either use the default FINS/UDP port number
(9600) or set the number using the CX-Programmer's Unit Setup.
• FINS/TCP port number: Either use the default FINS/TCP port number
(9600) or set the number using the CX-Programmer's Unit Setup.
• FINS node address:
Pairing IP Addresses with
FINS Node Addresses at
Local Nodes
Set the number using the NODE NO. rotary
switch on the front of the Ethernet Unit.
A particular IP address is allocated to each communications node, including
Ethernet Units. The IP address must be paired with the FINS node address (1
to 254) by one of the following methods.
Automatic Generation Method (Dynamic/Static)
Set the relation between the IP address and the FINS node address for the
Ethernet Unit according to the following equation. If the setting does not conform to this equation, a setting error will be generated and the ERH indicator
will flash.
FINS node address = IP address host number
IP Address Table Method and Combined Method
With these methods, the IP address and the FINS node address for the Ethernet Unit have no particular relationship. Set both the FINS node address and
the IP address so that they are not duplicated in the network.
Sending Ethernet Unit
FINS Messages
When the Ethernet Unit sends a FINS message, it must determine the remote
node's IP address, UDP port number, and TCP port number. The relationships between all addresses, such as remote FINS node addresses and IP
addresses, are managed by an internal table at the Ethernet Unit.
Remote FINS node
address
Remote IP address
(Example)
Connection
Remote port
number (Example)
1
2
192.168.250.1
192.168.250.2
UDP
UDP
9600
9600
to
254
192.168.250.254
UDP
9600
When the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted, the internal table is generated automatically from the various settings that have been made. Depending
on the setting method used, data such as remote IP addresses are changed
dynamically. (Dynamic changes can be prohibited.)
97
Section 5-2
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
FINS header
Internal table
Remote FINS
node number
1
2
!
!
!
254
Remote IP
address (Example) Connection
UDP
UDP
9600
9600
192.168.250.254
UDP
9600
Transport level
Remote node
Remote port
number
(Example)
192.168.250.1
192.168.250.2
Application level
FINS data
Application level FINS
FINS
UDP
Internet level
IP
Physical level
Ethernet
Node number
UDP port
number
TCP
TCP port
number
Ethernet address
5-2-2
IP
UDP
UDP
Internet level
IP
Physical level
Ethernet
TCP
UDP port
number
TCP port
number
IP address
Ethernet address
The remote node's IP address, UDP/TCP
method, UDP port number, and TCP port
number are calculated from the node
number in the FINS message, and an
Ethernet frame is generated.
IP address
Ethernet V2
Node number
Transport level
FINS header
FINS data
Pairing Addresses in Internal Tables
FINS/UDP Communications Methods
Automatic Generation
(Dynamic)
When the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted, the following values are set
for addresses in the internal table.
• Remote IP address:
Local IP address network number + remote
FINS node address
• Remote UDP port number: UDP port number set for local Unit
• Connection method:
FINS/UDP
With the dynamic method, data in an internal table that has been generated
can be dynamically converted according to FINS messages received from
remote nodes. This is enabled when the remote node is a device such as a
personal computer and IP addresses are dynamically changed by a method
such as DHCP.
CPU Unit
Ethernet Unit
Remote FINS node number
Personal computer
Must be fixed.
Local FINS node number
Can be changed.
Local IP address
Automatic generation
(dynamic setting)
Internal table
Remote IP address
IP address
FINS command
IP address
FINS response
Local FINS node number
Change
registration
Local IP address
Ethernet
For the remote IP address,
a response is returned to
the changed IP address.
Automatic Generation
(Static)
98
With the static method as well, the following values are set for addresses in
the internal table when the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted.
Section 5-2
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
• Remote IP address:
Local IP address network number + remote
FINS node address
• Remote UDP port number: UDP port number set for local Unit
• Connection method:
FINS/UDP
With the static method, however, data in an internal table that has been generated is not freely changed.
CPU Unit
Ethernet Unit
Remote FINS node number
Personal computer
Local FINS node number
Must be fixed.
Automatic generation
(static setting)
Internal table
Local FINS node number
Must be fixed.
Local IP address
Remote IP address
IP address FINS command
Local IP address
Ethernet
IP address FINS response
IP Address Table Method
With this method, FINS node addresses are converted to IP addresses based
on a correspondence table (IP address table) that is preset in the Unit setup.
The IP address table is set using the CX-Programmer in IP Address Table
under Settings in the Unit Setup. It can be registered for nodes in different
segments and with different network numbers.
The internal table will be as follows:
• FINS Node Address Registered to IP Address Table
The following address is registered to the internal table.
• Remote IP address:
IP address registered to IP address table
• Remote UDP port number: UDP port number set for local Unit
• Connection method:
FINS/UDP
• FINS Node Address Not Registered to IP Address Table
The following address is registered to the internal table.
• Remote IP address:
0.0.0.0
• Remote UDP port number: UDP port number set for local Unit
• Connection method:
FINS/UDP
With the IP address table method, records of FINS nodes registered to the IP
address table are not changed dynamically. For all others node, the data from
FINS nodes registered with a remote IP address of 0.0.0.0 can be dynamically changed when the Unit is turned ON or restarted, according to FINS
messages received from remote nodes. This can be used effectively when the
remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are
dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP.
99
Section 5-2
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Example
When FINS Command is Sent
FINS node number
IP address table
Node number in
IP address table
FINS node
number
18
20
153.214.0.62
153.214.0.129
23
153.218.51.8
IP address
IP address 153.214.0.129
FINS command sent
When FINS Command is Received
FINS node number
Node number not
in IP address table
Internal table
25
153.218.51.10
Changed
Combined Method
IP address 153.218.51.10
FINS response returned
The combined method combines the IP address table method and the automatic generation method (dynamic).
First the IP address table is referenced. Then, if the applicable FINS node
address is found, the corresponding IP address is read. If the FINS node
address is not found, the IP address is calculated using the automatic generation method (dynamic).
The internal table will be as follows:
• FINS Node Address Registered to IP Address Table
The following address is registered to the internal table.
• Remote IP address:
IP address registered to IP address table
• Remote UDP port number: UDP port number set for local Unit
• Connection method:
FINS/UDP
• FINS Node Address Not Registered to IP Address Table
The following address is registered to the internal table.
• Remote IP address:
Local IP address network number + FINS
node address
• Remote UDP port number: UDP port number set for local Unit
• Connection method:
FINS/UDP
With the combined method, records of FINS nodes registered to the IP
address table are not dynamically changed. For all others nodes, the data
from FINS nodes registered with a remote IP address of 0.0.0.0 can be
dynamically changed when the Unit is turned ON or restarted, according to
FINS messages received from remote nodes. This can be used effectively
when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP
addresses are dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP.
100
Section 5-2
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Example
When FINS Command is Sent
FINS node number
IP address table
FINS node
IP address
number
Node number in
153.214.0.62
18
IP address table
20
153.214.0.129
23
153.218.51.8
Node number not
in IP address table Network number: xx.xx.00.00
+
FINS node number: xx
Automatic
generation
method
IP address
FINS command
sent
IP address
(See note.)
FINS command
sent
When FINS Command is Received
FINS node number
Node number
not in IP
address table
Changed
Note
IP address
method
Automatic
generation
method
(dynamic)
Internal table
25
153.218.51.10
IP address
153.218.51.10
FINS response
returned
When an internal table IP address has been changed with the reception of a
FINS command, this is sent to the IP address in the internal table.
Prohibiting Dynamically Changing Remote IP Addresses
For Ethernet Units with Unit Ver. 1.3 or later, methods used to dynamically
change remote IP addresses (automatic generation, IP address table, or combined (mixed) method) can be prohibited (protected against). Use the CX-Programmer unit setting function (version 5.0 and higher) or Web function setting
window to make this setting.
When dynamically changing remote (destination) IP addresses is prohibited,
the internal table for each method is maintained in the state when the power
was turned ON or restarted. Therefore, protection can be provided against
access using FINS/UDP from personal computers or other devices that have
dynamically changing IP addresses. To prohibit (protect from) dynamic
changes, deselect the Change Dynamically option in the Setup Tab of the Unit
Setup.
101
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Using the ETN11compatible Mode
Section 5-2
For Ethernet Unit with unit version 1.4 or later, operating specifications can be
made compatible with the CS1W-ETN11/CJ1W-ETN11 for all methods (automatic generation (dynamic), I/O address table, or combined). (Dynamic
changes, however, are prohibited for the destination IP address in ETN11compatible mode.) While in ETN11-compatible mode, the following operations
will be performed the same as they are for the CS1W-ETN11/CJ1W-ETN11
for FINS/UDP command data sent from a UDP port number other than the
local FINS/UDP port number (default: 9600) set in the Unit Setup Tab Page.
• If the command data is for the Ethernet Unit, a FINS response will be sent
to the source UDP port number.
• If the command data is for any other Unit, such as the CPU Unit, a FINS
response will be sent to the UDP port number set as the FINS/UDP port
number.
The ETN11-compatible mode is set as follows using the Web function setting
window.
1,2,3...
1. Connect to the Ethernet Unit from a Web browser and select Settings - 1.
IP address and Protocols - System. The System Format will be displayed.
2. Select ETN11 compatible mode from the FINS/UDP option in the System
Format, click the Set Button, click the Regist Button, and then turn the power supply OFF and ON or restart the Unit using a software restart.
Note
(1) If the ETN11-compatible mode is used, internal method tables will not be
changed when the power supply is turned OFF and ON or software resets
are executed. This provides protection from access via FINS/UDP from
computers that dynamically change their IP address.
(2) The ETN11-compatible mode is not used for normal applications and
should not be used in most cases.
102
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
FINS/TCP Communications Method
Pairing in the FINS/TCP
Method
Note
Internal Processing
With the FINS/TCP method, communications are first established for each
connection, and then remote FINS node addresses are mutually converted.
(See note.) Then FINS message communications are executed. In this way,
remote FINS node addresses and remote IP addresses are paired for each
connection. Therefore, with the FINS/TCP method, there is no need to set IP
address conversions (i.e., pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses) as
with FINS/UDP. All that is required is to use the CX-Programmer's Unit setup
to set the remote IP address for each connection.
The internal table is changed after connections are established.
The Ethernet Unit executes the following processing when the FINS/TCP
method is used.
Local Device Is FINS/TCP Client
1,2,3...
1. Connections are established in TCP/IP protocol with the IP addresses set
at the Unit (i.e., the IP address for each connection No.).
2. The remote node (i.e., the server) is notified of the FINS node address for
the local device.
3. Notification is received from the remote node (i.e., the server) of the remote node's FINS node address.
4. The Ethernet Unit changes the internal table (FINS node address, IP address, and TCP port number).
5. FINS messages can then be sent and received.
Local Device Is a FINS/TCP Server
1,2,3...
1. A request to open a connection is received in TCP/IP protocol from the remote device (i.e., the client, either a personal computer or an Ethernet
Unit), and the connection is established.
2. Notification is received from the remote node (i.e., the client) of the remote
node's FINS node address.
3. The local device provides notification of the local FINS node address.
4. The Ethernet Unit changes the internal node correspondence table (FINS
node address, IP address, and TCP port number).
5. FINS messages can then be sent and received.
103
Section 5-2
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Personal computer or
Ethernet Unit (client)
Ethernet Unit (server)
(1) The connection is established.
Local FINS node number A
(2) The local device (such as a personal
computer) sends notification that its
FINS node number is A.
Local IP address T
IP address FINS node number transmission
CPU Unit
Local FINS node number B
Local IP address S
Ethernet
IP address FINS node number transmission
The FINS node number (3) The Ethernet Unit sends notification
is converted for each
that its FINS node number is B.
connection number.
(4) The internal node correspondence
table is changed.
(5) It then becomes possible to send
and receive FINS messages.
Setting FINS/TCP
Connections
The procedure for setting FINS/TCP connections involves the items described
below. The settings are made individually for each connection (numbers 1 to
16) under FINS/TCP settings in the Unit Setup.
Local Device Is Server
1,2,3...
1. Set the server.
2. Set IP addresses for connected devices.
If the option for protection by IP addresses is checked, set the IP addresses for clients where connections are permitted. (This can be omitted.)
3. Automatic FINS node address allocation:
If the client (generally a personal computer) supports FINS/TCP, and if it is
to be used without setting a FINS node address, the value set here (from
239 to 254) can be allocated to the client.
Functions related to these settings are explained in detail in the Operation
Manual Construction of Applications, SECTION 7 Using FINS Communications to Create Host Applications. The default settings should normally
be used.
Local Device Is a Client
1,2,3...
1. Set the client.
2. Set the IP addresses for the connection destination.
Set the IP address for the remote Ethernet Unit (i.e., the server) connected
by FINS/TCP.
This setting must be made if this Ethernet Unit is to be used as a FINS/
TCP client.
104
Section 5-2
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
5-2-3
Application Examples
Responding to Computers with Changed IP Addresses
FINS/UDP
Communications Method
With FINS/UDP, whether using the automatic conversion method (dynamic),
the IP address table method, or the combined method, remote FINS node
addresses and remote IP addresses in the internal table are changed after
FINS messages are received. Therefore, even when a FINS command has
been received from a personal computer (a DHCP client computer) for which
the IP address is dynamically changed, a response can still be sent back to
the computer (the DHCP client computer) from which the command originated.
Personal computer (client)
IP address changed
(acquired from DHCP server when connected)
FINS command sent
IP address FINS command
Ethernet
IP address FINS response
Ethernet Unit
(with fixed IP address)
Response sent back to
changed IP address
FINS/TCP
Communications Method
With FINS/TCP, FINS node addresses and IP addresses in the internal table
are changed with each connection that is established. Therefore, even when a
FINS command has been received from a personal computer (a DHCP client
computer) for which the IP address is dynamically changed, a response can
still be sent back to the computer (the DHCP client computer) from which the
command originated.
Personal computer (client)
IP address changed
(acquired from DHCP server when connected)
FINS command sent
IP address FINS command
IP address FINS response
Ethernet
Ethernet Unit
(FINS/TCP server; with
fixed IP address)
Response sent back to
changed IP address
Note
Automatic IP Address Setting by DHCP Service
DHCP service is a method whereby a DHCP server collectively manages all
of the IP address in a network.
Nodes that are functioning as clients acquire IP addresses from the DHCP
server whenever the system is started. Therefore, at a personal computer
using the DHCP service, IP addresses may be different with each system
startup.
DHCP service is mainly used for automatic settings in devices such as personal computers that are used for client applications. Nodes used for server
105
Section 5-2
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
applications, such as mail servers, are normally allocated fixed IP addresses.
Ethernet Units in PLC systems are also allocated fixed IP addresses.
Simultaneously Running Multiple Applications on a Personal Computer
In communications involving previous models, multiple communications applications were configured on personal computers according to data accessing
uses, and the fact that no more than one UDP port number for FINS communications could be used on any given computer created a problem. This
Ethernet Unit provides a practical solution with an internal table that pairs
remote nodes (applications) with FINS node addresses, enabling dynamic
changes.
FINS/UDP
Communications Method
FINS nodes are allocated individually for each application on the computer,
and the respective FINS/UDP port numbers that are used are also allocated
individually. When FINS/UDP FINS commands are sent from individual applications to the Ethernet Unit, the respective remote IP addresses and remote
port numbers in the internal table are dynamically changed.
FINS/TCP
Communications Method
With this method as well, FINS nodes are allocated individually for each application on the computer, and the respective FINS/TCP port numbers that are
used are also allocated individually. Each application is positioned with a
FINS/TCP client, and requests the opening of a connection with the Ethernet
Unit's FINS/TCP server. When the connection is established, the respective
remote IP address and remote port number in the internal table are dynamically changed.
5-2-4
Related Products and Communications/Setting Methods
Models Supporting Automatic Generation Method (Dynamic)
Product
Model/Series/
Version
CS-series Ethernet
Unit
100BASE-TX
CS1W-ETN21
10BASE-5
10BASE-T
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
CJ-series Ethernet
Unit
100BASE-TX
CJ1W-ETN21
10BASE-T
10BASE-5
CJ1W-ETN11
CV500-ETN01
CV/CVM1-series
Ethernet Unit
FinsGateway
Version 4.xx or
lower
Version 2003 or
higher
Programmable Terminal
Open Network Controller (ONC)
106
NS Series
---
Supports automatic
generation method
(dynamic)?
Yes
No: Set by automatic
generation method or
combined method. Communications are not possible with personal
computers with variable
IP addresses.
Yes
No: Set by automatic
generation method or
combined method. Communications are not possible with personal
computers with variable
IP addresses.
Yes
No: Set manually so that
automatic settings can be
used with the automatic
generation method.
Section 5-2
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Models Supporting Automatic Generation Method (Static)
Product
Model/Series/
Version
CS-series Ethernet
Unit
100BASE-TX
CS1W-ETN21
10BASE-5
10BASE-T
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
CJ-series Ethernet
Unit
100BASE-TX
CJ1W-ETN21
10BASE-T
10BASE-5
CJ1W-ETN11
CV500-ETN01
CV/CVM1-series
Ethernet Unit
FinsGateway
Supports automatic
generation method
(static)?
Yes
Yes: Simply called “automatic generation
method.”
Yes
Yes: Simply called “automatic generation
method.”
Version 4.xx or
lower
Programmable Terminal
Open Network Controller (ONC)
Version 2003 or
higher
Yes
NS Series
---
No: Set manually so that
automatic settings can be
used with the automatic
generation method.
Models Supporting IP Address Table Method
Product
CS-series Ethernet
Unit
CJ-series Ethernet
Unit
CV/CVM1-series
Ethernet Unit
FinsGateway
Model/Series/
Version
100BASE-TX
10BASE-5
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-ETN01
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
CS1W-ETN11
CJ1W-ETN21
10BASE-T
CJ1W-ETN11
10BASE-5
CV500-ETN01
Programmable Terminal
Version 4.xx or
lower
Version 2003 or
higher
NS Series
Open Network Controller (ONC)
---
Supports IP address
table method?
Yes
No: Set manually. FINS
communications are not
possible with personal
computers set automatically by DHCP.
Models that Can Use the Combined Method
Product
CS-series Ethernet
Unit
CJ-series Ethernet
Unit
CV/CVM1-series
Ethernet Unit
FinsGateway
Model/Series/
Version
Supports combined
method?
100BASE-TX
10BASE-5
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-ETN01
Yes
No
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
CS1W-ETN11
CJ1W-ETN21
No
Yes
10BASE-T
10BASE-5
CJ1W-ETN11
CV500-ETN01
No
No
Version 4.xx or
lower
No
Version 2003 or
higher
Yes
107
Section 5-3
Private and Global Addresses
Product
5-2-5
Programmable Terminal
Model/Series/
Version
NS Series
Open Network Controller (ONC)
---
Supports combined
method?
No: Set manually. FINS
communications are not
possible with personal
computers set automatically by DHCP.
Pairing IP Addresses and FINS Node Addresses
The following table shows the methods for pairing IP address and FINS node
addresses, and the relation between fixed and variable address, for both
FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP.
Communications
method
FINS/UDP
FINS/TCP
5-3
5-3-1
Method of pairing
of IP addresses
and FINS node
addresses
IP address determination
By pairing FINS
IP address
node addresses with conversion
IP addresses in
Ethernet
By automatic conver- Automatic
sion of FINS node
addresses at Ethernet Unit and remote
node (and then
sending and receiving data)
Automatic generation method
(static)
Automatic generation method
(dynamic)
Client (personal
Server (PLC)
computer of PLC)
FINS node IP address FINS node IP address
address
address
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed or
variable
Fixed
Fixed
IP address table Fixed
method
Fixed or
variable
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed or
variable
Fixed or
Fixed or
can be allo- variable
cated automatically
when not
determined.
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Combined
method
Connection
method (automatic FINS
node address
conversion)
Fixed
Private and Global Addresses
Private and Global Addresses
There are two kinds of IP addresses, private and global.
• Global addresses: These are IP addresses that connect directly to the
Internet. Allocated by application to NIC, each
address is unique in the world, and as many as 4.3
million can be allocated worldwide.
• Private addresses: These are IP addresses for Intranet (LAN) use, and
cannot connect directly to the Internet. Frames that
include private IP addresses are restricted by the
router from being sent outside the LAN.
Generally, as shown below, global addresses in the intranet are allocated only
to IP routers (such as broadband routers) interfacing with the Internet. All
other nodes in the intranet, including the Ethernet Unit, are allocated private
addresses.
108
Section 5-3
Private and Global Addresses
Intranet
Personal computer,
CX-Programmer, etc.
Ethernet
Firewall
PLC
Private address
IP router
Private address
Internet
Not output to Internet
Global address
(required)
Not output to Internet
Intranet
Global address
IP router
Private address
Private address
Personal computer,
CX-Programmer, etc.
Firewall
Ethernet
PLC
Private address
Communications Services
That Require Global
Addresses for Ethernet
Units
PLC
Private address
A global address is required for the Ethernet Unit's IP address when the following communications services are used over the Internet.
• FINS communications services
• File transfers
• Socket services
When mail is sent or received over the Internet, the Unit's IP address can be a
private address.
109
Section 5-3
Private and Global Addresses
5-3-2
Using a Private Address for the Ethernet Unit
Intranet
CX-Programmer, etc.
FINS/TCP client computer
FINS communications
FTP
Socket
Ethernet
Communications in intranet
Firewall
PLC
IP router
Sending mail
Receiving mail
Ethernet Unit: Private address
Internet
E-mail can be sent and received
through the Internet.
Intranet
FINS communications
FTP
Socket
IP router
CX-Programmer, etc.
FINS/TCP client computer
Firewall
Communications in Intranet
Ethernet
PLC
Communications
in Intranet
Ethernet Unit: Private address
Conditions for Using
Communications
Applications
1,2,3...
PLC
Ethernet Unit: Private address
When the Ethernet Unit has a private address, communications applications
can be used under the following conditions:
1. FINS Communications Service
• FINS communications service is enabled only between Ethernet Units
with private addresses on the intranet.
A device such as a personal computer (with a FINS application including
a CX-Programmer) cannot connect online and communicate over the
Internet with an Ethernet Unit that has a private address. FINS communications over the Internet are also not possible between Ethernet Units
with private addresses.
• Either FINS/TCP or FINS/UDP can be used for the FINS communications
service.
• With FINS/UDP, all of the Ethernet Unit IP address conversion methods
can be used.
110
Section 5-3
Private and Global Addresses
• With FINS/UDP, when the IP address (private address) of a computer
serving as a DHCP client is changed, the Ethernet Unit's IP address conversion method will be the automatic generation method (dynamic), the
combined method, or the IP address table method. When FINS/TCP is
used, IP addresses can be changed automatically.
2. Transferring Files
• Files can be transferred, using FTP protocol, between the PLC and a
device such as a personal computer (i.e., an FTP client) with a private
address on the intranet.
• The TCP port number to be used for FTP cannot be used if prohibited by
a firewall in the communications path.
3. Sending Mail
The PLC can send the Ethernet Unit's IP address to the SMTP server by
mail via the intranet.
4. Receiving Mail
The PLC can receive the Ethernet Unit's IP address from the POP3 server
by mail via the intranet.
5. Automatic Clock Adjustment
The PLC can acquire clock data through the Ethernet Unit's IP address
from the SNTP server via the intranet.
6. Host Name Designation
The PLC can acquire the server IP address for the Ethernet Unit's IP address from the DNS server via the intranet.
Note
Network Security and Firewalls
Setting up an intranet through a global address involves network security considerations. Before doing so, be sure to consult with a network specialist and
consider installing a firewall.
Once a firewall has been set up by a communications company, on the other
hand, there may be some applications that cannot be used. Be sure to check
first with the communications company.
111
Section 5-3
Private and Global Addresses
5-3-3
Ethernet Unit with a Global Address
Intranet
CX-Programmer, etc.
FINS/TCP client computer
Ethernet
Communications
over Internet
Firewall
Private address
IP router
Internet
Not output to Internet
Global address
(required)
Not output to Internet
Intranet
Global address
IP router
Private address
Private address
Firewall
Ethernet
Communications
in intranet
PLC
Ethernet Unit: Global address
Conditions for Using
Communications
Applications
1,2,3...
Communications applications can be used over the Internet under the following conditions:
1. FINS Communications Service
• A device such as a personal computer (with a FINS application including
a CX-Programmer) can connect online and communicate over the Internet with an Ethernet Unit that has a global address.
• FINS/TCP is recommended as the FINS communications service
method.
FINS/TCP is more reliable than FINS/UDP in terms of communications
errors involving IP routers.
• The IP address table method is used as the Ethernet Unit's IP address
conversion method.
• The TCP port number to be used for FINS/TCP cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path.
2. Transferring Files
• Files can be transferred over the Internet between a device such as a personal computer (i.e., an FTP client) and a PLC with an Ethernet Unit that
has a global address.
• The TCP port number to be used for FTP cannot be used if prohibited by
a firewall in the communications path.
112
Section 5-3
Private and Global Addresses
3. Sending Mail
• The PLC can send the Ethernet Unit's IP address to the SMTP server by
mail via the intranet, even if it as a private address.
• The TCP port number (default: 25) to be used for SMTP cannot be used if
prohibited by a firewall in the communications path. Also, with some communications companies, there may be restrictions, based on mail security
considerations, on using POP before SMTP.
4. Receiving Mail
• The PLC can receive the Ethernet Unit's IP address from the POP3
server by mail via the intranet, even if it as a private address.
• The TCP port number (default: 110) to be used for POP3 cannot be used
if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path.
5. Automatic Clock Adjustment
• The PLC can acquire clock data through the Ethernet Unit's IP address
from the SNTP server via the intranet, even if it is a private address.
• The TCP port number (default: 123) to be used for SNTP cannot be used
if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path.
6. Host Name Designation
• The PLC can acquire the server IP address for the Ethernet Unit's IP
address from the DNS server via the intranet, even if Ethernet Unit's IP
address is a private address.
• The UDP/TCP port number (default: 53) to be used for DNS cannot be
used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path.
Note
Network Security and Firewalls
Setting a global IP address for an Ethernet Unit involves network security considerations. It is recommended that the user contract with a communications
company for a dedicated line, rather than using a general line such as a blue
band. Also, be sure to consult with a network specialist and consider security
measures such as a firewall.
Once a firewall has been set up by a communications company, on the other
hand, there may be some applications that cannot be used. Be sure to check
first with the communications company.
113
Private and Global Addresses
114
Section 5-3
SECTION 6
FINS Communications
This section provides information on communicating on Ethernet Systems and interconnected networks using FINS
commands. The information provided in the section deals only with FINS communications in reference to Ethernet Units.
FINS commands issued from a PLC are sent via the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions programmed
into the user ladder-diagram program. Although an outline of these instructions is provided in this section, refer to the CS/
CJ-series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual (W340) for further details on programming these instructions.
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
Overview of FINS Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
6-1-1
Communications On an Ethernet Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
6-1-2
Using the FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
6-1-3
FINS Communications Service Specifications for Ethernet . . . . . .
117
FINS/UDP Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
6-2-1
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
FINS/TCP Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
6-3-1
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
Creating Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
6-4-1
Routing Table Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
6-4-2
Connecting and Using a Peripheral Device for the PLC . . . . . . . . .
125
6-4-3
Routing Table Setting Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
Using FINS Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
6-5-1
CX-Programmer (CX-Server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
6-5-2
FinsGateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
Communicating between OMRON PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
6-6-1
Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
6-6-2
PLC Communications Data Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
6-6-3
Using SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
6-6-4
Writing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
6-6-5
Program Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
6-6-6
Transmission Delays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
115
Section 6-1
Overview of FINS Communications
6-1
6-1-1
Overview of FINS Communications
Communications On an Ethernet Network
Data is sent and received as UDP/IP packets or TCP/IP packets on an Ethernet network.
PLC
or host computer
Ethernet Unit
Packet (FINS command)
Ethernet
Packet (FINS response)
Ethernet Unit
PLC
In the FINS communications service, both an IP address for IP (the Internet
layer) and a FINS node address for FINS (the application layer) are used for
the remote device. Also, 9600 is used as the default setting for the local UDP
or TCP port number (i.e., the transport layer) for identifying the application
layer, i.e., the FINS communications service. (Another number can be set for
the FINS/UDP port from the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup.)
For details on pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses and UDP/TCP
port numbers, refer to 5-2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications.
FINS
Application Layer
Node Number
UDP
Transport Layer
TCP
UDP Port No.
TCP Port No.
IP
Internet Layer
IP Address
Ethernet
Physical Layer
Ethernet Address
The FINS communications service is a communications method based on
UDP/IP, and it is supported by most OMRON Ethernet-related products. (In
this manual it is called the FINS/UDP method.) In addition to supporting the
FINS/UDP method, the CS1W-ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21 support FINS communications using TCP/IP. (In this manual, this is called the FINS/TCP
method.)
6-1-2
Using the FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP Methods
It is recommended that FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP be used as follows:
• When remote devices do not support the FINS/TCP method:
Use the FINS/UDP method for FINS communications with those devices.
116
Section 6-1
Overview of FINS Communications
• When FINS nodes are connected on the same Ethernet segment:
Use the FINS/UDP method between those nodes.
Note
FINS/UDP offers a slight advantage in performance.
• When FINS nodes are connected over multiple IP network layers:
Use the FINS/TCP method between those nodes.
Note
FINS/TCP offers superior communications quality.
• When the quality of connections is unreliable, as with wireless LAN:
Use the FINS/TCP method between those nodes.
Note
6-1-3
FINS/TCP offers superior communications quality.
FINS Communications Service Specifications for Ethernet
Item
Number of nodes
Specifications
254
Message length
2,012 bytes max.
Number of buffers
Protocol name
192
FINS/UDP method
Protocol used
UDP/IP
TCP/IP
The selection of UDP/IP or TCP/IP is made by means of the FINS/TCP Tab in the CX-Programmer's Unit Setup.
Number of connections --Port number
9600 (default)
Can be changed.
Protection
No
FINS/TCP method
16
9600 (default)
Can be changed.
Yes (Specification of client IP addresses when Unit is used as a
server)
Items set for each connection
• Server/client specification
• Remote IP address specification
When client: Specify remote Ethernet Unit (server) IP address.
When server: Specify IP addresses of clients permitted to connect.
• Automatic FINS node address allocation:
Specify automatic allocation of client FINS node addresses.
• Keep-alive:
Specify whether remote node keep-alive is to be used.
TCP/IP Setting
• Remote node keep-alive time
Other
Items set for each UDP
port
• Broadcast
• IP address conversion
Internal table
This a table of correspondences for remote FINS node addresses, remote IP addresses, TCP/
UDP, and remote port numbers. It is created automatically when power is turned ON to the
PLC or when the Ethernet Unit is restarted, and it is automatically changed when a connection
is established by means of the FINS/TCP method or when a FINS command received.
The following functions are enabled by using this table.
• IP address conversion using the FINS/UDP method
• Automatic FINS node address conversion after a connection is established using the FINS/
TCP method
• Automatic client FINS node address allocation using the FINS/TCP method
• Simultaneous connection of multiple FINS applications
117
Section 6-2
FINS/UDP Method
6-2
6-2-1
FINS/UDP Method
Overview
FINS/UDP Features
The FINS/UDP method is a FINS communications method that uses the UDP/
IP protocol. UDP/IP is a connectionless communications protocol. When a
message is sent from one node to another, the two nodes have an equal relationship and there is no clear connection. If using TCP is like making a telephone call, then UDP is more like delivering a memo by hand. Although the
UDP protocol is fast, data communications are less reliable than with TCP.
In particular, when sending large amounts of data involving significant routing,
the user must program measures, such as retries, into applications in order to
improve reliability.
Node
Node
Data transmission 1
Data transmission 2
Data transmission 3
Data is sent in one direction, with no
confirmation of whether the data was
received. Because there are few procedures
involved, data can be sent at high speed but
with less reliability than with TCP.
The FINS/UDP method has the following features:
• Because FINS/UDP is a connectionless protocol, there is no limit to the
number of corrections.
• FINS/UDP can be used for broadcasting.
• When data is sent via an IP network with multiple layers (such as the
Internet), communications reliability drops.
FINS/UDP Frame Format
The following diagram shows the structure of a UDP packet used for sending
and receiving data on an Ethernet network.
Ethernet Ver. 2
IP
UDP
FINS frame
FCS
UDP packet
As the diagram shows, a nested structure is used with the FINS/UDP method,
i.e., Ethernet Ver. 2, IP frame, UDP frame, and FINS frame. A UDP data section (FINS frame) that exceeds 1,472 bytes is split into packets for transmission. The split UDP data is then joined automatically at the UDP/IP protocol
layer. There is normally no need to pay attention at the application layer to this
split, but it may not be possible to send 1,472-byte UDP packets over an IP
network with multiple layers. When using the FINS communications service in
a system such as this, select the FINS/TCP method.
118
Section 6-2
FINS/UDP Method
UDP Port Numbers for
FINS/UDP
The UDP port number is the number for UDP to identify the application layer
(i.e., the FINS communications service in this case). When communications
are executed by UDP/IP, this port number must be allocated to the communications service.
The default setting for the FINS/UDP local UDP port number (i.e., the Ethernet Unit's UDP port number) is 9600. To set another number, make the setting
for the FINS/UDP port using the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup.
At the Ethernet Unit, a UDP/IP frame received with a FINS/UDP port number
is recognized as a FINS frame.
Procedure for Using FINS/UDP
1.
Make the basic settings.
Refer to SECTION 2 Startup Procedure in the Operation Manual Construction of Networks.
↓
2.
Make the settings in the Unit Setup.
With the CX-Programmer connected online, select the Ethernet Unit in the CX-Programmer's I/O
Table Window. Right-click, and select Unit Setup. Then make the following settings in the Unit
Setup Window.
Setup Tab
• Broadcast
• FINS/UDP port (Default: 9600)
• IP address table (for the IP address table method only)
↓
3.
Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC. (See note.)
Set the routing tables with CX-Integrator, and transfer it to each PLC.
↓
4.
Create a ladder program that includes the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions.
Note
Routing tables are required in the following situations:
• When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network (e.g.,
remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX-Programmer).
• When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC (i.e.,
CPU Unit).
• When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same
network.
It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is
mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network.
119
Section 6-3
FINS/TCP Method
6-3
6-3-1
FINS/TCP Method
Overview
FINS/TCP Features
The FINS/TCP method is a FINS communications method that uses the TCP/
IP protocol. TCP/IP is a connection-type communications protocol. Before a
message is sent from one node to another, it is necessary to establish a virtual circuit, i.e., a connection. Once a connection has been established, communications are quite reliable. The arrival of data that is sent via the
connection is confirmed by an acknowledgement (ACK) response, and retries
are executed automatically as required.
The FINS/TCP method has been newly added to the CS1W-ETN21 and
CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Units. When FINS/TCP is used, it must be determined
which node is the server and which is the client.
For communications between a personal computer and a PLC, the computer
should normally be set as the client and the PLC as the server. For communications between two PLCs, either one can be set as the client and the other
as the server.
Node
(Server)
Node
(Client)
Request to establish a connection
Connection established
Acknowledgement
Data transmission 1
Acknowledgement
An acknowledgement is received whenever a
connection is established or data is sent, so
transmissions are more reliable but somewhat slower.
Compared to the FINS/UDP method, the FINS/TCP method has the following
characteristics.
• Data transmission is more reliable, due to factors such as retry processing at the TCP/IP layer. The FINS/TCP method is thus better suited to
dealing with communications errors in an IP network that spans several
layers.
• Remote clients can be restricted by means of settings at the server (i.e.,
the server can be protected from access by non-specified IP addresses).
• Broadcasting cannot be used.
• TCP/IP has various retry procedures, and this tends to lower its performance in comparison with UDP/IP.
• There is a limit to the number of connections that can be made (i.e., 16
connections maximum), and any given node can communicate only with
up to 16 other nodes at a time.
120
Section 6-3
FINS/TCP Method
• Once a FINS/TCP connection (connection number, remote IP address)
has been set in the Unit Setup, it can be dynamically changed from the
ladder program using a FINS command (i.e., FINS/TCP CONNECTION
REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST).
FINS/TCP Frame Format
Ethernet Ver. 2
The following diagram shows the structure of a TCP packet sent over an
Ethernet network.
IP
TCP
FINS/TCP header
FINS frame
FCS
TCP packet
As the diagram shows, a nested structure is used with the FINS/TCP method,
i.e., Ethernet Ver. 2, IP frame, TCP frame, FINS/TCP header frame, and FINS
frame. A TCP data section (FINS/TCP header + FINS frame) that exceeds the
segment size (default: 1,024 bytes, with automatic adjustment for optimum
values between the nodes) is split into TCP packets for transmission. The split
TCP data is then joined automatically at the remote node's TCP/IP protocol
layer. The TCP/IP protocol layer, however, cannot determine where the data
has been split, so the TCP data sections from multiple packets are all joined
together. Therefore, when using the FINS/TCP method, FINS/TCP headers
must be added at the beginning of FINS frames in order to serve as FINS
frame delimiters. The length of the data in the following FINS frame is stored
in the header, allowing the frame to be separated out by the remote node.
With the Ethernet Unit and FinsGateway Ver. 2003 the appropriate frames are
separated out automatically, so there is normally no need to be pay attention
to it at the application layer.
TCP Port Number for
FINS/TCP
The TCP port number is the number for TCP to identify the application layer
(i.e., the FINS communications service in this case). When communications
are executed using TCP/IP, this port number must be allocated for the communications service.
The default setting for the FINS/TCP local TCP port number (i.e., the Ethernet
Unit's TCP port number) is 9600. To set another number, make the setting for
the FINS/TCP port using the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup.
The FINS/TCP port number set in the Unit Setup is used by the FINS/TCP
server's TCP socket. The FINS/TCP client's TCP socket uses any TCP port
number that can be used at that node. (With the Ethernet Unit and FinsGateway Ver. 2003, an unused TCP port is automatically detected and utilized.)
At the Ethernet Unit, a TCP/IP frame that is received is recognized as a FINS
frame, according to the remote TCP port number in the frame.
FINS/TCP Connection
Numbers
FINS/TCP allows up to 16 FINS/TCP connections to be established simultaneously, and these 16 connections are managed at the Ethernet Unit by connection numbers. When setting connections by means of the FINS/TCP
settings in the CX-Programmer's Unit Setup, set them individually using these
connection numbers.
121
Section 6-3
FINS/TCP Method
FINS/TCP Connection Status (Word n+23)
While a connection with a remote node is established, the bit corresponding to
the FINS/TCP connection status turns ON in the section of the CPU Bus Unit
words allocated in the CIO Area. The bit turns OFF if the connection is terminated by a communications error or a FINS command (i.e., FINS/TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST).
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05 04
03
02
01
00
n+23
*: Bit 15 corresponds to connection No. 16, bit 00 to connection No. 1, etc.
FINS/TCP
Communications
Procedure
With FINS/TCP, FINS node addresses are exchanged immediately after a
connection is established. This makes it possible to determine the FINS node
addresses to which the 16 connection numbers, and to manage them in an
internal table.
Personal computer
(Client)
Ethernet Unit
(Server)
Example:
IP address S
FINS node number B
Example:
IP address C
FINS node number A
Passive open
Active open
Connection request (C→S)
Connection established
Connection established
Local node No. sent
Connection established
FINS node number A sent
Remote node No. received
FINS node numbers exchanged
Remote node No. received
FINS node number B sent
Local node No. sent
FINS frame sent
FINS frame sent
Full duplex communications
Normal data communications
After a connection has been established as a FINS/TCP server, it is terminated in the following ways.
• When the connection is closed by the client.
• When a FINS command to close the connection (FINS/TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST) is sent by the client.
• When there is no response from the client when the keep-alive function is
in effect.
After a connection has been established as a FINS/TCP client, it can be terminated in the following ways.
• If the connection is closed by the server.
• If there is no response from the client when the keep-alive function is in
effect.
122
Section 6-3
FINS/TCP Method
Even if the connection is closed at the FINS/TCP client, requests continue to
be made to the FINS/TCP server every few seconds to open a connection.
Note
After the Ethernet Unit is powered up or restarted, the IP address for the connection used as the FINS/TCP client is the remote IP address set under the
FINS/TCP Tab in the Unit Setup.
To dynamically change the remote IP address (i.e., during CPU Unit operation), execute the CMND(490) instruction in the ladder program and send a
FINS command (FINS/TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE
REQUEST; command code: 27 30 hexadecimal) to the Ethernet Unit.
Procedure for Using FINS/TCP
1.
2.
3.
4.
Note
Make the basic settings.
Refer to Section 2 Startup Procedure in the Operation Manual Construction of Networks.
↓
Make the settings in the Unit Setup.
With the CX-Programmer connected online, select the Ethernet Unit in the CX-Programmer's I/O Table Window. Right-click, and select Unit Setup. Then make the following settings in the Unit Setup Window.
Setup Tab
• FINS/TCP port (Default: 9600)
FINS/TCP Tab
• Remote IP addresses (when client)
Note: When functioning as a server, set the permitted client IP addresses only when
protection is in effect.
• Automatically allocated FINS node addresses
Note: The functions of these items are described in detail in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications, SECTION 7 Using FINS Communications to Create Host
Applications. Normally the defaults should be used.
• Keep-alive setting
Note: Normally this should be selected to be used.
• IP addresses protection setting
Note: Check this only for protection as the server.
↓
Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC. (See note.)
Set the routing tables with CX-Integrator, and transfer it to each PLC.
↓
Create a ladder program that includes the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)
instructions.
Routing tables are required in the following situations:
• When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network (e.g.,
remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX-Programmer)
• When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC (i.e.,
CPU Unit)
• When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same
network
It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is
mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network.
123
Section 6-4
Creating Routing Tables
6-4
Creating Routing Tables
When the FINS communications service is used, routing tables must be created in advance. Routing tables are required in the following circumstances.
• When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network (e.g.,
remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX-Programmer)
• When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC (i.e.,
CPU Unit).
• When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same
network.
It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is
mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network. The routing tables are required not only for nodes communicating via the FINS communications service but also for all relay nodes on the network.
6-4-1
Routing Table Overview
The routing tables describe the transmission path for FINS messages when
the FINS communications are used. It consists of two tables: A local network
table and a relay network table.
Local Network Table
The local network table is a table describing the correspondences among unit
numbers of the Communications Units and Boards mounted to each node.
Example
Unit #04
Unit #05
Unit #06
Unit #07
Local Network Table
Local network Unit number
address
Network #1
Network #2
Network #3
Network #4
Note
1
2
3
4
04
05
06
07
1. The unit number is set (0 to F: 1 to 15) by the rotary switch on the front of
the Ethernet Unit.
2. The network address is the number of the network (1 to 127) to which the
Communications Unit or Board is connected. It is set when the local network table is created.
Relay Network Table
124
A relay table is a table that shows the nodes to which data should be sent first
in order to send data to a network that is not connected to the local node. It
shows the correspondence between the address of the final destination network, and the network address and node address of the first relay point of the
path to reach there. When internetwork communications are carried out, the
end network can be reached by following the relay points.
Section 6-4
Creating Routing Tables
The following example shows routing tables for sending data from PLC #1 (the
local node: network address 1, node address 1) to PLC #4 (the destination
node: network address 3, node address 2).
PLC #3
(relay node)
PLC #2 (relay node)
PLC #1 (local node)
Node #1
Node #2
Unit #0
Node #1
Unit #1
Node #3
Node #2
PLC #4 (destination node)
Node #2
Node #1
PLC #1
relay network table
PLC #2
relay network table
End
Relay
Relay
network network node
End
Relay
Relay
network network node
2
1
3
3
1
3
3
Note
6-4-2
2
2
To go to network #3,
first go to node #2 at
network #2.
To go to network #3,
first go to node #3 at
network #1.
Network #3
Network #2
Network #1
End network
PLC #3
local network table
Local
network
address
Unit
number
2
0
3
1
(To go to network #3 (The network is the same,
according to the local so go to node #2 at network #3.)
network table, go
through unit
number 1 of the local
CPU Rack.)
In the above example, the routing tables required for a message to reach PLC
#4 from PLC #1 are shown. Additional settings would be required in the routing tables for a message to reach PLC #1 from PLC #4. Refer to 6-4-3 Routing Table Setting Examples for routing table setting examples.
Connecting and Using a Peripheral Device for the PLC
Routing tables must be created by a CX-Integrator connected to the PLC.
(They cannot be created using a Programming Console.) For details on how
to connect and use the CX-Integrator, refer to the CX-Integrator Operation
Manual (W445). (CX-Integrator is automatically installed when CX-One is
installed.)
Note
1. When routing tables are transferred from the CX-Integrator to the PLC, the
CPU Bus Unit is reset so that the routing tables that have been created can
be read and enabled. Before transferring the routing tables, make sure that
the devices in the system will not be adversely affected by resetting the
CPU Bus Unit.
2. To transfer routing tables for multiple nodes to a PLC in one batch, connect
the CX-Integrator to a PLC with only one Communications Unit mounted.
Routing tables cannot be transferred to other nodes from a PLC with multiple Communications Units mounted.
3. Routing tables can only be transferred as a batch to multiple nodes within
the same network as the PLC to which the CX-Integrator is connected.
125
Section 6-4
Creating Routing Tables
6-4-3
Routing Table Setting Examples
■
Example 1: Local Network Table for a PLC With Multiple Units Mounted
This example shows the local network table settings for a PLC to which multiple CPU Bus Units are mounted.
Ethernet network
Controller Link network
(Network #A)
(Network #B)
PS:
CPU:
ETN:
CLK:
E C C P
T L P S
N K U
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
Ethernet Unit
Controller Link Unit
Unit #a Unit #b
Local Network Table
No.
1
2
■
Local
network
A
B
CPU Bus
Unit
a
b
Example 2: Three Interconnected Networks
This example shows the relay network table settings for three different interconnected networks.
Relay Network Table
PLC #1
Node #a
Network #A
PLC #2
Node #b
Node #c
PLC #3
Network #B
Node #d
PLC #4
Node #e
Node #f
Network #C
PLC #5
No.
End
network
Relay
network
1
2
B
C
A
A
b
b
1
C
B
e
1
2
A
C
B
B
c
e
1
A
B
c
1
2
A
B
C
C
f
f
Node
Node #g
In the table for PLC #3, for example, if network #A is taken as the end network, then network #B becomes the relay network and node #c becomes the
relay node. If network #C is taken as the end network, then network #B still
becomes the relay network and node #e becomes the relay node.
126
Section 6-4
Creating Routing Tables
■
Example 3: All Nodes
This example uses the following configuration to show the routing tables for all
nodes.
Unit #5
Node #6
Unit #3
Node #4
Unit #2
Node #3
Network #20
C
L
K
E
T
N
CE
L T PLC
KN 2
PLC
4
Unit #0
Node #1
C
L
K
CPU Bus
Unit No.
05
CPU Bus
Unit No.
03
02
PLC #3 Routing Table
(Local network table)
Local
No. network
1
010
2
030
3
CPU Bus
Unit No.
04
07
PLC #4 Routing Table
(Local network table)
Local
No. network
1
020
2
3
CPU Bus
Unit No.
00
PLC #5 Routing Table
(Local network table)
Local
No. network
1
020
2
3
CPU Bus
Unit No.
01
PLC #6 Routing Table
(Local network table)
Local
No. network
1
030
2
3
CPU Bus
Unit No.
05
PLC #7 Routing Table
(Local network table)
Local
No. network
1
030
2
3
CPU Bus
Unit No.
06
S
L
K
Unit #1
Node #2
PLC #2 Routing Table
(Local network table)
Local
No. network
1
010
2
020
3
ES
T L
NK
PLC
5
PLC #1 Routing Table
(Local network table)
Local
No. network
1
010
2
3
PLC
1
Network #10
Unit #4
PLC Node #5
Unit #7
3
Node #15
Network #30
S
L
K
PLC
6
Unit #5
Node #5
PLC
7
Unit #6
Node #10
(Relay network table)
End
No. network
1
020
030
2
3
Relay
network
010
010
Relay
node
004
005
(Relay network table)
End
No. network
1
030
2
3
Relay
network
010
Relay
node
005
(Relay network table)
End
No. network
1
020
2
3
Relay
network
010
Relay
node
004
(Relay network table)
End
No. network
1
010
030
2
3
Relay
network
020
020
Relay
node
003
003
(Relay network table)
End
No. network
1
010
2
030
3
Relay
network
020
020
Relay
node
003
003
(Relay network table)
End
No. network
1
010
020
2
3
Relay
network
030
030
Relay
node
015
015
(Relay network table)
End
No. network
1
010
020
2
3
Relay
network
030
030
Relay
node
015
015
127
Section 6-5
Using FINS Applications
6-5
Using FINS Applications
6-5-1
CX-Programmer (CX-Server)
The following examples show how to connect online from a CX-Programmer
on an Ethernet network to a PLC on the Ethernet network.
■
System Configuration Example 1: No Routing
In this example, an online connection is made by FINS/UDP to a PLC on an
Ethernet network (PLC1 in the diagram below) from a CX-Programmer or CXIntegrator connected to the Ethernet network.
Conditions
• FINS/UDP method
• IP address conversion: Automatic generation method (dynamic)
CX-Programmer or CX-Integrator
Node number: 1
IP address: 192.168.250.1
Ethernet Unit
IP address conversion: Automatic
generation method (dynamic)
Ethernet Unit node number: 2
Ethernet Unit IP address: 192.168.250.2
Ethernet port
Target: PLC1
Ethernet (Network address: None)
FINS/UDP method
CX-Programmer's Change PLC Dialog Box
Settings for target PLC (PLC1)'s Change PLC Dialog Box
PLC name
Network classification
Network Tab
FINS transmission source address
0
FINS destination
Network number 0
Node address
Driver Tab
128
Setting
PLC1
Ethernet
Frame length
2
2,000 bytes
Response monitor time
Workstation node address
2 seconds
1
Automatic generation method
IP address
Not selected
192.168.250.2
(Ethernet Unit IP
address)
Port number
9600
Section 6-5
Using FINS Applications
CX-Programmer's Unit Setup
Setup Tab
Item
Setting
Broadcast
All ones (4.3BSD)
FINS/UDP port
IP address
Default (9600)
0.0.0.0 (Use default IP address.)
Subnet mask
IP address conversion
0.0.0.0
Automatic generation method (dynamic)
Baud rate
IP router table
Automatic detection
None
Example: Inputs to the CX-Programmer's Setup Window
Example: Change PLC Settings
129
Section 6-5
Using FINS Applications
Example: Network Settings (Network Tab)
Note
When FinsGateway is selected as the network type, make sure that the frame
length is set to 2,000 bytes max.
Example: Network Settings (Driver Tab)
130
Section 6-5
Using FINS Applications
■
System Configuration Example 2: Using Routing Tables
In this example, an online connection is made via the Ethernet to a PLC on a
Controller Link network (PLC 3 below) from a CX-Programmer or CX-Integrator connected to the Ethernet network.
Conditions
• FINS/UDP method
• IP address conversion: Automatic generation method (dynamic)
Controller
Link Unit
Node address: 1
IP address: 192.168.250.1
CX-Programmer or CX-Integrator
Ethernet Unit
IP address conversion: Automatic generation method (dynamic)
Gateway between networks
PLC1
Ethernet Unit node address: 2
Ethernet Unit IP address: 192.168.250.2
Ethernet Unit unit number: 0
Controller Link Unit node address: 1
Controller Link Unit unit number: 1
Ethernet port
Ethernet (network address 1)
Controller Link Unit
Target PLC
Controller Link Unit
PLC3
PLC2
Routing
according to
routing table
Routing to final network address 2
requires relaying through node
address 2 of relay network address
1 (Ethernet Unit).
Node address 3
Node address 2
Controller Link (network address 2)
CX-Programmer's Change PLC Dialog Box
Settings for target PLC (PLC3)'s Change PLC Dialog Box
PLC name
Network classification
Network Tab
Driver Tab
FINS destination
Setting
PLC3
Ethernet
FINS transmission
source address
Network number
1
Node address
Frame length
3
2,000 bytes
Response monitor time
Workstation node address
2 seconds
1
Automatic generation method
IP address
Not selected
192.168.250.2
(Ethernet Unit IP
address)
Port number
9600
2
CX-Programmer's Unit Setup
Setup Tab
Same as for System Configuration Example 1.
Routing Table Settings and Transfer to Each PLC
Set the routing tables with CX-Integrator, and transfer them.
1. Using CX-Integrator, connect online, and select Routing table − Settings.
Then create FINS local routing tables (a local network table and a relay
network table).
Example: PLC 1 Routing Table Settings
131
Section 6-5
Using FINS Applications
• Local Network Table
Unit number
Local network number
0
1
1
2
• Relay Network Table
None
Example: PLC 2 and PLC 3 Routing Table Settings
• Local Network Table
Unit number
0
Local network number
2
• Relay Network Table
In order to relay from PLC2/3 to the final network number 1, it is necessary
to relay via node address 1 (i.e., the Controller Link Unit) on relay network
number 2.
Final network number
1
Relay network number
Relay node address
2
1
2. Save the routing table file (File - Save local routing table file).
3. Select New from the Project Menu, and save with a file name. Then select
Add Device from the Project Menu. For each PLC, register a PLC with a
direct serial connection (node address: 0), and select it.
4. With CX-Integrator, select Open from the PLC Menu.
5. Select Routing table − Setup, read the saved file, and select Options −
Transfer to PLC. Click Yes to transfer the routing tables to the connected
PLCs.
6-5-2
FinsGateway
FinsGateway Ver. 2003 must be used to communicate using FINS/TCP
between applications serving as communications drivers and CS1W-ETN21
or CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Units.
FinsGateway Ver. 3.@ or lower versions can be used, however, when communicating by the FINS/UDP method only.
■
Overview of Setup Methods
1. Starting FinsGateway Settings
Select FinsGateway − FinsGateway Setup to start the FinsGateway Setup.
2. ETN_UNIT Driver Setup
1. Double-click on ETN_UNIT in the settings for the network and Unit. The following ETN_UNIT Properties Window will be displayed.
132
Section 6-5
Using FINS Applications
• Network Tab
• Network number
Set the network number for the personal computer
(Ethernet port).
• Local node address
Set the personal computer (Ethernet port) node
address (1 to 254) on the Ethernet network.
Set the unit number in decimal (16 to 31) for the personal computer (Ethernet port).
• Communication unit number
• Communication Unit Tab
• UDP port number
Set the local UDP port number for the personal computer (Ethernet port). The default is 9600.
• Priority Network Card
If multiple Network Cards are mounted at the personal
computer, select the Network Card that is to be given
priority.
• FINS - IP address conver- Set the IP address conversion method.
sion
133
Using FINS Applications
Section 6-5
• UDP Nodes Tab: Automatic Generation Method (Dynamic or Passive)
• UDP Nodes Tab: IP Address Table Method or Combined Method
Click the Add Button, and then set the IP address table in the following Ethernet Node Definition Dialog Box.
134
Section 6-5
Using FINS Applications
• Node address:
Set the remote FINS node address.
• IP address:
Set the remote IP address.
• TCP Nodes Tab
Click the Add Button, and then set the IP address table in the following Ethernet Node Definition Dialog Box.
135
Section 6-5
Using FINS Applications
• Node address:
• IP address:
Set the remote FINS node address.
Set the remote IP address.
• Destination port number:
Set the FINS/TCP port number for the remote node.
Normally the PLC's default setting of 9600 should be
specified.
• Keep-alive setting:
Sets the keep-alive function. Normally this should be
selected.
3. Starting FinsGateway ETN_UNIT Service
Select ETN_UNIT from Services under the Basic Tab in the FinsGateway
Setup Window, and then click the Start Button.
■
System Configuration Example 3: Connecting the CX-Programmer Online
Using the FINS/TCP Method
In this example, an online connection is made by FINS/TCP to a PLC on an
Ethernet network (PLC1 in the diagram below) from a CX-Programmer/CXIntegrator connected to the Ethernet network.
Conditions
• FINS/TCP method
CX-Programmer/CX-Integrator
Node number: 1
IP address: 192.168.250.1
FinsGateWay Version 2003
Ethernet port
Ethernet Unit
IP address conversion: Automatic generation method (dynamic)
Ethernet Unit node number: 2
Ethernet Unit IP address: 192.168.250.2
Target: PLC1
Ethernet (Network number: none)
FINS/TCP method
CX-Programmer's Change PLC Dialog Box
Settings for target PLC (PLC1)'s Change PLC Dialog Box
PLC name
Setting
PLC1
Network classification
Network Tab
FINS destination
FinsGateway
0
Network number
Node address
136
Frame length
2
2,000 bytes
Response monitor time
2 seconds
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
CX-Programmer's Unit Setup
Setup Tab
Item
Broadcast
Setting
All ones (4.3BSD)
FINS/TCP port
IP address
Default (9600)
0.0.0.0 (Use default IP address.)
Subnet mask
Baud rate
0.0.0.0
Automatic detection
IP router tables
None
FINS/TCP Tab
Not set. (All defaults are used.)
FinsGateway ETN_UNIT Setup
TCP Nodes Tab: Ethernet Node Definition Dialog Box
Item
6-6
Setting
Node address
IP address
2
192.168.250.2
Destination port number
Keep-alive setting
9600
Selected (yes)
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
FINS commands can be sent from the user’s ladder-diagram program in the
PLC by using the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions.
SEND(090): Writes I/O data from the local node to another node.
RECV(098): Reads I/O data from another node to the local node.
CMND(490): Issues FINS commands for controlling operations such as sending and receiving I/O memory data to and from other nodes, reading information regarding other nodes, and so on.
6-6-1
Communications Specifications
The following table shows the specifications for PLC communications using
the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions.
Item
Specifications
Destination
1:1
1:N
SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490) instructions
SEND(090), CMND(490) instructions (broadcasting)
Data length
SEND(090):
990 words (1,980 bytes) max.; broadcasting: 727 words (1,454
bytes)
RECV(098):
990 words (1,980 bytes) max.
CMND(490):
1,990 bytes max.; broadcasting: 1,462 bytes (after FINS command code)
137
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Note
Item
Data contents
Specifications
The following data is sent and received with the execution of
each instruction.
SEND(090):
Sends request for remote node to receive data, and receives
response data.
RECV(098):
Sends request for remote node to send data, and receives
response data.
CMND(490):
Sends any FINS command and receives response data.
Communications
port number
Response monitor time
Ports 0 to 7 (Eight transmissions can occur simultaneously.)
Number of retries
0 to 15 retries
0000:
2 s (default)
0001 to FFFF:
0.1 to 6,553.5 s in 0.1-s increments (specified by user)
1. The maximum data length is limited to 512 bytes for data exchange between the PLC and SYSMAC LINK Systems or the PLC and SYSMAC
BUS/2 Remote I/O Systems.
2. When broadcasting, do not require a response.
Use the FINS/UDP method for broadcasting.
6-6-2
PLC Communications Data Areas
The following table shows the I/O data areas involved when SEND(090) and
RECV(098) are used.
Area
Note
Range
CIO Area
Work Area
CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
W000 to W511
Holding Area
Auxiliary Area
H000 to H511
A000 to A959 (See note 1.)
Timer Area
Counter Area
T0000 to T4095
C0000 to C4095
DM Area
EM Area
D00000 to D32767
E00000 to E32767 (See note 2.)
1. Data cannot be written to words A000 to A447 in the Auxiliary Area.
2. A maximum of 13 banks in the EM Area can be used. For details regarding
the EM Area, refer to the operation manual for the PLC that is used.
138
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
6-6-3
Using SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)
Make the settings shown below when using the SEND(090), RECV(098), and
CMND(490) instructions in the user’s ladder-diagram program in the PC.
SEND(090)
The SEND(090) instruction sends the data in n number of words, starting from
the beginning word S at the local node, to the words starting from the beginning word D at the remote destination node (node address N).
15
S→
Destination node number N
0
15
D→
n
Local node
0
Number
of words
(n)
(@)SEND(90)
S
D
C
S: Local node beginning word
D: Destination beginning word
C: First word of control data (below)
15
15
0
C+3
C
10
0
15
11
0
8 7
11
8 7
0
0
0
Response
0: Required.
1: Not required.
Destination network number
00 (Hex):
Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
15
3
0
Number of retries
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
Communications port number: 0 to 7
Number of words (n)
0001 to 03DE (Hex): 1 to 990 words
C+1
8 7
0
C+2
C+4
Destination unit address
00 (Hex):
10 to 1F: (Hex):
E1 (Hex):
FE (Hex):
CPU Unit
Unit #0 to #15
Inner Board
Unit connected to network
Response monitor time
0000 (Hex): 2 s
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(in units of 0.1 s)
Destination node number N
00 to FE (Hex): 0 to 254
The same data can be broadcast to all nodes on the network by
setting the destination node number to FF (Hex).
The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet.
Note
The message service does not guarantee that a message will reach the destination node. A message may be lost during transmission due to factors such
as noise. To prevent this from occurring when using message services, it is
common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are
issued. With the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions, retry
processing is executed automatically by specifying the number of retries, so
specify a number other than 0.
139
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
RECV(098)
With the RECV(098) instruction, the data in m number of words, starting from
the beginning word S at the remote node (node address M) is received at the
words starting from the beginning word D at the local node.
Local node
15
D→
Remote node number N
0
0
15
S→
Number
of words
(m)
m
(@)RECV(98)
S
D
C
S: Remote node beginning word
D: Local beginning word
C: First word of control data (below)
15
15
0
C+3
C
10
0
15
11
0
8 7
15
11
8 7
0
0
0
Response
0: Required.
1: Not required.
Destination network number
00 (Hex):
Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
C+2
3
0
Number of retries
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
Communications port number: 0 to 7
Number of reception words (m)
0001 to 03DE (Hex): 1 to 990 words
C+1
8 7
0
C+ 4
Destination Unit address
00 (Hex):
CPU Unit
10 to 1F: (Hex): Unit #0 to #15
E1 (Hex):
Inner Board
FE (Hex):
Unit connected to network
Response monitor time
0000 (Hex): 2 s
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(in units of 0.1 s)
Remote node number M (send source)
00 to FE (Hex): 0 to 254
The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet.
Note
140
The message services function does not guarantee that a message will reach
the destination node. A message may be lost during transmission due to factors such as noise. In order to prevent this from occurring when using message services, it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which
instructions are issued. With the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)
instructions, retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the number of retries, so specify a number other than 0.
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
CMND(490)
The CMND(490) instruction sends n bytes of command data, starting from the
beginning word S at the local node, to the node at node address N. the data in
m number of words, starting from the beginning word S at the remote node
(node address M) is received at the words starting from the beginning word D
at the local node.
15
Local node
0
Destination node number N
S
Command
(S−1)
n
+−
2
Command
data: n
bytes
Interpretation
Response
D
(D−1)
m
+−
2
Execution
Response
data: m
bytes
(@)CMND(490)
S
S: Beginning command storage word
D
D: Beginning response storage word
C
C: First word of control data (below)
15
0
C
Number of bytes of command data (n)
0000 to 07C6 (Hex): 1 to 1,990 bytes
15
0
C+1
Number of bytes of response data (m)
0000 to 07C6 (Hex): 1 to 1,990 bytes
15
C+2
11
0
8 7
15
0
0
C+4
10
15
8 7
0
3
0
0
Number of retries
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
Communications port number: 0 to 7
Destination network number
00 (Hex):
Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
C+3
8 7
0
Response
0: Required.
1: Not required.
Destination Unit address
00 (Hex):
CPU Unit
15
10 to 1F: (Hex): Unit #0 to #15
C+5
E1 (Hex):
Inner Board
FE (Hex):
Unit connected to network
Destination node number N
00 to FE (Hex):
0 to 254
The same data can be broadcast to all nodes on the network by
setting the destination node number to FF (Hex).
10
8 7
3
0
Response monitor time
0000 (Hex): 2 s
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(in units of 0.1 s)
The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet.
Note
The message services function does not guarantee that a message will reach
the destination node. A message may be lost during transmission due to factors such as noise. In order to prevent this from occurring when using message services, it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which
instructions are issued. With the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)
instructions, retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the number of retries, so specify a number other than 0.
141
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Commands Addressed to CS/CJ-series CPU Units
The following table provides a list of FINS commands that can be processed
by a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit. For details, refer to the CS/CJ-series Programmable Controllers Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342).
For details on FINS commands that can be processed by the Ethernet Unit,
refer to SECTION 7 FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet Units.
Usage
I/O memory area
access
Command
code
MR
SR
Name
Function
01
01
MEMORY AREA READ
01
02
MEMORY AREA WRITE
01
03
MEMORY AREA FILL
01
04
MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ
01
05
MEMORY AREA TRANSFER
02
01
PARAMETER AREA READ
02
02
PARAMETER AREA WRITE
Writes the contents of consecutive
parameter area words.
02
03
PARAMETER AREA FILL (CLEAR)
Writes the same data to the specified
range of parameter area words.
03
03
06
07
PROGRAM AREA READ
PROGRAM AREA WRITE
Reads the UM (User Memory) area.
Writes to the UM (User Memory) area.
03
04
08
01
PROGRAM AREA CLEAR
RUN
04
02
STOP
Clears the UM (User Memory) area.
Changes the CPU Unit’s operating
mode to RUN or MONITOR.
Changes the CPU Unit’s operating
mode to PROGRAM.
Machine configura- 05
tion reading
05
01
02
CPU UNIT DATA READ
CONNECTION DATA READ
Status reading
06
01
CPU UNIT STATUS READ
06
20
CYCLE TIME READ
Reads the maximum, minimum, and
average cycle time.
07
01
CLOCK READ
07
02
CLOCK WRITE
Message display
09
20
MESSAGE READ/CLEAR
Access rights
0C
01
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE
Reads the present year, month, date,
minute, second, and day of the week.
Changes the present year, month, date,
minute, second, or day of the week.
Reads and clears messages, and reads
FAL/FALS messages.
Acquires the access right as long as no
other device holds it.
0C
02
ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE
Acquires the access right even if
another device already holds it.
0C
03
ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE
Releases the access right that has been
acquired.
21
21
01
02
ERROR CLEAR
ERROR LOG READ
Clears errors or error messages.
Reads the error log.
21
03
ERROR LOG POINTER CLEAR
Clears the error log pointer.
Parameter area
access
Program area
access
Operating mode
changes
Time data access
Error log
142
Reads the contents of consecutive I/O
memory area words.
Writes the contents of consecutive I/O
memory area words.
Writes the same data to the specified
range of I/O memory area words.
Reads the contents of specified nonconsecutive I/O memory area words.
Copies the contents of consecutive I/O
memory area words to another I/O
memory area.
Reads the contents of consecutive
parameter area words.
Reads CPU Unit data.
Reads the model numbers of the device
corresponding to addresses.
Reads the status of the CPU Unit.
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Usage
File memory
Debugging
6-6-4
Command
code
MR
SR
Name
Function
22
22
01
02
FILE NAME READ
SINGLE FILE READ
Reads file memory data.
Reads a specified length of file data
from a specified position within a single
file.
22
03
SINGLE FILE WRITE
Writes a specified length of file data
from a specified position within a single
file.
22
22
04
05
FILE MEMORY FORMAT
FILE DELETE
22
07
FILE COPY
Formats (initializes) the file memory.
Deletes specified files stored in the file
memory.
Copies files from one file memory to
another file memory in the same system.
Changes a file name.
22
08
FILE NAME CHANGE
22
0A
MEMORY AREA–FILE TRANSFER
22
0B
22
0C
PARAMETER AREA–FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the
parameter area and the file memory.
PROGRAM AREA–FILE TRANSFER
Transfers or compares data between the
UM (User Memory) area and the file
memory.
22
23
15
01
CREATE/DELETE DIRECTORY
FORCED SET/RESET
Creates or deletes a directory.
Force-sets or force-resets bits, or
releases force-set status.
23
02
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
Cancels all bits that have been force-set
or force-reset.
Transfers or compares data between the
I/O memory area and the file memory.
Writing Programs
Programs incorporating the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)
instructions are generally created using the Communications Port Enabled
Flag and the Communications Port Error Flag as input conditions. CS/CJseries CPU Units have eight communications ports. Only one instruction can
be executed at any given port at one time, however, so the program must not
overlap the use of any of the ports. A program example is provided below.
Communications port
Ethernet Unit
CPU Unit
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Instruction 3
Instruction 4
Instruction 5
Instruction 6
Instruction 7
Instruction 8
There are eight communications ports, so up to eight
communications instructions can be executed at a time. The
number of messages that can be sent or received with a
single CPU Bus Unit service, though, is not more than two
each for the CPU Unit to the Ethernet Unit and for the
Ethernet Unit to the CPU Unit.
143
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Communications
Port Enabled Flag
Execution
condition
C
KEEP(011) A
Input A remains ON from start to completion of communications instruction.
Operand,
control data
created with
@MOV and
@XFER.
Creates operand and control data in a given
area.
Reset B
A
Communications
instructions
@SEND
@RECV
@CMND
Executes communications instructions.
Communications
Port Enabled Flag
A
DIFU(013) B
Creates reset input. (Turns reset B ON
after execution of communications instruction.)
Communications
Port Error Flag
A
Send Error Flag display
(Retry can be executed.)
Execution
condition
Communications
Port Enabled Flag
Exclusive control so execution is not simultaneous.
A
KEEP(011) C
Use exclusive control so that no other communications instructions are started before execution of the
above communications instruction is complete.
Reset D
(Continued in same way.)
The execution status of the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions is always reflected by the communications flags (i.e., the Communications Port Enabled Flag and the Communications Port Error Flag). The CS/
CJ-series CPU Unit’s communications flags are allocated in the Auxiliary Area
as shown in the following table.
Flag name
Word
Note
144
Address
Bits
Contents
Communications Port A202
Enabled Flag
Bit 7: Port 7
Bit 6: Port 6
Bit 5: Port 5
Bit 4: Port 4
Bit 3: Port 3
Bit 2: Port 2
Bit 1: Port 1
Bit 0: Port 0
OFF: Execution enabled
(being executed)
ON: Execution disabled
(not being executed)
Communications Port A219
Error Flag
Bit 7: Port 7
Bit 6: Port 6
Bit 5: Port 5
Bit 4: Port 4
Bit 3: Port 3
Bit 2: Port 2
Bit 1: Port 1
Bit 0: Port 0
0: Normal completion
1: Abnormal completion
With CS/CJ-series PLCs, communications ports 0 to 7 are also used for executing the PCMR(260) (PROTOCOL MACRO) instruction, so these flags are
used in common for SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), and PCMR(260).
While PCMR(260) is being executed, SEND(090), RECV(098), and
CMND(490) cannot be executed at the same communications port.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Communications Port
Completion Codes
Section 6-6
The status of a SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instruction after
execution is reflected as a communications port completion code, in one word
(two bytes) of data as shown in the following table. (The value is 0000 during
instruction execution.) The recorded status is saved until execution of the next
instruction.
Word
A203
Contents
Communications Port 0 Completion Code
A204
A205
Communications Port 1 Completion Code
Communications Port 2 Completion Code
A206
A207
Communications Port 3 Completion Code
Communications Port 4 Completion Code
A208
A209
Communications Port 5 Completion Code
Communications Port 6 Completion Code
A210
Communications Port 7 Completion Code
The meanings of the communications port completion codes are the same as
those for FINS commands and responses. When CMND(490) is used, however, even if a FINS command has an abnormal completion, it will not be
reflected in the communications port completion code. For details, refer to
Communications Port Error Flag and Completion Codes for CMND(490)
below.
Bits 08 to 15 in the communications port completion code correspond to the
first byte of the response code, and bits 00 to 07 correspond to the second
byte. For details, refer to 8-4-7 Troubleshooting with Response Codes.
Communications Port Error Flag and Completion Codes CMND(490)
Errors that occur when CMND(490) is used generate a Communications Port
Error Flag and are recorded in a communications port completion code only in
the following cases:
• When a response timeout error has occurred.
• When the number of communications data bytes exceeds the maximum
value for the Unit (i.e., 2,000 bytes for the Ethernet Unit).
• When the actual number of response bytes is greater than the number of
reception bytes that has been set. (The response is not stored in this
case.)
Errors other than these are recorded in the response codes of the responses
stored from the beginning response storage word onwards. Be careful of
these, because there are no Communications Port Error Flags and they are
not recorded in a communications port completion code.
Timing of Communications Flag Changes
• The Communications Port Enabled Flag remains OFF during communications and turns ON when they are completed (regardless of whether or
not an error occurs).
• The Communications Port Error Flag retains its status until the next transmission or reception.
• The Communications Port Error Flag turns OFF with the execution of the
next communications instruction even if there was an abnormal completion.
145
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Example
1
0
Communications Port Enabled Flag
Communications instruction:
SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490)
Instruction 1
being executed.
Instruction 2
being executed.
Instruction 3
being executed.
0000
0000
0000
1
0
Communications Port Error Flag
Communications Port Completion Code
Completion
0000 (Normal completion)
146
0000 (Normal completion)
0202
(Unit address setting error)
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
6-6-5
Program Example
Execution
condition (See note.)
0000.00 A202.07 1200.02
S
KEEP
120000
R
When the Communications Port Enabled Flag for port 7
is ON, and RECV(098) is not being executed, the send
execution program will start when execution condition
CIO 0000.00 turns ON.
1200.01
1200.00
@MOV(21)
#000A
D00000
Input CIO 1200.00 remains ON from the start of
SEND(090) execution until completion.
Control Data Creation
Word
@MOV(21)
#0002
D00001
@MOV(21)
Contents
D00000 00
0A Number of send words = 10
D00001 00
02 Destination network number = 2
D00002 04
00 Destination node number = 4
D00003 07
05 Response required.
#0400
D00002
Meaning
Destination unit address = 0
Communications port No. used = 7
@MOV(21)
#0705
D00003
Number of retries = 5
D00004 00
64 Response monitor time = 10 s
@MOV(21)
#0064
D00004
Send Data Creation
@XFER(70)
#000A
Ten words of data from word CIO 0000 is
stored from D00010 onwards.
0000
D00010
@SEND(90)
D00010
D00020
Ten words of data from D00010 at the local node is
sent to D00020 onwards at network number 2, node
number 4, unit address 0 (the PLC).
D00000
1200.00
A202.07 (See note.)
DIFU(13)
120001
1200.00
Reset Input Creation
A219.07
121000
Send Error Display
(Continued on next page.)
147
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
(Continued from previous page.)
Execution
condition (See note.)
0000.01 A202.07 1200.00
S
KEEP
120002
When the Communications Port Enabled Flag for port 7
is ON, and SEND(090) is not being executed, the transmission execution program will start when execution
condition CIO 0000.01 turns ON.
R
1200.03
1200.02
@MOV(21)
#0010
D00005
Input CIO 1200.02 remains ON from the start of
RECV(098) execution until completion.
Control Data Creation
Word
@MOV(21)
Contents
Meaning
#0003
D00005 00
10 Number of reception words = 16
D00006
D00006 00
03 Source network number = 3
D00007 20
00 Source node number = 32
Source unit address = 0
D00008 07
05 Response required.
Communications port No. used = 7
@MOV(21)
#2000
D00007
@MOV(21)
Number of retries = 5
#0705
D00008
D00009 00
00 Response monitor time = Default
@MOV(21)
#0000
D00009
@RECV(98)
A100
A total of 16 words of data beginning from word A100
at network number 3, node number 32, unit address 0
(the PLC) is received at word CIO 2000 onwards of the
local node.
2000
D00005
1200.02 A202.07 (See note.)
Reset Input Creation
DIFU(13)
120003
1200.02 A219.07
121001
1200.02 1200.03 A219.07
Reception Error Display
Reception Data Processing
@XFER(70)
#0016
2000
If there is no reception processing completion error, the
16 words of data received from word CIO 2000 onwards is stored at D00040 onwards.
D00040
Note
1. With CS/CJ-series PLCs, the Communications Port Enabled Flags at bits
0 to 7 in word A202 turn OFF even when the PCMR(260) instruction is being executed using the ports corresponding to those flags.
2. Before using the sample program as is, confirm that the memory areas
(words and bits) used in the sample program are not already being used in
the user program o r by Special I/O Units.
148
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
6-6-6
Transmission Delays
The methods of computing the maximum time required from execution of the
SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions until processing is
completed are described in this section.
SEND(090)
The transmission delay for the SEND(090) instruction can be calculated using
the following equation, which is illustrated in the following diagram.
Max. delay =
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (local node)
+CPU Bus Unit service processing time (local node)
+Transmission processing time
+Transmission Delays
+Reception processing time
+CPU Bus Unit service cycle (remote node)
+CPU Bus Unit service processing time (remote node)
SEND(090) executed
in user program
CPU Bus Unit
service cycle (local node)
CPU Bus Unit service
processing time (local node)
Transmission processing time
Transmission Delays
Reception processing time
CPU Bus Unit
service cycle (remote node)
CPU Bus Unit service
processing time (remote node)
CPU data set
processing time (remote node)
Maximum transmission delay
CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle (Local Node)
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit:
CPU execution mode
Normal Mode
Priority peripheral servicing
Parallel processing with
synchronous memory
access
Parallel processing with
asynchronous memory
access
Processing time considerations
CPU Unit cycle time
0.2 ms + peripheral servicing time (1 ms max. of peripheral
servicing time for each Special I/O Unit, CPU Bus Unit,
peripheral port, RS-232C port, and Inner Board)
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
149
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time (Local Node)
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit:
CPU execution mode
Normal Mode
Priority peripheral servicing
Parallel processing with synchronous memory access
Parallel processing with asynchronous memory access
Processing time considerations
Set time for peripheral servicing
(Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time)
1 ms max.
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
Transmission Processing Time
Number of words sent x 0.002 + 0.550 ms
Transmission Delay
The transmission delay time will be as given below, depending on the baud
rate set for the Ethernet Unit. (There may be additional delays depending on
devices, such as hubs, in the network configuration.)
Baud rate
100Base-TX
10Base-T
Delay time
Number of words sent × 0.0013 + 0.0118 ms
Number of words sent × 0.0019 + 0.0157 ms
Reception Processing Time
Number of words sent × 0.003 + 0.704 ms
CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle (Remote Node)
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit.
CPU processing
mode settings
Normal Mode
Processing time considerations
CPU Unit cycle time
Priority peripheral servicing
Ethernet Unit is given
priority.
Ethernet Unit is not
given priority.
Parallel processing with CPU Unit cycle time
synchronous memory
access
Time slice instruction execution
time
CPU Unit cycle time
Parallel processing with 0.2 ms + peripheral servicing time (1 ms max. of peripheral
asynchronous memory servicing time for each Special I/O Unit, CPU Bus Unit,
access
peripheral port, RS-232C port, or Inner Board)
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
150
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time (Remote Node)
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit.
CPU processing mode
settings
Processing time considerations
Normal Mode
Set peripheral servicing time
Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time
Priority peripheral servicing
Ethernet Unit is given
priority.
Ethernet Unit is not
given priority.
Time slice peripheral servicing
execution time
Set peripheral servicing time
(Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle
time)
Parallel processing with syn- Set peripheral servicing time
chronous memory access
(Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time)
Parallel processing with
1 ms max.
asynchronous memory
access
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
Note
The actual operating environment can cause transmission delays larger than
those calculated with the methods given here. Among the causes of longer
delays are the following: traffic on the network, window sizes at network
nodes, traffic through the Ethernet Unit (e.g., socket servicing, FTP server
communications, etc.), and the system configuration.
Example Calculations
The following example shows calculations for sending 256 words between two
PLC nodes using SEND(090). Calculations are shown in the following table.
Conditions
Local node CPU cycle time: 10 ms
Local node CPU execution mode: Normal
Local node CPU uniform peripheral servicing time: Default (4%)
Remote node CPU cycle time: 5 ms
Remote node CPU execution mode: Normal
Remote node CPU peripheral servicing time: Default (4%)
Baud rate: 100Base-TX
Item
Calculation
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (local node)
CPU Bus Unit service processing time
(local node)
Transmission processing time
10 ms
0.4 ms
Transmission delay
256 × 0.0013 + 0.0118 = 0.3446 ≈
0.3 ms
Reception processing time
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (remote node)
256 × 0.003 + 0.704 = 1.472 ≈ 1.5 ms
5 ms
CPU Bus Unit service processing time
(remote node)
Total
0.2 ms
256 × 0.002 + 0.550 = 1.062 ≈ 1.1 ms
10 + 0.4 + 1.1 + 0.3 + 1.5 + 5 + 0.2 =
18.5 ms
151
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
RECV(098)
The transmission delay for the RECV(098) instruction can be calculated using
the equation illustrated in the following diagram.
RECV(098) executed in user program
CPU Bus Unit
Service Cycle (local node 2)
CPU Bus Unit
Service Cycle (local node)
CPU Bus Unit
service processing time
(local node 2)
CPU Bus Unit
service processing time (local node)
Reception
processing time (response)
Transmission
processing time (command)
CPU data set
processing time
Transmission Delays
(response)
Transmission Delays
(command)
Transmission
processing time (response)
Reception processing
time (command)
CPU Bus Unit
service processing time (remote node)
CPU Bus Unit
Service Cycle (remote node)
Maximum transmission delay
Maximum transmission delay time
CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle (local node 1)
+ CPU Bus Unit service processing time (local node
1)
+ Transmission processing time (command)
+ Transmission delay (command)
+ Reception processing time (command)
+ CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle (remote node)
+ CPU Bus Unit service processing time (remote
node)
+ Transmission processing time (response)
+ Transmission Delays (response)
+ Reception processing time (response)
+ CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle (local node 2)
+ CPU Bus Unit service processing time (local node
2)
CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle (Local Node 1)
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit:
CPU processing mode
settings
Normal Mode
Priority peripheral servicing
Processing time considerations
CPU Unit cycle time
Parallel processing with syn- 0.2 ms + peripheral servicing time (1 ms max. of peripheral serchronous memory access
vicing time for each Special I/O Unit, CPU Bus Unit, peripheral
port, RS-232C port, or Inner Board)
Parallel processing with
asynchronous memory
access
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
152
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time (Local Node 1)
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit:
CPU processing mode
settings
Normal Mode
Processing time considerations
Set peripheral servicing time
(Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time)
Priority peripheral servicing
Parallel processing with syn- 1 ms max.
chronous memory access
Parallel processing with
asynchronous memory
access
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
Transmission processing time (command)
Command
0.550 ms
Response
Number of words sent × 0.002 + 0.550 ms
Transmission Delay (Command)
The transmission delay time will be as follows, depending on the baud rate set
for the Ethernet Unit. (There may be additional delays depending on devices
such as hubs in the network configuration.)
Baud rate
Delay time
100Base-TX
Command
Response
0.0118 ms
Number of words sent × 0.0013 + 0.0118 ms
10Base-T
Command
0.0157 ms
Response
Number of words sent × 0.0019 + 0.0157 ms
Reception processing time (command)
Command
Response
0.704ms
Number of words sent × 0.003 + 0.704 ms
CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle (Remote Node)
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit.
CPU processing mode
settings
Normal Mode
Priority peripheral servicing
Processing time considerations
CPU Unit cycle time
Ethernet Unit is
given priority.
Ethernet Unit is not
given priority.
Time slice instruction execution time
CPU Unit cycle time
Parallel processing with syn- CPU Unit cycle time
chronous memory access
Parallel processing with
asynchronous memory
access
0.2 ms + peripheral servicing time (1 ms max. of peripheral servicing time for each Special I/O Unit, CPU Bus Unit, peripheral
port, RS-232C port, or Inner Board)
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
153
Section 6-6
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
CPU Bus Unit service processing time (remote node)
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit.
CPU processing mode
settings
Normal Mode
Priority peripheral servicing
Processing time considerations
4% of CPU Unit cycle time
Ethernet Unit is
given priority.
Time slice peripheral servicing execution
time
Ethernet Unit is not
given priority.
Set peripheral servicing time
(Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time)
Parallel processing with syn- 4% of CPU Unit cycle time
chronous memory access
Parallel processing with
1 ms max.
asynchronous memory
access
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle (Local Node 2)
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit.
CPU processing mode
settings
Normal Mode
Processing time considerations
CPU Unit cycle time
Priority peripheral servicing
Ethernet Unit is
Time slice instruction execution time
given priority.
Ethernet Unit is not CPU Unit cycle time
given priority.
Parallel processing with syn- CPU Unit cycle time
chronous memory access
Parallel processing with
0.2 ms + peripheral servicing time (1 ms max. of peripheral serasynchronous memory
vicing time for each Special I/O Unit, CPU Bus Unit, peripheral
access
port, RS-232C port, or Inner Board)
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time (Local Node 2)
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit.
CPU processing mode
settings
Processing time considerations
Normal Mode
Priority peripheral servicing
4% of CPU Unit cycle time
Ethernet Unit is
Time slice peripheral servicing execution
given priority.
time
Ethernet Unit is not Set peripheral servicing time
given priority.
(Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time)
Parallel processing with syn- 4% of CPU Unit cycle time
chronous memory access
Parallel processing with
asynchronous memory
access
1 ms max.
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
Note
154
The actual operating environment can cause transmission delays larger than
those calculated with the methods given here. Among the causes of longer
delays are the following: traffic on the network, window sizes at network
Section 6-7
Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications
nodes, traffic through the Ethernet Unit (e.g., socket servicing, FTP server
communications, etc.), and the system configuration.
Example Calculations
The following example shows calculations for receiving 256 words between
two PLC nodes using RECV(098). Calculations are shown in the following
table:
Conditions
Local node CPU cycle time:
10 ms
Local node CPU processing mode:
Normal
Local node CPU uniform peripheral servicing time:
Default (4%)
Remote node CPU cycle time:
15 ms
Remote node CPU processing mode:
Normal
Remote node CPU uniform peripheral servicing time: Default (4%)
Baud rate:
100Base-TX
Item
Calculations
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (local node 1)
10 ms
CPU Bus Unit service processing time (local node 1) 0.4 ms
Transmission processing time (command)
Transmission delay (command)
0.550 ms ≈ 0.5 ms
0.0118 ms ≈ 0.1 ms
Reception processing time (command)
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (remote node)
0.704 ms ≈ 0.7 ms
15 ms
CPU Bus Unit service processing time (remote node) 0.6 ms
Transmission processing time (response)
256 × 0.002 + 0.550 = 1.062 ≈ 1.1 ms
Transmission delay (response)
Reception processing time (response)
256 × 0.0013 + 0.0118 = 0.3446 ≈ 0.3 ms
256 × 0.003 + 0.704 = 1.472 ≈ 1.5 ms
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (local node 2)
10 ms
CPU Bus Unit service processing time (local node 2) 0.4 ms
Total
6-7
10 + 0.4 + 0.5 + 0.1 + 0.7 + 15 + 0.6 + 1.1 + 0.3
+ 1.5 + 10 + 0.4 = 40.6 ms
Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications
When applications are constructed using FINS communications services,
communications errors (from multiple response timeouts) may occasionally
occur due to high traffic, depending on the system configuration and the application programs. This section describes precautions for systems with high
traffic in FINS communications.
■
Conditions for High Traffic
High traffic may occur if FINS messages from multiple communicating nodes
are concentrated at a single Ethernet Unit. The Ethernet Unit and the CPU
Unit may have insufficient processing capacity for the volume of FINS messages (commands) that are coming from the network.
155
Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications
Section 6-7
For example, suppose that approximately 20 ms are required to process a single FINS frame (i.e., 20 ms from the time that the command is received at the
Ethernet Unit until a response is sent). If 100 or more FINS frames (commands) are received at once from multiple communicating nodes, it will take
approximately 2 seconds to send a response to the last command. If a timeout is set at the remote node for 2 seconds or less, then a timeout will be generated. A retry will begin due to the timeout, and the traffic to the Ethernet Unit
will thus be increased even further, until ultimately the responses to all the
nodes will be too slow. At this point, the system is overloaded.
■
Avoiding Errors due to High Traffic
To avoid high traffic from FINS communications, the communications load
must be kept down to a reasonable level. To accomplish this, follow the procedure below.
1. Specify the node where FINS frames seem to be concentrated.
2. Referring to 6-6-6 Transmission Delays, estimate the total processing time
for all of the FINS frames processed at that node.
3. Set the timeout value for all of the SEND(090), RECV(098), and
CMND(490) FINS commands at all the remote nodes to at least 1.5 times
the total processing time for all of the FINS frames.
4. As much as possible, implement communications traffic testing up to the
point of actual system operation. If any problem occurs, adjust the traffic.
5. If a commercially-available protocol analyzer can be used, then the actual
FINS frame processing time (i.e., the time from when a command is received at the Ethernet Unit until a response is sent) can be measured under high traffic conditions and the communications traffic can be further
adjusted as required.
156
SECTION 7
FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet Units
This section describes the FINS commands that can be sent to an Ethernet Unit and the responses that are returned by the
Ethernet Unit.
7-1
7-2
7-3
Command Codes and Response Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
7-1-1
Command Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
7-1-2
Response Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
Socket Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
7-2-1
Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
7-2-2
PLC Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160
Command/Response Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
7-3-1
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
7-3-2
CONTROLLER DATA READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
7-3-3
CONTROLLER STATUS READ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
7-3-4
INTERNODE ECHO TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
165
7-3-5
BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
7-3-6
BROADCAST DATA SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
7-3-7
ERROR LOG READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
7-3-8
ERROR LOG CLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168
7-3-9
UDP OPEN REQUEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
7-3-10 UDP RECEIVE REQUEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
7-3-11 UDP SEND REQUEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
7-3-12 UDP CLOSE REQUEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
7-3-13 PASSIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
7-3-14 ACTIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
7-3-15 TCP RECEIVE REQUEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
180
7-3-16 TCP SEND REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
7-3-17 TCP CLOSE REQUEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183
7-3-18 PING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
7-3-19 FINS/TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST
185
7-3-20 FINS/TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
7-3-21 IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
187
7-3-22 IP ADDRESS WRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
7-3-23 IP ADDRESS TABLE READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
7-3-24 IP ROUTER TABLE READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
7-3-25 PROTOCOL STATUS READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
192
7-3-26 MEMORY STATUS READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
196
7-3-27 SOCKET STATUS READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
198
7-3-28 ADDRESS INFORMATION READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
199
7-3-29 IP ADDRESS READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200
157
Section 7-1
Command Codes and Response Codes
7-1
7-1-1
Command Codes and Response Codes
Command Code List
The command codes listed in the following table can be sent to an Ethernet
Unit.
Command code
MRC
SRC
7-1-2
Name
Page
04
03
RESET
161
05
06
01
01
CONTROLLER DATA READ
CONTROLLER STATUS READ
162
163
08
01
02
INTERNODE ECHO TEST
BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ
165
166
21
03
02
BROADCAST DATA SEND
ERROR LOG READ
166
167
27
03
01
ERROR LOG CLEAR
UDP OPEN REQUEST
168
169
02
03
UDP RECEIVE REQUEST
UDP SEND REQUEST
170
172
04
10
UDP CLOSE REQUEST
PASSIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST
173
174
11
12
ACTIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST
TCP RECEIVE REQUEST
177
180
13
14
TCP SEND REQUEST
TCP CLOSE REQUEST
181
183
20
30
PING
FINS/TCP CONNECTION REMOTE
NODE CHANGE REQUEST
184
185
31
FINS/TCP CONNECTION STATUS
READ
186
50
57
IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE
IP ADDRESS WRITE (CJ Series only)
187
189
60
61
IP ADDRESS TABLE READ
IP ROUTER TABLE READ
189
191
62
63
PROTOCOL STATUS READ
MEMORY STATUS READ
192
196
64
65
SOCKET STATUS READ
ADDRESS INFORMATION READ
198
199
67
IP ADDRESS READ
200
Response Code List
Response codes are 2-byte codes which indicate the results of command
execution. They are returned in the response following the command code.
The first byte of a response code is the MRES (main response code), which
categorizes the results of command execution. The second byte is the SRES
(sub-response code) which specifies the results.
Command Response
code
code
MRC SRC MRES SRES
158
MRC:
SRC:
MRES:
SRES:
Main request code
Sub-request code
Main response code
Sub-response code
Section 7-2
Socket Applications
The MRES codes are shown in the following table along with the results they
indicate. Refer to 8-4-7 Troubleshooting with Response Codes for details on
response codes including the SRES.
7-2
MRES
00
Execution results
Normal completion
01
02
Local node error
Remote node error
03
04
Unit error (controller error)
Service not supported
05
10
Routing error
Command format error
11
22
Parameter error
Status error
23
25
Operating environment error
Unit error
Socket Applications
The format of the following FINS commands partially differs when the sockets
are used.
Command code
MRC
SRC
27
7-2-1
Name
Page
01
02
UDP OPEN REQUEST
UDP RECEIVE REQUEST
169
170
03
04
UDP SEND REQUEST
UDP CLOSE REQUEST
172
173
10
11
PASSIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST
ACTIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST
174
177
12
13
TCP RECEIVE REQUEST
TCP SEND REQUEST
180
181
14
TCP CLOSE REQUEST
183
Format
The basic format of these commands is shown in the diagram below.
0
1
Command
code
2
3
4
5
6
7
Results storage area
8
9
10
11
12
Number of bytes from
the beginning of the frame
Parameters
Socket number
Socket option
Command Code
Specifies the requested process.
Socket Option
For the TCP OPEN REQUEST (ACTIVE or PASSIVE), specifies whether or
not the keep-alive function is to be used. For all other commands it is disabled. (Set to 0).
Socket Number
Specifies the socket number for which the process is requested, from 1 to 8.
Results Storage Area
Specifies the area to store the results of the requested process.
159
Section 7-2
Socket Applications
Parameters
7-2-2
Specifies the parameters for the command code. Parameters depend on the
command being executed; for details, refer to the following pages.
PLC Memory Areas
The memory areas of the PLC that can be specified for results storage when
executing commands from the PC are listed in the table below. The Variable
type is set in the first byte of the results storage area. The remaining three
bytes contain the address for communications.
Addresses in the Addresses for communications column are not the same as
the actual memory addresses.
Memory
area
Bit Areas
DM Area
EM Area
Data type
Current
value of
word
CIO
CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
Addresses for
communications
000000 to 17FF00
HR
AR
H000 to H511
A448 to A959
000000 to 01FF00
01C000 to 03BF00
B2
B3
DM
Bank 0
D00000 to D32767
E0_E00000 to E0_E32767
000000 to 7FFF00
000000 to 7FFF00
82
A0 (90)*
Bank 1
E1_E00000 to E1_E32767
000000 to 7FFF00
A1 (91)*
Bank 2
Bank 3
E2_E00000 to E2_E32767
E3_E00000 to E3_E32767
000000 to 7FFF00
000000 to 7FFF00
A2 (92)*
A3 (93)*
Bank 4
Bank 5
E4_E00000 to E4_E32767
E5_E00000 to E5_E32767
000000 to 7FFF00
000000 to 7FFF00
A4 (94)*
A5 (95)*
Bank 6
Bank 7
E6_E00000 to E6_E32767
E7_E00000 to E7_E32767
000000 to 7FFF00
000000 to 7FFF00
A6 (96)*
A7 (97)*
Bank 8
Bank 9
E8_E00000 to E8_E32767
E9_E00000 to E9_E32767
000000 to 7FFF00
000000 to 7FFF00
A8
A9
2
2
Bank A
Bank B
EA_E00000 to EA_E32767
EB_E00000 to EB_E32767
000000 to 7FFF00
000000 to 7FFF00
AA
AB
2
2
Bank C
Current bank
EC_E00000 to EC_E32767
E00000 to E32767
000000 to 7FFF00
000000 to 7FFF00
AC
98
2
2
Note
Word and Bit Addresses
Word addresses
Variable Bytes
type
B0 (80)* 2
2
2
The variable types (area designations) given in parentheses can also be
used, allowing CV-series or CVM1 programs to be more easily corrected for
use with CS/CJ-series PLCs.
Three bytes of data are used to express data memory addresses of PLCs.
The most significant two bytes give the word address and the least significant
byte gives the bit number between 00 and 15.
The word address combined with the bit number expresses the bit address.
The bit number is always 00 because Ethernet Units can handle only word
data, i.e., individual bits cannot be addressed.
Specifies the bit position between 00 and 0F (0 to 15) for bit data.
Specifies the address of the corresponding word.
Variable type
Word addresses for specific memory area words can be calculated by converting the normal decimal word address to hexadecimal and adding it to the
first word in the Addresses for communications column in the above table. For
example, the address for communications for D00200 would be 0000 (from
above table) plus C8 (decimal 200 converted to hexadecimal), or 00C8.
160
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
7-3
Command/Response Reference
This section describes the FINS commands that can be sent to Ethernet Units
and the responses to each command.
The command, response, and (where applicable) the results storage blocks
are given with the commands in graphic form as shown in the following diagram. If the data is fixed, it is included in the blocks. If the data is variable, it is
described following the blocks. Each box represents 1 byte; every two boxes
represents 1 word. The following diagram shows 2 bytes, or 1 word.
Two bytes
The results storage format is the format used to store transfer results and data
for socket services requested with command codes 2701 to 2714.
Response codes applicable to the command are described at the end of the
command description. If any UNIX error codes are generated, these are also
described. Refer to your UNIX error symbol definition file /usr/include/sys/
errno.h for details. UNIX errors are returned in the results storage area.
Note
7-3-1
Except for special cases, all send/receive data is in hexadecimal format.
RESET
Reset the Ethernet Unit.
Command Block
04 03
Command code
Response Block
04 03
Command
code
Response
code
Precautions
No response will be returned if the command ends normally. A response will
be returned only if an error occurs.
In some cases, send requests (SEND(192)/RECV(193) instructions) made
from the PLC to the Ethernet Unit just before execution of the RESET command may not be executed.
Except for the FINS communications service sockets, all open sockets (for
sockets services, FTP server, or mail transmission) are closed immediately
before resetting.
Response Codes
Response code
1001
Description
Command too large
161
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
7-3-2
CONTROLLER DATA READ
Reads the following data from the Ethernet model, version, IP address, subnet mask, FINS UDP port number, mode settings, Ethernet address.
Command Block
05 01
Command code
Response Block
05 01
Command
code
Response
code
20 byte
20 byte
4 byte
4 byte
Model
Version
IP address
Subnet
mask
6 byte
FINS UDP
port number
Mode
setting
Ethernet address
Parameters
Model, Version
(Response)
The Ethernet Unit mode and version are returned as ASCII characters occupying 20 bytes each (i.e., 20 characters each). If all bytes are not used, the
remaining bytes will be all spaces (ASCII 20 Hex).
Example Model:
Version:
CS1W-ETN21, CJ1W-ETN21
V1.50
IP Address, Subnet Mask
(Response)
The Ethernet Unit’s IP address and subnet mask are returned as 4 bytes
each.
FINS UDP Port Number
(Response)
The Ethernet Unit’s UDP port number for FINS is returned as 2 bytes.
Mode Setting (Response)
The mode setting in the system setup is returned.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
0
0
System setup format
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit
0
Broadcast address setting
IP address conversion method
UDP port No. setting for FINS
TCP port No. setting for FINS/TCP
Transmission speed setting
SNTP server specification method
SMTP server specification method
POP server specification method
Broadcast Address Setting
0: Broadcast with host number set to all ones (4.3BSD specifications)
1: Broadcast with host number set to all zeroes (4.2BSD specifications)
IP Address Conversion Method Setting
00, 01: Automatic generation method
10: IP address table reference method
11: Combined method (IP address table reference + automatic generation)
FINS/UDP Port Number Setting
0: Default (9600)
1: Unit Setup value
162
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
FFINS/TCP Port Number Setting
0: Default (9600)
1: Unit Setup value
Baud Rate setting
0: Automatic detection
1: 10Base-T
SNTP Server Specification Method
0: IP address
1: Host name
SMTP Server Specification Method
0: IP address
1: Host name
POP Server Specification Method
0: IP address
1: Host name
System Setup Format
Bit address
14
13
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
Format classification
12
0
1
Other
Ethernet Address
(Response)
ETN11 mode
ETN21 mode
Reserved
The Ethernet address of the Ethernet Unit is returned. The Ethernet address
is the address marked on the label on the side of the Ethernet Unit.
Response Codes
7-3-3
Response code
0000
Normal
Description
1001
Command too large
CONTROLLER STATUS READ
Reads the controller status.
Command Block
06 01
Command code
Response Block
06 01
Command
code
2 byte
Response
code
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
Error flags Total number
Total number Total number Total number Total number
of
of
of
of
of
errors sent send collisions
packets received receive errors packets sent
163
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Parameters
Error Flags (Response)
15
14
13
12
Indicates the operating status and errors that occurred when the Ethernet Unit
was started.
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 02: IP address error
Bit 03: IP address table error
Bit 04: IP router table error
Bit 05: DNS server error
Bit 06: Routing table error
Bit 11: SNTP server error
Bit 12: SMTP server error
Bit 13: POP server error
Bit 14: Address disagreement
Bit 15: EEPROM error
The cause of each error is listed below.
IP Address Error
All bits for the network number or host number are set to 0 or 1.
IP Address Table Error
More than 32 records exist in the IP address table.
IP Router Table Error
More than 8 records exist in an IP router table.
DNS Server Error
• There is an error in the IP address setting for the DNS server.
• A timeout was generated in communications with the DNS server.
Routing Table Error
Local network table contains 0 or more than 16 records.
Relay network table contains more than 20 records.
SNTP Server error
• There is an error in the setting for the SNTP server host specification (i.e.,
the IP address or the host name).
• A timeout was generated in communications with the SNTP server.
SMTP Server error
• There is an error in the setting for the SMTP server host specification (i.e.,
the IP address or the host name).
• A timeout was generated in communications with the SMTP server.
• The time for verification from the POP server elapsed (when POP before
SMTP was set).
POP Server Error
• There is an error in the setting for the POP server host specification (i.e.,
the IP address or the host name).
• An error occurred in the POP server verification (i.e., a user name or
password setting error).
• A timeout was generated in communications with the POP server.
164
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Address Disagreement
The address conversion method was set for automatic generation, but the
node address and the last byte of the local IP address do not agree, or other
host sections are 0.
EEPROM Error
An error occurred in the EEPROM memory in the Ethernet Unit.
Total Number of Packets
Received (Response)
The total number of packets received by the Ethernet Unit is returned.
Total Number of Receive
Errors (Response)
The total number of errors detected while the Ethernet Unit was receiving is
returned. The types of error detected are short packet errors, alignment
errors, CRC errors, frame length errors (received frame: 1,515 bytes or more),
and communications controller overflow errors.
Total Number of Packets
Sent (Response)
The total number of packets sent by the Ethernet Unit is returned.
Total Number of Errors
Sent (Response)
The total number of packet errors detected while the Ethernet Unit was sending is returned.
Total Number of Send
Collisions (Response)
The number of packets damaged by 16 collisions with data from other nodes
during Ethernet Unit transmissions.
Precautions
Counting of the total number of packets received, total number of receive
errors, total number of packets sent, total number of errors sent, and total
number of send collisions is discontinued when the counted value reaches the
maximum value.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
1001
7-3-4
Description
Normal
Command too large
INTERNODE ECHO TEST
Runs the echo test between specified nodes.
Command Block
08 01
1,998 bytes max.
Command
code
Test data
Response Block
1,998 bytes max.
08 01
Command
code
Response
code
Test data
165
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Parameters
Test Data (Command,
Response)
This command specifies the data to be sent to the specified nodes. Up to
1,998 bytes can be specified. The response sends back data identical to the
data specified in the command. An abnormality is assumed if the data
returned in the response differs from the test data sent.
Precautions
The test destination node is the destination node specified in the CMND(194)
instruction operands.
Always specify the unit address of the Ethernet Unit in the CMND(194)
instruction.
Response Codes
Response code
7-3-5
Description
0000
1001
Normal
Command too large
1002
Command too small (No test data)
BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ
Reads the results (number of times data received) of the broadcast test.
Command Block
08 02
Command
code
Response Block
08 02
Command
code
Response
code
Times
received
Parameters
Times Received
(Response)
The number of times the data has been received normally during the broadcast send test is returned as a hexadecimal number. The number of times
received is cleared each time the result is read.
Response Codes
7-3-6
Response code
0000
Normal
Description
1001
Command too large
BROADCAST DATA SEND
Sends test data simultaneously to all nodes on the network.
166
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Command Block
08 03
1,460 bytes max.
Command
code
Test data
Parameters
Test Data (Command)
This command specifies the data to be sent to the specified nodes. Up to
1,460 bytes can be specified.
Precautions
No response is made to this command.
When using this command, set the FINS header parameters (or the control
data for the CMND(194) instruction) as follows:
Destination node address:
Destination unit address:
Response/no response flag:
7-3-7
FF (broadcast data)
FE (Ethernet Unit)
1 (no response)
ERROR LOG READ
Reads the error log.
Command Block
21 02
Command
code
Beginning
record
number
Number
of
records
Response Block
21 02
Command
code
Response
code
Maximum
number
of stored
records
Number
of stored
records
Number
of
records
10 bytes
10 bytes
Error log data
Error log data
Parameters
Beginning Record Number
(Command)
The first record to be read. The first record number can be specified in the
range between 0000 and 003F (0 to 63 decimal) where 0000 is the oldest
record.
Number of Records
(Command, Response)
The number of records to read is specified between 0001 and 0040 (1 to 64
decimal) in the command. The response returns the actual number of records
read.
Maximum Number of
Stored Records
(Response)
The maximum number of records that can be stored in the error log. Care is
required as the error log differs according to the type of PC or CPU Bus Unit.
In an Ethernet Unit, the maximum number of stored records is fixed at 40 (64
decimal).
Number of Stored
Records (Response)
The number of records stored at the time the command is executed is
returned.
167
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Error Log Data
(Response)
The specified number of error log records from the beginning record number
is returned sequentially. The total number of bytes in the error log is calculated
as the number of records x 10 bytes/record. Each error log record thus comprises 10 bytes, configured as follows:
1st byte
Error code
10th byte
Detailed Minutes Second Day Hour Year Month
information
Error Code, Detailed Information
Details of the error stored in the record. Refer to 8-3-1 Error Log Error Codes
for details.
Minute, Second, Day, Hour, Year, Month
Indicate the time at which the error stored in the record occurred.
Precautions
If the error log contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parameter, all records stored in the error log at the time the
command is executed will be returned and the command executed will end
normally.
Response Codes
Response code
7-3-8
Description
0000
1001
Normal
Command too large
1002
1103
Command too small
Beginning record number is out of range
110C
The number of read records is 0.
ERROR LOG CLEAR
Clears the number of records stored in the Ethernet Unit error log.
Command Block
21 03
Command code
Response Block
21 03
Command
code
Response
code
Response Codes
168
Response code
0000
Description
Normal
1001
Command too large
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
7-3-9
UDP OPEN REQUEST
Requests processing to open a socket.
Command Block
27 01
Results storage area
Command code
Local UDP
port number
UDP socket number
Socket option
Response Block
27 01
Command
code
Response
code
Results Storage Format
Results storage
response code
Parameters
Socket Option (Command)
The socket option specified as 1 byte. The setting is not valid for this command. Set to 0.
UDP Socket Number
(Command)
The UDP socket number to be opened specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8.
Results Storage Area
(Command)
The area in which the results of the command execution are stored. The first
byte specifies the memory area and data type (variable type). The 2nd to 4th
bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area. Refer to
page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be specified.
Local UDP Port Number
(Command)
The UDP port number for communications with the socket is specified as 2
bytes (0 cannot be specified). Packets received at this port are distributed to
the socket specified in the UDP socket number, and send packets are distributed from the UDP socket to this port.
The following ports for the Ethernet Unit's communications services cannot be
specified.
• UDP port No. used for FINS (Default: 9600)
• UDP port No. used for DNS server access (Default: 53)
• UDP port No. used for SNTP server access (Default: 123)
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal
0105
0302
Local IP address setting error
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
1001
Command too large
169
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Response code
1002
1100
Description
Command too small.
1101
UDP socket number is out of range.
Local UDP port number is 0.
The variable type for the results storage area is out of range.
1103
220F
Non-zero bit address specified for the results storage area.
Specified socket is already open or is being closed.
2211
2240
High traffic at Unit; cannot execute service.
Socket service mode is incorrect; cannot execute service.
(With unit version 1.5 or later, the high-speed socket service
option was enabled and a socket service was used with a
CMND(490) instruction.)
Results Storage Area Response Codes
Response code
0000
003E
Description
Normal
Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high receive load
(ENOBUFS).
Duplicate UDP port number (EADDRINUSE).
0049
7-3-10 UDP RECEIVE REQUEST
Requests that data be sent from a UDP socket.
Command Block
27 02
Command
code
Results storage area
UDP socket number
Number
of reception
bytes
Timeout
value
Socket option
Response Block
27 02
Command
code
Response
code
Results Storage Format
Received bytes
Response
code
Source IP address
Source UDP
port number
Number of
reception
bytes
Received data
Parameters
Socket Option (Command)
The socket option specified as 1 byte. The setting is not valid for this command. Set to 0.
UDP Socket Number
(Command)
The UDP socket number to receive data specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8.
170
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Results Storage Area
(Command)
The area in which the results of the command execution are stored. The first
byte specifies the memory area and data type (variable type). The 2nd to 4th
bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area. Refer to
page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be specified.
Number of Reception
Bytes (Command, Results
Storage Area)
The maximum number of bytes of data to be received is given in the command. The number of bytes of data received will be stored in the results storage area. Up to 1,984 bytes can be specified.
Timeout Value
(Command)
The maximum control time between receiving the receive request and storing
the result. If this set time limit is exceeded, the code for a timeout error will be
set as the results storage response code. The value is set in units of 0.1 s.
The timeout time will be unlimited if the value is set to 0.
Source IP Address
(Results Storage Area)
The IP address of the node sending data is stored in hexadecimal.
Source UDP Port Number
(Results Storage Area)
The port number of the node sending data.
Received Data (Results
Storage Area)
The data sent from the remote node.
Precautions
If a packet is received which contains more bytes than the number specified in
Number of reception bytes specified in the command, the specified number of
bytes will be stored and the remainder of the bytes will be discarded.
Response Codes
Response code
Description
0000
0105
Normal
IP address setting error
0302
1001
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
Command too large
1002
1100
1101
Command too small
UDP socket number or number of reception bytes is out of
range.
The variable type for the results storage area is out of range.
1103
220F
Non-zero bit address specified for the results storage area.
The specified socket is currently receiving data.
2210
2211
The specified socket is not open.
High traffic at Unit; cannot execute service.
2240
Socket service mode is incorrect; cannot execute service.
(With unit version 1.5 or later, the high-speed socket service
option was enabled and a socket service was used with a
CMND(490) instruction.)
Results Storage Area Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal
003E
Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high reception load
(ENOBUFS).
0066
0080
Internal memory cannot be allocated; cannot execute service.
A receive request timeout error occurred.
0081
The specified socket was closed while receiving data.
171
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
7-3-11 UDP SEND REQUEST
Requests that data be received by a UDP socket.
Command Block
27 03
1984 bytes max.
Command
code
Results storage area
UDP socket number
Destination IP address Destination Number of
UDP
bytes sent
port number
Send data
Socket option
Response Block
27 03
Command
code
Response
code
Response
code
Number of
bytes sent
Results Storage Format
Parameters
Socket Option (Command)
The socket option specified as 1 byte. The setting is not valid for this command. Set to 0.
UDP Socket Number
(Command)
The UDP socket number to send the data specified as 1 byte between 1 and
8.
Results Storage Area
(Command)
The area in which the result of the command execution is stored. The first byte
specifies the memory area and data type (variable type). The 2nd to 4th bytes
specify the beginning address of the results storage area. Refer to page 160
for details about the variable types and addresses that can be specified.
Destination IP Address
(Command)
The IP address of the node to which data is being sent is specified in hexadecimal.
Destination UDP Port
Number (Command)
The UDP port number of the node to which data is being sent.
Number of Bytes Sent
(Command, Results
Storage Area)
The number of bytes in the data sent by this command. Up to 1,984 bytes can
be specified, or up to 1,472 bytes can be specified if the broadcast address is
specified as the send destination. The results storage area stores the actual
number of bytes sent.
Send Data (Command)
Specifies the data sent to the remote node.
Response Codes
Response code
172
Description
0000
0105
Normal
Local IP address setting error
0302
1001
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
Command too large
1002
Command too small
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Response code
1003
Description
The number of bytes sent does not match the sent data
length.
1100
1101
UDP socket number or number of bytes sent is out of range.
The destination IP address is 0.
Local UDP port number is 0.
The variable type for the results storage area is out of range.
1103
220F
Non-zero bit address specified for the results storage area.
Specified socket is currently sending.
2210
2211
The specified socket is not open.
High traffic at Unit; cannot execute service.
2240
Socket service mode is incorrect; cannot execute service.
(With unit version 1.5 or later, the high-speed socket service
option was enabled and a socket service was used with a
CMND(490) instruction.)
Results Storage Area Response Codes
Response code
0000
003E
Description
Normal
Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high reception load
(ENOBUFS).
The send destination IP address is a broadcast address and
the number of bytes sent exceeds 1,472. (EMSGSIZE)
Incorrect network number.
Incorrect destination IP address (EADDRNOTAVAIL).
0042
004C
004E
Incorrect destination IP address (ENETUNREACH).
No network number in IP router table.
Router incorrectly set.
Router incorrectly specified.
Incorrect destination IP address (EHOSTUNREACH).
0051
7-3-12 UDP CLOSE REQUEST
Requests processing to close a socket.
Command Block
27 04
Results storage area
Command
code
UDP socket number
Socket option
Response Block
27 04
Command
code
Response
code
Results Storage Format
Response code
173
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Parameters
Socket Option (Command)
The socket option specified as 1 byte. The setting is not valid for this command. Set to 0.
UDP Socket Number
(Command)
The UDP socket number to be closed specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8.
Results Storage Area
(Command)
The area in which the results of the command execution are stored. The first
byte specifies the memory area and data type (variable type). The 2nd to 4th
bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area. Refer to
page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be specified.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Normal
Description
0105
0302
Local IP address setting error
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
1001
1002
Command too large
Command too small
1100
1101
UDP socket number is out of range.
The variable type for the results storage area is out of range.
1103
2210
Non-zero bit address specified for the results storage area.
Specified socket is not open.
2211
2240
High traffic at Unit; cannot execute service.
Socket service mode is incorrect; cannot execute service.
(With unit version 1.5 or later, the high-speed socket service
option was enabled and a socket service was used with a
CMND(490) instruction.)
Results Storage Area Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal
7-3-13 PASSIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST
Requests processing to open a TCP socket. The socket will wait to be connected to another node.
Command Block
27 10
Command
code
Results storage area
TCP socket number
Socket option
Response Block
27 10
Command
code
174
Response
code
Local
TCP port
number
Timeout
value
Remote IP address
Remote TCP
port number
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Results Storage Format
Response
code
Remote IP address
Remote
port number
Parameters
Socket Option (Command)
The socket option is specified in one byte.
Bit 7
1
0
Keep-alive specification
0: Keep-alive disabled
1: Keep-alive enabled
Linger specification
0: TCP connection will be closed by sending FIN data to manage closing.
1: TCP connection will be closed immediately by sending RST data.
Note
(1) Starting with unit version 1.5, it is possible to specify the linger option.
(2) If the linger option is not specified and a TCP connection is closed, FIN
data will be sent and then approximately 1 minute will be used to confirm
the transmission and perform other closing management with the remote
node. Therefore, it may not be possible to immediately use TCP sockets
with the same port number.
(3) In contrast, when the linger option is specified, RST data will be sent
when TCP is closed, and closing will be performed immediately. This enables immediately opening TCP sockets with the same port number. Data
that was sent immediately before closing, however, is not checked for
transmission to the remote node. If the linger option is specified, ensure
the arrival of the send data in the application.
TCP Socket Number
(Command)
The TCP socket number to be opened specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8.
Results Storage Area
(Command)
The area in which the results of the command execution are stored. The first
byte specifies the memory area and data type (variable type). The 2nd to 4th
bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area. Refer to
page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be specified.
Local TCP Port Number
(Command)
The TCP port number for communications with the socket is specified as 2
bytes (0 cannot be specified).
The following ports used for the Ethernet Unit's communications services cannot be specified.
• TCP port No. used for FTP server (Default: 20, 21)
• TCP port No. used for DNS server access (Default: 53)
• TCP port No. used for SMTP server access (Default: 25)
• TCP port No. used for POP server access (Default: 110)
• TCP port No. used for HTTP server (Default: 80)
175
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Timeout Value (Command)
The maximum control time between receiving the open request and storing
the result. If this set time limit is exceeded, the code for a timeout error will be
set as the results storage response code. The value is set in units of 0.1 s.
The timeout time is unlimited if the value is set to 0.
Remote IP Address
(Command, Results
Storage Area)
Specify the remote node’s IP address. If all zeroes are set, no remote node is
specified and connection is awaited from any node. If any other value is set,
connection is awaited from the specified remote node. The IP address of the
connected remote node will be stored in the results storage area.
Remote Port Number
(Command, Results
Storage Area)
Specify the remote TCP port number with this command. If all zeroes are set,
no remote TCP port number is specified. If any other value is set, it specifies
the TCP port number of the remote node. The TCP port number of the connected remote node will be stored in the results storage area.
Precautions
Processing varies as shown in the table below according to the specified
combination of remote IP address and remote TCP port number.
Remote IP address
0
0
Remote TCP port
Description
All connection requests received
0
Not 0
Received only when port number
matches.
Not 0
0
Received only when IP address
matches.
Not 0
Not 0
Received only when IP address and
port number matches.
Response Codes
Response code
Description
0000
0105
Normal
Local IP address setting error
0302
1001
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
Command too large
1002
1100
Command too small
TCP socket number is out of range.
Local TCP port number is 0.
The variable type for the results storage area is out of range.
1101
1103
220F
Non-zero bit address specified for the results storage area.
The specified socket (connection) is already open or is currently being opened.
2211
2240
High traffic at Unit; cannot execute service.
Socket service mode is incorrect; cannot execute service.
(With unit version 1.5 or later, the high-speed socket service
option was enabled and a socket service was used with a
CMND(490) instruction.)
Results Storage Area Response Codes
Response code
0000
003E
0042 (see note)
0045
176
Description
Normal
Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high reception load
(ENOBUFS).
An error occurred (EMSGSIZE).
A communication error occurred with the remote node
(ECONNABORTED).
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Note
Response code
0049
Description
Duplicated port numbers (EADDRINUSE).
004A (see note)
004B (see note)
An error occurred (ECONNREFUSED).
A communication error occurred with the remote node
(ECONNRESET).
004E (see note)
A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address (ENETUNREACH).
0051 (see note)
A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address (EHOSTUNREACH).
0053
0066
A communication error occurred with the remote node
(ETIMEDOUT). No remote exists.
Internal memory cannot be allocated; cannot execute service.
0080
0081
An open request timeout error occurred.
Socket was closed during opening procedure.
0082
Connection could not be established with the specified
remote.
These errors occur only in large multilayered networks.
7-3-14 ACTIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST
Requests processing to open a TCP socket. The socket will be connected to
another node.
Command Block
27 11
Command
code
Results storage area
TCP socket number
Local TCP
port number
Remote IP
address
Remote TCP
port number
Socket option
Response Block
27 11
Command
code
Response
code
Results Storage Format
Response Local port
number
code
Parameters
Socket Option (Command)
The socket option is specified in one byte.
177
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Bit
1
0
Keep-alive specification
0: Keep-alive disabled
1: Keep-alive enabled
Linger specification
0: TCP connection will be closed by sending FIN data to manage closing.
1: TCP connection will be closed immediately by sending RST data.
Note
(1) Starting with unit version 1.5, it is possible to specify the linger option.
(2) If the linger option is not specified and a TCP connection is closed, FIN
data will be sent and then approximately 1 minute will be used to confirm
the transmission and perform other closing management with the remote
node. Therefore, it may not be possible to immediately use TCP sockets
with the same port number.
(3) In contrast, when the linger option is specified, RST data will be sent
when TCP is closed, and closing will be performed immediately. This enables immediately opening TCP sockets with the same port number. Data
that was sent immediately before closing, however, is not checked for
transmission to the remote node. If the linger option is specified, ensure
the arrival of the send data in the application.
TCP Socket Number
(Command)
The TCP socket number to be opened specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8.
Results Storage Area
(Command)
The area in which the results of the command execution are stored. The first
byte specifies the memory area and data type (variable type). The 2nd to 4th
bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area. Refer to
page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be specified.
Local TCP Port Number
(Command, Results
Storage Area)
The TCP port number for communications with the socket is specified as 2
bytes. An available TCP port number is automatically assigned if 0 is specified.
The TCP port numbers allocated to the open socket are stored in the Results
Storage Area.
The following ports used for the Ethernet Unit's communications services cannot be specified.
• TCP port No. used for FTP server (Default: 20, 21)
• TCP port No. used for DNS server access (Default: 53)
• TCP port No. used for SMTP server access (Default: 25)
• TCP port No. used for POP server access (Default: 110)
• TCP port No. used for HTTP server (Default: 80)
Remote IP Address
(Command)
Specify the remote node’s IP address (must be non-zero) in hexadecimal.
Remote Port Number
(Command)
Specify the remote TCP port number (must be non-zero).
178
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Normal
0105
0302
Local IP address setting error
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
1001
1002
Command too large
Command too small
1100
TCP socket number is out of range.
Remote IP address or the remote TCP port number is 0.
The variable type for the results storage area is out of range.
1101
1103
220F
2211
2240
Description
Non-zero bit address specified for the results storage area.
The specified socket (connection) is already open or is being
opened.
High traffic at Unit; cannot execute service.
Socket service mode is incorrect; cannot execute service.
(With unit version 1.5 or later, the high-speed socket service
option was enabled and a socket service was used with a
CMND(490) instruction.)
Results Storage Area Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal
000D
A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address
(EACCES).
003E
Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high receive load
(ENOBUFS).
0042 (see note)
0044
An error occurred (EMSGSIZE).
Received ICMP data (ENOPROTOOPT).
0045
0049
Local socket closed (ECONNABORTED).
Duplicated port numbers (EADDRINUSE).
004A
An error occurred (ECONNREFUSED).
Passive remote is not available.
004B (see note)
A communication error occurred with the remote node
(ECONNRESET).
A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address (EADDRNOTAVAIL).
A parameter was specified incorrectly.
An attempt was made to actively open local TCP port.
004C
004E
0051
A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address
(ENETUNREACH). No network number in IP router table or
incorrect router setting.
A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address
(EHOSTUNREACH). Incorrect router setting.
0053
A communication error occurred with the remote node
(ETIMEDOUT). No remote exists.
0081
Socket was closed during opening procedure.
Note These errors occur only in large multilayered networks.
179
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
7-3-15 TCP RECEIVE REQUEST
Requests that data be sent from a TCP socket.
Command Block
27 12
Command
code
Results storage area
Number of
reception bytes
Timeout
value
TCP socket number
Socket option
Response Block
27 12
Command
code
Response
code
Results Storage Format
Received bytes
Response Number of
code reception bytes
Received data
Parameters
Socket Option (Command)
The socket option specified as 1 byte. The setting is not valid for this command. Set to 0.
TCP Socket Number
(Command)
The TCP socket number to receive data specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8.
Results Storage Area
(Command)
The area in which the results of the command execution are stored. The first
byte specifies the memory area and data type (variable type). The 2nd to 4th
bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area. Refer to
page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be specified.
Number of Reception
Bytes (Command, Results
Storage Area)
The maximum number of bytes of data to be received is given in the command. The number of bytes of data received will be stored in the results storage area. Up to 1,984 bytes can be specified.
Timeout Value
(Command)
The maximum control time between receiving the receive request and storing
the result. If this set time limit is exceeded, the code for a timeout error will be
set as the results storage response code. The value is set in units of 0.1 s.
The timeout time is unlimited if the value is set to 0.
Received Data (Results
Storage Area)
Stores the received data.
180
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Normal
Description
0105
0302
Local IP address setting error
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
1001
1002
Command too large
Command too small
1100
1101
TCP socket number or number of reception bytes is out of
range.
The variable type for the results storage area is out of range.
1103
220F
Non-zero bit address specified for the results storage area.
The specified socket is receiving data.
2210
2211
No connection could be established to the specified socket.
High traffic at Unit; cannot execute service.
2240
Socket service mode is incorrect; cannot execute service.
(With unit version 1.5 or later, the high-speed socket service
option was enabled and a socket service was used with a
CMND(490) instruction.)
Results Storage Area Response Codes
Response code
Normal
Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high receive load
(ENOBUFS).
0042 (see note)
0044 (see note)
Received ICMP data (EMSGSIZE).
Received ICMP data (ENOPROTOOPT).
0045 (see note)
A communication error occurred with the remote node
(ECONNABORTED).
004B
A communication error occurred with the remote node
(ECONNRESET).
004E (see note)
Incorrect destination IP address (ENETUNREACH).
No network number in IP router table.
Router incorrectly set.
004F (see note)
0051 (see note)
0066
Received ICMP data (EHOSTDOWN).
Received ICMP data (EHOSTUNREACH).
Router incorrectly set.
A communications error occurred with the remote node
(ETIMEDOUT).
Internal memory cannot be allocated; cannot execute service.
0080
0081
A receive request timeout error occurred.
Socket was closed while receiving.
0053
Note
Description
0000
003E
These errors occur only in large multilayered networks.
7-3-16 TCP SEND REQUEST
Requests that data be received at a TCP socket.
181
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Command Block
27 13
1,984 bytes max.
Command
code
Results storage area
Number of
bytes sent
Data sent
TCP socket number
Socket option
Response Block
27 13
Command
code
Response
code
Results Storage Format
Response Number of
bytes sent
code
Parameters
Socket Option (Command)
The socket option specified as 1 byte. The setting is not valid for this command. Set to 0.
TCP Socket Number
(Command)
The TCP socket number to send the data specified as 1 byte between 1 and
8.
Results Storage Area
(Command)
The area in which the results of the command execution are stored. The first
byte specifies the memory area and data type (variable type). The 2nd to 4th
bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area. Refer to
page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be specified.
Number of Bytes Sent
(Command, Results
Storage Area)
The number of bytes in the data sent specified between 0 and 1,984. The
results storage area stores the actual number of bytes sent.
Data Sent (Command)
Specifies the data to be sent.
Response Codes
182
Response code
0000
Normal
Description
0105
0302
Local IP address setting error
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
1001
1002
Command too large
Command too small
1003
1100
1101
The number of bytes sent does not match the amount of data.
The TCP socket number or number of bytes sent is out of
range.
The variable type for the results storage area is out of range.
1103
220F
Non-zero bit address specified for the results storage area.
The specified socket is sending data.
2210
No connection could be established to the specified socket.
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Response code
2211
Description
High traffic at Unit; cannot execute service.
2240
Socket service mode is incorrect; cannot execute service.
(With unit version 1.5 or later, the high-speed socket service
option was enabled and a socket service was used with a
CMND(490) instruction.)
Results Storage Area Response Codes
Response code
0000
0020
003E
0042 (see note)
Note
Description
Normal
Connection to the remote socket was broken during transmission (EPIPE).
Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high receive load
(ENOBUFS).
An error occurred (EMSGSIZE).
0044 (see note)
0045 (see note)
Received ICMP data (ENOPROTOOPT).
A communication error occurred with the remote node
(ECONNABORTED).
004B (see note)
A communication error occurred with the remote node
(ECONNRESET).
004E (see note)
A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address
(ENETUNREACH).
004F (see note)
0051 (see note)
Received ICMP data (EHOSTDOWN).
A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address
(EHOSTUNREACH).
0053 (see note)
A communication error occurred with the remote node
(ETIMEDOUT).
0081
The specified socket was closed during transmission.
These errors occur only in large multilayered networks.
7-3-17 TCP CLOSE REQUEST
Requests processing to close a TCP socket. Other processing being carried
out is forcibly ended and a code is recorded in the results storage area.
Command Block
27 14
Command
code
Results storage area
TCP socket number
Socket option
Response Block
27 14
Command
code
Response
code
Results Storage Format
Response code
183
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Parameters
Socket Option (Command)
The socket option specified as 1 byte. The setting is not valid for this command. Set to 0.
TCP Socket Number
(Command)
The TCP socket number to be closed specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8.
Results Storage Area
(Command)
The area in which the results of the command execution are stored. The first
byte specifies the memory area and data type (variable type). The 2nd to 4th
bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area. Refer to
page 160 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be specified.
Precautions
Any other processing, such as sending or receiving data, being carried out
when this close command is executed will be forcibly ended and a code will
be stored in the results storage area to indicate that this processing was forcibly ended.
Response Codes
Response code
Description
0000
0105
Normal
Local IP address setting error
0302
1001
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
Command too large
1002
1100
Command too small
The TCP socket number is out of range.
1101
1103
The variable type for the results storage area is out of range.
Non-zero bit address specified for the results storage area.
2210
2211
No connection could be established to the specified socket.
High traffic at Unit; cannot execute service.
2240
Socket service mode is incorrect; cannot execute service.
(With unit version 1.5 or later, the high-speed socket service
option was enabled and a socket service was used with a
CMND(490) instruction.)
Results Storage Area Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal
7-3-18 PING
Equivalent processing to the UNIX computer PING command (see below).
Command Block
27 20
Command
code
184
Destination IP address
Timeout
value
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Response Block
27 20
Command
code
Response
code
Parameters
Destination IP Address
(Command)
The IP address (in hexadecimal) of the destination node for the PING command echo request packet.
Timeout Value
(Command)
The wait time for the echo reply packet. The value is set in seconds. The timeout time is set at 20 seconds if the value is specified as 0. If the echo reply
packet is not received within the set time limit, the code for a timeout error will
be set as the results storage response code.
Remarks
PING Command
The PING command runs the echoback test using the ICMP protocol. When
the PING command is executed, an echo request packet is sent to the remote
node ICMP. Correct communications are confirmed when the returned
response packet is received normally. The echo reply packet is automatically
returned by the remote node ICMP.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal (echo reply received from the remote node)
0205
1001
Timeout error
Command too large
1002
1100
Command too small
Zero destination address
220F
2211
PING command currently being executed
High traffic at Unit; cannot execute service.
7-3-19 FINS/TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST
Requests a remote node change for the FINS/TCP connection.
The default destination IP address in a connection in which the Ethernet Unit
is used as a client is the destination IP address set under the FINS/TCP Tab
in the Unit Setup. By sending this command to the Ethernet Unit, the destination IP address for the specified connection can be changed to another IP
address.
Remote node changes can be made only for connection numbers specified as
FINS/TCP clients in the Unit Setup.
Command Block
27 30
Command FINS/TCP
connection No.
code
Remote IP
address
Remote TCP
port number
185
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Response Block
27 30
Command
code
Response
code
Parameters
FINS/TCP Connection No.
(Command)
Specifies, in two bytes, the FINS/TCP connection number (1 to 16) for which
the change is to be made.
Remote IP Address
(Command)
Specifies the remote node’s IP address (must be non-zero) in hexadecimal.
Remote Port Number
(Command)
Specifies the remote TCP port number (must be non-zero) with this command.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
0105
Description
0302
Normal
Node address setting error
Local IP address setting error
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
1001
1002
Command too large
Command too small
1100
Connection number not set from 1 to 16
Remote IP address set to 0
Remote TCP port number set to 0
2230
2231
Connection already established with specified remote node
Specified connection number not set as FINS/TCP client in
Unit Setup
Remote node change processing for specified connection
number aborted because change request received during processing
2232
7-3-20 FINS/TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ
Reads the FINS/TCP connection status.
Command Block
27 31
Command FINS/TCP
code
connection No.
Response Block
27 31
Command
code
186
Response
code
FINS/TCP Connection
connection service
No.
Local IP address
Local TCP
port number
Remote IP
address
Remote TCP TCP transition
port number
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Parameters
FIFINS/TCP Connection
No. (Command,
Response)
Command: Specifies, in two bytes, the FINS/TCP connection number (1 to
16) for which the status is to be read.
Connection Service
(Response)
Specifies the service that is being used for the FINS/TCP connection as a
number.
Response: Specifies the FINS/TCP connection number (1 to 16) for which the
status was read.
0003: FINS/TCP server
0004: FINS/TCP client
Local IP Address
(Response)
Specifies the IP address for the local node in hexadecimal.
Local TCP Port Number
(Response)
Specifies the TCP port number for the local node.
Remote IP Address
(Response)
Specifies the IP address for the remote node in hexadecimal.
Remote TCP Port Number
(Response)
Specifies the TCP port number for the remote node.
TCP Transitions
(Response)
Specifies the TCP connection status using the following numbers.
For details on TCP status changes, refer to Appendix C TCP Status Transitions.
Number
00000000
Status
CLOSED
Connection closed.
Meaning
00000001
00000002
LISTEN
SYN SENT
Waiting for connection.
SYN sent in active status.
00000003
SYN RECEIVED
SYN received and sent.
00000004
00000005
ESTABLISHED
CLOSE WAIT
Already established.
FIN received and waiting for completion.
00000006
00000007
FIN WAIT 1
CLOSING
Completed and FIN sent.
Completed and exchanged FIN. Awaiting ACK.
00000008
00000009
LAST ACK
FIN WAIT 2
FIN sent and completed. Awaiting ACK.
Completed and ACK received. Awaiting FIN.
0000000A
TIME WAIT
After closing, pauses twice the maximum segment life (2MSL).
Response Codes
Response code
Description
0000
0105
Normal
Node address setting error
Local IP address setting error
0302
1001
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
Command too large
1002
1100
Command too small
Connection number not set from 1 to 16
7-3-21 IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE
Writes the IP address table.
187
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Command Block
27 50
Command
code
Number
of records
6 bytes
6 bytes
IP address
table records
IP address
table records
Response Block
27 50
Command Response
code
code
Parameters
Number of Records
(Command)
The number of records to write is specified in hexadecimal between 0000 and
0020 (0 to 32 decimal) in the command. If this value is set to 0, the IP address
table will be cleared so that no records are registered.
IP Address Table Records
(Command)
Specify the IP address table records. The number of records specified must
be provided. The total number of bytes in the IP address table records is calculated as the number of records × 6 bytes/record. The configuration of the
6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram.
1
6 bytes
00
FINS node
number
IP address
FINS Node Address
Node address for communications via the FINS command (hexadecimal).
IP Address
IP address used by TCP/IP protocol (hexadecimal).
Precautions
The new I/O address table records will not be effective until the PC is
restarted or the Ethernet Unit is reset.
An error response will be returned if the IP address conversion method in the
system mode settings is set for automatic generation.
Response Codes
188
Response code
0000
Description
Normal (echo reply received from the remote node)
1001
1002
Command too large
Command too small
1003
The number of records specified does not match the sent data
length.
110C
The number of records is not between 0 and 32.
The FINS node address is not between 1 and 126
The IP address is 0.
2307
IP address conversion method is set for automatic generation.
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
7-3-22 IP ADDRESS WRITE
Write the local IP address and the subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit System
Setup.
Command Block
27 57
Command
code
IP address
Subnet mask
Response Block
27 57
Command
code
Response
code
Parameters
IP Address (Command)
Specify the local IP address of the Ethernet Unit using 4 pairs of hexadecimal
numbers in the range 00.00.00.00 to FF.FF.FF.FF (0.0.0.0. to
255.255.255.255 decimal). If 0.0.0.0 is specified, the local IP address set in
the allocated words in the DM Area is enabled.
Example: 150.31.2.83
96 1F 02
Subnet Mask (Command)
53
Specify the local IP address of the Ethernet Unit using 4 pairs of hexadecimal
numbers in the range 00.00.00.00 to FF.FF.FF.FF (0.0.0.0. to
255.255.255.255 decimal).
Example: 255.255.255.255
FF FF FF 00
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Normal
Description
1001
1002
Command too large
Command too small
Precautions
The local IP address and subnet mask set using this mask are written to the
CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the Ethernet Unit.
The new local IP address and subnet mask settings will not be effective until
the PC is restarted or the Ethernet Unit is reset.
7-3-23 IP ADDRESS TABLE READ
Reads the IP address table.
189
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Command Block
27 60
Command
code
Number of
records
Response Block
27 60
Command
code
Response
code
Maximum
number
of stored
records
Number
of stored
records
Number
of records
6 bytes
6 bytes
IP address
table records
IP address
table records
Parameters
Number of Records
(Command, Response)
The number of records to read is specified between 0000 and 0020 (0 to 32
decimal) in the command. If this value is set to 0, the number of stored
records is returned but the IP address table records are not returned. The
response returns the actual number of records read.
Maximum Number of
Stored Records
(Response)
The maximum number of records that can be stored in the IP address table is
returned. The maximum number of stored records is fixed at 0020 (32
records).
Number of Stored
Records (Response)
The number of IP address table records stored at the time the command is
executed is returned as a hexadecimal number.
IP Address Table Records
(Response)
The number of IP address table records specified in the number of records
parameter is returned. The total number of bytes in the IP address table
records is calculated as the number of records × 6 bytes/record. The configuration of the 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram.
1
6 bytes
00
FINS node
number
IP address
FINS Node Address
Node address for communications via the FINS command (in hexadecimal).
IP Address
IP number used by TCP/IP protocol (in hexadecimal).
Precautions
If the IP address table contains fewer records than the number specified in the
number of records parameter, all the records contained in the IP address
table when the command is executed will be returned and the command execution will end normally.
An error response will be returned if the IP address conversion method in the
system mode settings is set to the automatic generation method.
190
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Normal
Description
1001
1002
Command too large
Command too small
2307
IP address conversion method is set to the automatic generation method.
7-3-24 IP ROUTER TABLE READ
Reads the IP router table.
Command Block
27 61
Command
code
Number
of records
Response Block
27 61
Command
code
Response
code
Maximum
number
of stored
records
Number
of stored
records
Number
of records
8 bytes
8 bytes
IP router
table records
IP router
table records
Parameters
Number of Records
(Command, Response)
The number of records to read is specified between 0000 and 0008 (0 to 8
decimal) in the command. If this value is set to 0, the number of stored
records will be returned but the IP router table records will not be returned.
The response returns the actual number of records read.
Maximum Number of
Stored Records
(Response)
The maximum number of records that can be stored in the IP router table is
returned. The maximum number of stored records is fixed at 0008 (8 records).
Number of Stored
Records (Response)
The number of IP router table records stored at the time the command is executed is returned in hexadecimal.
IP Router table Records
(Response)
The number of IP router table records specified in the number of records
parameter is returned. The total number of bytes in the IP router table records
is calculated as the number of records × 8 bytes/record. The configuration of
the 8 bytes of data in each record is shown below.
1
IP Network address
(Network ID)
8 bytes
Router IP address
IP Network Address
The network ID from the IP address in hexadecimal. The network ID part corresponding to the address class (determined by the leftmost 3 bits) set here,
is enabled. (Refer to page 50.)
191
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Router IP Address
The IP address (in hexadecimal) of a router connected to a network specified
with IP addresses.
Precautions
If the IP router table contains fewer records than the number specified in the
number of records parameter, all the records contained in the IP router table
when the command is executed will be returned and the command execution
will end normally.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal
1001
1002
Command too large
Command too small
7-3-25 PROTOCOL STATUS READ
Reads the Ethernet Unit protocol status.
Command Block
27 62
Command
code
Response Block
27 62
Command
code
Response
code
48 bytes
184 bytes
IP status
ICMP status
184 bytes
12 bytes
TCP status
UDP status
Parameters
IP Status (Response)
1,2,3...
Twelve types of IP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in
the following sequence. Each value is returned as an 8-digit hexadecimal
value.
1. Total number of IP packets received.
2. The number of IP packets discarded due to an error with the checksum in
the packet header.
3. The number of IP packets discarded because the received packet was
larger than the overall packet length value in the packet header.
4. The number of IP packets discarded because the minimum size of the IP
header data could not be stored in the first short buffer (See note.) when
an attempt was made to store the packet. Refer to 7-3-26 MEMORY STATUS READ and Appendix B Buffer Configuration.
5. The number of packets discarded for one of the following reasons:
• The IP header length value in the IP header was smaller than the
smallest size of the IP header.
• The size of the first short buffer (See note.) was smaller than the IP
header length value in the IP header when storing the packet.
192
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
6. The number of IP packets discarded because the IP header length was
larger than the overall packet length value in the packet header.
7. The number of fragmented packets received.
8. The number of received fragmented IP packets discarded because a
queue for reassembly could not be secured.
9. The number of fragmented IP packets discarded because they could not
be reassembled within 12 seconds after being received.
10. Always 0.
11. The number of packets addressed to other networks that have been discarded.
12. Always 0.
Note
ICMP Status (Response)
Refer to 7-3-26 MEMORY STATUS READ for details on the short buffer.
Ten types (46 items) of ICMP status information occupying 4 bytes each are
returned in the following sequence. Each value is returned as an 8-digit hexadecimal value.
1,2,3...
1. The number of times the ICMP error routine was called. The ICMP error
routine uses ICMP packets to inform the source about errors. The routine
is called when an illegal packet is received (error in IP option processing
or error in relay processing) or if the object port does not exist when using
UDP.
2. Always 0.
3. Always 0.
4. Total number of outputs of each packet type during ICMP output. The 19
statistical values are returned in the order shown below. Contents are defined for 13 types only; all other types contain 0. Only #0, #3, #14, #16, and
#18 are counted by the Ethernet Unit.
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#15
#16
#17
#18
4 bytes
Type number
Description
#0
Echo reply
#1, #2
#3
Undefined, always 0
Destination unreachable
#4
#5
Source quench
Routing redirect
#6, #7
#8
Undefined, always 0
Echo
#9, #10
#11
Undefined, always 0
Time exceeded
#12
#13
Parameter problem
Time stamp
#14
#15
Time stamp reply
Information request
#16
#17
Information request reply
Address mask request
#18
Address mask reply
193
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
5. The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the type-indication code was out of range.
6. The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the overall
packet length value in the packet header was smaller than the minimum
ICMP packet length.
7. The number of received ICMP packets discarded because of an incorrect
checksum value in the packet header.
8. The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the ICMP header length value in the packet header did not match the lengths of individual
header types.
9. The number of responses returned to received ICMP packets requiring a
response.
10. Total number of inputs of each packet type during ICMP input. The 19 statistical values are returned in the order shown below. Contents are defined
for 13 types only; all other types contain 0.
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#15
#16
#17
#18
4 bytes
Type number
TCP Status (Response)
Description
#0
#1, #2
Echo reply
Undefined, always 0
#3
#4
Destination unreachable
Source quench
#5
#6, #7
Routing redirect
Undefined, always 0
#8
Echo
#9, #10
#11
Undefined, always 0
Time exceeded
#12
#13
Parameter problem
Time stamp
#14
#15
Time stamp reply
Information request
#16
#17
Information request reply
Address mask request
#18
Address mask reply
Three types (46 items) of TCP status information occupying 4 bytes each are
returned in the following sequence. Each value is returned as an 8-digit hexadecimal value.
1) Connection Information (60 Bytes)
Fifteen items are returned in the following sequence:
1,2,3...
1. The number of times active connections were correctly established.
2. The number of times a SYN packet was received while waiting to establish
a passive connection.
3. The number of times active or passive connections were correctly established.
4. The number of times an established connection was cut off.
5. The number of times the connection wait status was cut off.
194
Command/Response Reference
Section 7-3
6. The number of times protocol control blocks or other actively allocated
structures were released.
7. The number of segments for the round-trip time (time from segment transmission to ACK).
8. The number of times the round-trip time was changed.
9. The number of times a delayed acknowledgement (ACK) was sent. If the
order of the received segments is reversed, ACK is sent with a packet of
data separate from ACK (response to input data, etc.) or is immediately
sent with the ACK for other data.
10. The number of times the connection was cut off because no ACK was returned after several resend attempts.
11. The number of times no ACK was returned within the resend timer set
time. (The resend timer sets the maximum time limit between the data being output and ACK being returned.)
12. The number of times no window advertisement is received within the time
set on the duration timer. (The duration timer sets the maximum time limit
for a window advertisement to be received if the transmission window is
smaller than necessary and the resend timer is not set. If no window advertisement is received within the time limit, the number of segments permitted by the transmission window are sent. If the transmission window is
set to 0, a window probe (1 octet of data) is sent before the timer restarts.)
13. The number of times no segment was sent or received within the time set
on the hold timer.
14. The number of times the hold packet is resent. (Always 0.)
15. The number of times the hold packet is sent without response before the
connection is cut off.
2) Send Information (40 Bytes)
Ten information items are returned in the following sequence:
1,2,3...
1. The total number of packets sent.
2. The number of data packets sent.
3. The number of data bytes sent.
4. The number of data packets resent.
5. The number of data bytes resent.
6. The number of ACK packets sent.
7. The number of window probes (1 octet of data) sent.
8. The number of emergency data packets sent. (Always 0.)
9. The number of window advertisement packets sent.
10. The number of control packets (SYN, FIN, RST) sent.
3) Receive Information
Twenty-one information items are returned in the following sequence:
1,2,3...
1. The total number of packets received.
2. The number of packets received continuously.
3. The number of bytes received continuously.
4. The number of received packets discarded due to an incorrect checksum.
5. The number of packets discarded because the TCP header was smaller
than the minimum size for a TCP header or was larger than the IP packet.
195
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
6. The number of packets discarded because the TCP header and IP header
could not be stored in the first short buffer.
7. The number of resent packets received.
8. The number of bytes in the resend packets.
9. The number of duplicated resend packets received.
10. The number of bytes in the duplicated resend packets received.
11. The number of out-of-range data packets received. (Always 0.)
12. The number of bytes in the out-of-range data packets received. (Always 0.)
13. The number of packets where the data was larger than the window.
14. The number of bytes in the packets where the data was larger than the
window.
15. The number of packets received after closing.
16. The number of window probe packets received.
17. The number of resent ACK packets received.
18. The number of ACK packets received with no data set.
19. The number of ACK packets received.
20. The number of ACK packets received for received transmission acknowledgements (ACK).
21. The number of window advertisement packets received.
UDP Status (Response)
1,2,3...
Three items of UDP information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the
following sequence. Each value is returned as an 8-digit hexadecimal value.
1. The number of packets discarded because the size of the first short buffer
was smaller than the minimum size (28) of the IP header and UDP header
when the packet was stored.
2. The number of packets discarded due to an incorrect checksum in the
UDP header.
3. The number of packets discarded because the IP overall length in the IP
header was shorter than the UDP overall length in the UDP header.
Precautions
All the above values are set to 0 if network operation stops due to incorrect
settings in the system setup.
Counting will be stopped when a count reaches the maximum value. The
maximum values are as follows:
IP, ICMP, or UDP status: 7FFFFFFF (2,147,483,647 decimal)
TC status:
FFFFFFFF (4,294,967,295 decimal)
Response Codes
Response code
0000
1001
Description
Normal
Command too large
7-3-26 MEMORY STATUS READ
Reads the status of the Ethernet Unit’s network memory. The network memory contains 248K bytes that are used as required as for communications
buffers for communications servicing. The network memory consists of 1,472
short buffers (128 bytes each) and 64 long buffers (1,024 bytes each). Refer
to Appendix B Buffer Configuration.
196
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Command Block
27 63
Command
code
Response Block
27 63
Command
code
92 bytes
Response
code
Memory status
Parameters
Memory Status
(Response)
A total of 23 data items in six areas are returned in the following order. Each
item consists of 4 bytes.
1,2,3...
1. Short Buffer Application: Two items are returned (8 bytes).
a. The number of short buffers currently being used.
b.
The number of short buffers in the system (fixed at 1,472 decimal).
2. Short Buffer Application by Type: Thirteen items are returned (52 bytes).
a. The number of short buffers used for storing communications data
b.
The number of short buffers used for protocol headers (TCP, UDP, IP,
ICMP, ARP)
c.
The number of short buffers used in socket structures
d. The number of short buffers used as protocol control blocks
e. The number of short buffers used for routing tables
f.
Not used (always 0)
g. Not used (always 0)
h. The number of short buffers used for IP fragment re-assembly queue
headers
i.
The number of short buffers used for storing socket addresses
j.
Not used (always 0)
k.
The number of short buffers used for storing socket options
l.
The number of short buffers used for storing access rights
m. The number of short buffers used for storing interface addresses
3. Long Buffer Application: Two items are returned (8 bytes).
a. The number of long buffers currently being used.
b.
The number of long buffers in the system (fixed at 64 decimal).
4. Not Used: Always 0. (4 bytes)
5. Network Memory Application: Two items are returned.
a. The number of bytes used (in K bytes)
b.
The percentage used
6. Memory Exhaustion Log (12 bytes)
Counts for the following values indicate a high load on the Ethernet Unit.
These high loads may be caused by problems in communications, particularly FINS communications and UDP sockets. If these values are consistently high, check your applications.
197
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
a. The number of times an attempt was made to secure a short buffer
without WAIT when there were no short buffers available.
b.
The number of times an attempt was made to secure a short buffer
with WAIT when there were no short buffers available.
c.
The number of times an attempt was made to release and secure a
short buffer already being used by another socket when there were no
short buffers available.
Precautions
All the above values are set to 0 if Ethernet communications functions are
stopped due to improper settings in the system setup.
These values are cleared when the Ethernet Unit is started or reset. Values
will be counted only until the maximum values are reached.
Response Codes
Response code
Description
0000
1001
Normal
Command too large
7-3-27 SOCKET STATUS READ
Reads the Ethernet Unit network socket status.
Command Block
27 64
Command
code
Response Block
27 64
Command
code
Response
code
32 bytes
32 bytes
Socket status
Socket status
Parameters
Socket Status (Response)
Returns eight types of information in records of 32 bytes each. A maximum of
62 records can be returned. The format of each record is shown below.
Protocol (4 bytes)
The protocol used for the socket is returned as a number.
00 00 00 06: TCP; 00 00 00 11: UDP
Receive Queue (4 bytes)
The number of bytes in the reception queue.
Send Queue (4 bytes)
The number of bytes in the send queue.
Local IP Address (4 bytes)
The local IP address allocated to the socket.
Local Port Number (4 bytes)
The local port number allocated to the socket.
198
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Remote IP Address (4 bytes)
The remote IP address allocated to the socket.
Remote Port Number (4 bytes)
The remote port number allocated to the socket.
TCP Transitions (4 bytes)
The TCP connection status is returned as one of the numbers shown in the
following table. Refer to Appendix C TCP Status Transitions for a diagram of
transitions.
Number
00 00 00 00
Stage
CLOSED
Closed.
Status
00 00 00 01
00 00 00 02
LISTEN
SYN SENT
Waiting for connection.
SYN sent in active status.
00 00 00 03
00 00 00 04
SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent.
ESTABLISHED
Already established.
00 00 00 05
00 00 00 06
CLOSE WAIT
FIN WAIT 1
Received FIN, waiting to close.
Completed and FIN sent.
00 00 00 07
00 00 00 08
CLOSING
LAST ACK
Completed and exchanged FIN. Awaiting ACK.
FIN sent and completed. Awaiting ACK.
00 00 00 09
00 00 00 0A
FIN WAIT 2
TIME WAIT
Close completed and ACK received. Awaiting FIN.
After closing, pauses twice the maximum segment
life (2MSL).
Precautions
All the above values are set to 0 if Ethernet communications functions are
stopped due to improper settings in the system setup.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
1001
Description
Normal
Command too large
7-3-28 ADDRESS INFORMATION READ
Reads FINS node addresses and IP addresses
Command Block
27 65
Command
code
Response Block
27 65
Command
code
6 bytes
Response
Number
code
of addresses
Address
information
199
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
Parameters
Number of Addresses (Response)
The number of pairs of FINS node addresses and IP addresses being
returned. The Ethernet Unit is always 0001 (1 decimal).
Address Information
Pairs of FINS node addresses and IP addresses. Each pair requires 6 bytes
and has the following configuration.
1
6 bytes
00
FINS node
number
IP address
FINS Node Address
Node address set on the Ethernet Unit (hexadecimal).
IP Address
IP address set on the Ethernet Unit (hexadecimal).
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Normal
Description
1001
Command too large
7-3-29 IP ADDRESS READ
Reads the local IP address and subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit System
Setup and the FINS node address. The values read with this command, however, are not necessarily the settings actually used for operation. The settings
that are actually used for operation can be confirmed using CONTROLLER
DATA READ (page 162) and ADDRESS INFORMATION READ (page 199).
This command is supported for CJ-series Ethernet Units only.
Command Block
27 67
Command
code
Response Block
27 67
Command
code
00
Response
code
Number of
addresses
IP address
FINS
node number
Subnet mask
Parameters
Number of Addresses (Response)
The number of sets of FINS node addresses, IP addresses, and subnet
masks being returned. The Ethernet Unit is always 0001 (1 decimal).
FINS Node Address (Response)
Node address set on the Ethernet Unit (hexadecimal).
200
Section 7-3
Command/Response Reference
IP Address (Response)
The local IP address set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the Ethernet
Unit is returned in order starting from the leftmost bytes in hexadecimal. If the
local IP address set in the allocated words in the DM Area is enabled, 0.0.0.0
is returned.
Subnet Mask (Response)
The subnet mask set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the Ethernet Unit
is returned in order starting from the leftmost bytes in hexadecimal.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Normal
Description
1001
Command too large
201
Command/Response Reference
202
Section 7-3
SECTION 8
Troubleshooting
This section describes information and procedures that can be used to troubleshoot problems that sometimes occur with
Ethernet Unit and Ethernet communications.
The Ethernet Unit makes up part of a network. Repair a defective Ethernet Unit as soon as possible as it can have a negative
effect on the entire network. We recommend that customers keep one or more spare Ethernet Units to allow immediate
recovery of the network.
8-1
Troubleshooting with Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
204
8-2
Error Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
8-3
Error Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
206
8-3-1
Error Log Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
8-4
8-5
Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
8-4-1
Startup Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
8-4-2
FINS Communications Problems
(SEND(090)/RECV(098)/CMND(490)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
8-4-3
UDP Socket Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
8-4-4
TCP Socket Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218
8-4-5
FTP Service Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
8-4-6
Network Connection Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
8-4-7
Troubleshooting with Response Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
Results Storage Area Response Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
231
203
Section 8-1
Troubleshooting with Indicators
8-1
Troubleshooting with Indicators
The indicators on the Ethernet Unit can be used to troubleshoot some error.
The probable cause and correction for errors that can be determined from the
LINK, HOST, RUN, ERC, and ERH indicators are listed in the following table.
RUN
ERC
ERH
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
LNK
---
HOST
---
Probably cause
Supply power.
Make sure that the correct voltage is
being supplied.
The Ethernet Unit is faulty.
The CPU Unit or Backplane is faulty.
Replace the Ethernet Unit.
Replace the CPU Unit or the Backplane.
Tighten the mounting screws to the
specified torque (CS Series) or lock
the sliders into place (CJ Series).
The mounting screws on the Ethernet
Unit are loose (CS Series) or the sliders
are not properly locked into place (CJ
Series).
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
---
---
---
---
Correction
Power is not being supplied to the CPU
Unit or the power supply voltage is too
low.
The node address is set outside the correct range on the rotary switches.
Set the node address to between 01
and FE Hex.
The Ethernet Unit is faulty.
Restart the PLC. If the problem persists, replace the Ethernet Unit.
The unit number on the Ethernet Unit is
not set correctly on the rotary switch.
The I/O tables are not registered in the
CPU Unit.
The same unit number is being used on
another Unit as well.
The CPU Unit is faulty.
Correct the unit number setting.
Register the I/O tables.
Correct the unit number.
Restart the CPU Unit. If the problem
persists, replace the CPU Unit.
Lit
---
---
Not lit
---
There is no communications link with the
hub.
If power is not turned ON to the hub,
turn it ON.
If there is crossed cable between the
Ethernet Unit and the hub, use
straight cable.
Lit
---
Lit
---
---
There is a mistake in the Unit Setup or
routing tables.
Read the error history and correct
the data that is causing the error. If
the problem persists, replace the
CPU Unit.
Restart the CPU Unit. If the problem
persists, replace the CPU Unit.
Restart the CPU Unit. If the problem
persists, replace the CPU Unit.
Memory in the CPU Unit is faulty.
The CPU Unit is faulty.
Lit
Lit
204
Lit
Not lit
---
Lit
---
---
---
There is a mistake in the settings for a
server (DNS, SMTP, POP3, or SNTP) in
the Unit Setup.
Read the error status and history
and correct the data that is causing
the error. If the problem persists,
replace the CPU Unit.
An error occurred in communications with Inspect the communications path
the server.
(Ethernet Unit, cable connections,
hub, router, server), and correct the
situation that is causing the error.
An error occurred in EEPROM.
Restart the PLC. If the problem persists, replace the Ethernet Unit.
Section 8-2
Error Status
RUN
Lit
ERC
---
ERH
LNK
Flash- --ing
HOST
Probably cause
--The IP address is set incorrectly.
Correction
Correct the IP address. Do not set
any of the following IP addresses.
• Host IDs that are all 0 or all 1.
• Network IDs that are all 0 or all 1.
• Subnetwork IDs that are all 1.
• Addresses beginning with 127 (7F
Hex).
The node address set on the rotary
switch on the front of the Unit does not
agree with the host ID in the IP address.
This probably can occur when the
address conversion method is set for
automatic address generation.
Flash- --ing
8-2
---
---
---
Make sure that the node address
and the last byte of the IP address
are the same and set other host IDs
to 0.
Change the address conversion
method.
The Unit operation mode change function Set the node address correctly.
is in effect.
Error Status
The Ethernet Unit will output error status to the following word in the CIO Area
of the CPU Unit. This information can be used in troubleshooting errors.
Word = CIO 1500 + (25 x unit number) +18
Error Status (Ethernet Unit
to CPU Unit)
The status of errors that occur at the Ethernet Unit is reflected as shown in the
following diagram.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n+18
Bit 02: IP address setting error
Bit 03: IP address table error
Bit 04: IP router table error
Bit 05: DNS server error
Bit 06: Routing table error
Bit 11: SNTP server error
Bit 12: SMTP server error
Bit 13: POP server error
Bit 14: Address disagreement
Bit 15: EEPROM error
Bit
0 to 1
Error
(Not used.)
Status Manipulated by
-------
2
IP address setting error
ON
Unit
ON if any of the following conditions apply to the IP
address.
• All bits in the host ID are 0 or 1.
• All bits in the network ID are 0 or 1.
• All bits in the subnet ID are 1.
• The IP address begins with 127 (0x7F).
3
IP address table error
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit
OFF when the IP address is normal.
On if the IP address table information is incorrect.
IP router table error
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit
OFF when the IP address table is normal.
ON if the IP router table information is incorrect.
OFF
Unit
OFF when the IP address table is normal.
4
Unit operation
205
Section 8-3
Error Log
5
Bit
Error
DNS server error
6
Routing table error
Status Manipulated by
Unit operation
ON
Unit
ON when the following errors occur during DNS server
operation:
• An illegal server IP address is set.
• A timeout occurs during communications with the
server.
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit
OFF when DNS server operation is normal.
ON if the routing table information is incorrect.
7 to 10 (Not used.)
OFF
---
Unit
---
OFF when the routing table is normal.
---
11
SNTP server error
ON
Unit
OFF
Unit
ON when the following errors occur during SNTP server
operation:
• An illegal server IP address or host name is set.
• A timeout occurs during communications with the
server.
OFF when SNTP server operation is normal.
12
SMTP server error
ON
Unit
OFF
Unit
ON when the following errors occur during SMTP server
operation:
• An illegal server IP address or host name is set.
• A timeout occurs during communications with the
server.
• The verification time from the server has expired (when
POP before SMTP is set).
OFF when SMTP server operation is normal.
13
POP server error
ON
Unit
ON when the following errors occur during POP server
operation:
• An illegal server IP address or host name is set.
• A server verification error (user name or password)
occurs.
• A timeout occurs during communications with the
server.
14
Address disagreement
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit
OFF when use of the POP server is normal.
ON if the remote IP address is set to automatic generation but the local IP address host number and FINS
node address do not agree.
15
EEPROM error
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit
OFF under all other circumstances.
ON if an error has occurred in the EEPROM memory.
OFF
Unit
OFF when the EEPROM memory is normal.
8-3
Error Log
The Ethernet Unit provides an error log that records errors that have occurred
during Ethernet Unit operation. The contents of the error log can be read or
cleared from a Programming Device, such as the CX-Programmer, or it can
be read or cleared using FINS commands from a workstation or computer.
(See 7-3-7 ERROR LOG READ and 7-3-8 ERROR LOG CLEAR).
Logged Errors
The following errors are recorded in the error log.
• Errors in network operation
• Errors in data transfers
• Error in the CPU Unit
206
Section 8-3
Error Log
Error Log Table
Each error is recorded as one record in an error log table. Up to 64 records
can be saved. If more than 64 errors occur, the oldest errors will be deleted
from the error log and the most recent error will be recorded.
The following information is recorded in the error log table.
• Main error code (See table later in this section.)
• Detailed error code (See table later in this section.)
• Time stamp (from the clock in the CPU Unit)
Error Log Location
When an error is detected, the error codes and time stamp are recorded in the
error log in RAM inside the Ethernet Unit. Serious errors are also recorded in
EEPROM. The maximum number of errors that can be saved to EEPROM is
64 for the CS Series and 32 for the CJ Series. The errors recorded in
EEPROM will be saved even if the Unit is restarted or power is turned OFF.
When the Ethernet Unit is started, the contents of the error log in EEPROM is
copied to RAM.
When a FINS command is used to read the error log, the log held in RAM is
read. When a FINS command is used to clear the error log, the logs held in
both RAM and EEPROM are cleared.
FINS Commands for Error
Logs
The following FINS commands can be used to read or clear the error log.
Refer to SECTION 7 FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet Units.
Command
code
MRC
SRC
21
8-3-1
02
03
Function
ERROR LOG READ
ERROR LOG CLEAR
Error Log Error Codes
The error codes are described in the following table. The detailed error code
will provide detailed information on an error.
Error
code
Meaning
Detailed error code
1st byte
2nd byte
00
Correction
Replace the CPU Unit.
EEPROM
0001
Watchdog timer error in CPU Unit 00
0002
0006
CPU Unit service monitor error
Other CPU error
Monitor time (ms)
Check the operating environment. Saved
Bit 11: Unit not in Registered Create the I/O tables.
Saved
I/O Tables
Other bits are reserved for
system use.
000F
0010
CPU Unit initialization error
Insufficient System Setup Area
00
00
00
00
0011
Event timed out
MRC
SRC
0012
CPU Unit memory error
01: Read
error
02: Write
error
0013
CPU Unit protected
00
03: Routing
table
04: Setup
error
05: CPU Bus
Unit Words
(CIO/DM)
00
Replace the CPU Unit.
Reduce the number of CPU Bus
Units.
Replace the CPU Unit.
Saved
Saved
Saved
Saved
01: Recreate the data specified by Saved
the 2nd byte of the detailed error
code.
02: Clear memory using procedure in the PLC operation manual.
Remove protection from CPU Unit Saved
memory.
207
Section 8-3
Error Log
Error
code
0103
0105
0107
0108
Meaning
Resend count exceeded (send
failed)
Node address setting error (send
failed)
Remote node not in network (send
failed)
No Unit with specified unit
address (send failed)
010B
CPU Unit error (send failed)
010D
Destination address not in routing
tables (send failed)
010E
No routing table entry (send
failed)
010F
Routing table error (send failed)
0110
Too many relay points (send
failed)
0111
Command too long (send failed)
0112
Detailed error code
1st byte
2nd byte
Commands
Bit 15:
Bits 08 to 14:
Bits 00 to 07:
Responses
Bit 15:
Bits 08 to 14:
Bits 00 to 07:
Correction
EEPROM
Check transceiver at remote node. --OFF
SNA
SA1
Set the IP address correctly.
---
ON
DNA
DA1
Check the connection to the
remote node.
Check the unit address at the
remote node.
-----
Troubleshoot the error in the CPU --Unit using the PLC operation
manual.
Set the destination address in the --routing tables.
Set the local node, remote node, --and relay nodes in the routing
tables.
Create the routing tables correctly. --Reconstruct the network or correct the routing tables so that
commands are sent to within a 3level network range.
Check the command format and
set the correct command data.
---
Header error (send failed)
Check the command format and
set the correct command data.
---
0117
Internal buffers full; packet discarded
Change the network so that traffic --is not concentrated.
0118
Illegal packet discarded
Check for nodes sending illegal
packets.
0119
Local node busy (send failed)
0120
Unexpected routing error
Change the network so that traffic --is not concentrated.
Check the routing tables.
---
0121
No setting in IP address table;
packet discarded
Set the remote node in the IP
address table.
0122
Service not supported in current
mode; packet discarded
Select the IP address table or
--both methods for the address conversion method.
0123
Internal send buffer full; packet
discarded
Change the network so that traffic --is not concentrated.
0124
Maximum frame size exceeded;
routing failed
Reduce the size of events.
021A
Logic error in setting table
208
00
01: Data link
table
02: Network
parameters
03: Routing
tables
04: Unit
Setup
05: CPU Bus
Unit Words
(CIO/DM)
---
---
---
---
Recreate the data specified by the Saved
2nd byte of the detailed error
code.
Section 8-3
Error Log
Error
code
0300
03C0
03C1
Meaning
Detailed error code
1st byte
2nd byte
Parameter error; packet discarded Commands
Bit 15:
Bits 08 to 14:
Bits 00 to 07:
Responses
Bit 15:
Bits 08 to 14:
Bits 00 to 07:
FINS/TCP setting error
01 to 10:
Connection
number
Server setting error
00: DNS
01: SMTP
02: POP3
03: SNTP
OFF
SNA
SA1
ON
DNA
DA1
01: Automatically allocated FINS
node address
duplication
02: Destination IP
address error
03: Destination port
number error
01: IP
address
02: Host
name
03: Port number
04: Other
parameters
Correction
EEPROM
Check the command format and
set the correct command data.
---
Refer to 1-5-1 FINS Communications Service in this manual and
the Operation Manual, Construction of Applications: SECTION 7
and set the FINS/TCP settings
correctly.
---
Set the server settings correctly
based on the information in the
detailed error code.
---
209
Section 8-3
Error Log
Error
code
03C2
03C3
210
Meaning
FINS/TCP packet discarded
FINS/UDP packet discarded
Detailed error code
1st byte
2nd byte
01 to 10:
Connection
number
00
02:
Reopened
because
remote node
closed
03:
Reopened
because of
reception
error
04:
Reopened
because of
transmission
error
05:
Reopened
because RST
received from
remote node
06:
Reopened
because of
no keep-alive
response
07: Illegal
FINS/TCP
procedure
08: Insufficient memory during
server processing
09: Insufficient memory during
client processing
0A: Insufficient memory during
node switching
01 to FE:
Transmission
source node
address
Correction
EEPROM
Have the FINS/TCP connection
status checked when a
SEND(090), RECV(098), or
CMND(490) instruction is executed in the ladder program.
---
Refer to Operation Manual, Construction of Applications: SECTION 7, and correct the remote
node (application on a personal
computer).
---
There is too much load (traffic) on --the Ethernet Unit. Correct the system so that traffic is not concentrated.
The automatic generation (static)
method was used as the IP
address conversion method, so
remote IP address information in
internal memory could not be
changed.
---
Section 8-3
Error Log
Error
code
Meaning
03C4
Server connection error
03C5
Mail communications error
03C6
Clock data write error
Detailed error code
1st byte
2nd byte
00: DNS
01: SMTP
02: POP3
03: SNTP
01: Specified
host does not
exist
02: No service at specified host
03: Timeout
04: Closed
unilaterally by
host
05: Cannot
connect
because
account information does
not match
06: Host
name resolution error
07: Transmission error
08: Reception error
09: Other
error
F101: Mail too large
F102: Mail received from
non-specified address
F103: Mail subject error
F104: Non-specified command received
F106: Mail format (header)
error
F107: Mail format (body)
error
F201: Parameter error
F301: Decoding error
F302: File attachment error
(filename error, data format
error, I/O memory write size
error)
F303: No attached file
F304: Non-specified file
attachment received
F305: File attachment too
large
Other: FINS error response
code
0001: Clock data could not
be refreshed because of a
CPU Unit error.
0002: Clock data could not
be refreshed because the
CPU Unit could not write
clock data in that operation
mode.
Correction
EEPROM
Take either of the following mea- --sures.
• Correct the settings for each
server.
• Inspect the communications path
(Ethernet Unit, cable connections, hub, router, server), and
correct the situation that is causing the error.
Refer to the Operation Manual,
--Construction of Applications: Creating FINS Applications, and correct the remote node (i.e., the
application on the personal computer).
Clear the CPU Unit error.
---
Refer to the Operation Manual,
Construction of Applications:
Automatic Clock Adjustment
Function, and check the operating conditions.
---
211
Section 8-3
Error Log
Error
code
Meaning
Detailed error code
1st byte
2nd byte
0601
CPU Bus Unit error
Arbitrary
0602
CPU Bus Unit memory error
01: Read
error
02: Write
error
Note
Correction
EEPROM
Restart the CPU Unit. If the prob- Saved
lem persists, replace the Ethernet
Unit.
06: Error log
Restart the CPU Unit. If the prob- Saved
lem persists, replace the Ethernet (except
Unit.
for error
log)
(1) The time information in the CPU Unit is used in the CPU Bus Units.
(2) If the time information cannot be read from the CPU Unit, the time stamp
in the error log will be all zeros. This can occur due to CPU Unit startup
error, unit number errors, CPU error, and model number errors. If the time
is read out from a Programming Device, the time will be shown as all zeros in the year 2000.
(3) The battery must be installed in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, the power
turned ON, and then the time set before the clock in the CPU Unit can be
used. The time will not be set correctly in the error log unless the clock
time is set correctly.
(4) An error record is not created in EEPROM when a CPU Bus Unit memory
error occurs.
212
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
The following procedures can be used to troubleshoot various problems in
system operation.
8-4-1
Startup Problems
Startup Problems occurred.
RUN indicator lit?
N
ERH indicator lit?
Y
N
ERC indicator lit?
Y
Y
N
Is the node
address set between
01 and FE Hex?
N
Set the node
address to
between 01 and
FE Hex.
Y
Replace the Ethernet Unit.
Power supplied
to CPU Unit?
N
Make sure that sufficient
power is supplied to the
CPU Unit.
Y
Ethernet Unit
loose on Rack?
Y
Make sure that Unit is firmly
mounted and tighten the
mounting screws firmly or
lock the sliders into place.
N
Do the RUN and ERH
indicators not light if another
CPU Unit is mounted
to the Rack?
Y
Replace the CPU Unit that
didn't work.
N
Replace the Ethernet Unit.
Is the same node
number used by another
Unit?
N
Create the I/O tables in
the CPU Unit.
Y
Set the node numbers so that each one is used only once.
ERH indicator not lit?
Y
Is the same unit
number used by another
CPU Bus Unit?
N
Y
Set the unit numbers correctly.
N
Has a CPU Unit error
occurred in the CPU Unit?
Y
Restart the CPU Unit. If the error persists, replace the CPU
Unit.
N
Set the Unit Setup and routing tables
correctly.
ERH indicator not
flashing?
Y
Is the IP address correct?
N
N
Correct the IP address in the System Setup, and read out the
controller status using the READ CONTROLLER STATUS
command in FINS communications and correct any problems
indicated.
Y
Make sure that the node number and the last byte of the IP address are the same and set
other host IDs to 0, or change the address conversion method to use and IP address table
or combined methods.
Go to Network Connection Problems
213
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
8-4-2
FINS Communications Problems (SEND(090)/RECV(098)/
CMND(490))
FINS Communications Problems occurred.
Refer to 8-4-7
Troubleshooting with
Response Codes and
remove any causes of the
problem discovered there
before proceeding with this
procedure.
Is the control data
for the instruction set
incorrectly?
Y
Make sure that the FINS network address is not set to 0
for the Ethernet Unit and check the network address,
node number and unit address.
N
Y
Is a CMND(194)
instruction being addressed
to the local node, e.g. for
socket services?
N
Are different UDP port
numbers set for FINS
communications for both
the local node and the
remote node?
Set the same port number for both nodes.
Y
N
Are the local and remote
nodes both on the same
network, i.e. do they have the
same network number in their
IP addresses?
N
Y
Is the IP address
of the remote node missing from
the IP address table?
Y
(Note: The automatic generation setting cannot be used alone.)
N
Is the IP address
of the remote node
missing from the IP
router table?
Set the IP address of the remote
node in the IP address table or use
automatic address conversion.
IP routing must be used if the net ID of the IP address of the
local node and remote node. Set the IP address of the remote
node in the local IP address table. (Note: Use of the IP address
table must be set in the mode settings for the IP address table to
be effective.)
Y
Set the network number of the remote node in the IP
router table.
N
Are the FINS network
addresses of the local and
remote nodes different?
Y
Set both nodes to the same FINS network address.
N
Y
Do not attempt to broadcast to a node with a different
network number. You can broadcast only to nodes on the
same IP network.
Are the routing
Y
tables set improperly?
Set routing tables at the local node, target node, and any
relay nodes.
Are you attempting
a broadcast transmission?
Are you attempting to
communicate with a PLC on
another network?
Y
Go to Network
Connection Problems
E
214
N
D
N
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
8-4-3
UDP Socket Problems
General Problems
General Problems
Go through the procedure in 8-4-2
FINS Communications Problems
(SEND(090)/RECV(098)/
CMND(490)) before starting this
procedure.
Is the response
code a value other than
0000?
Y
Go to 8-4-7 Troubleshooting with
Response Codes.
Y
Go to 8-5 Results Storage Area Response Codes.
(There will be no response code in the results storage
area if Socket Service Request Switches are being
used.)
N
Is the response
code in the results storage
area a value other than
0000?
N
Go to Network Connection
Problems.
E
Opening and Closing
Problems
N
D
Refer to General Problems above.
215
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
Reception Problems
Reception Problems occurred.
Is reception
processing
finishing?
Y
N
Is the remote
node not processing to
send data?
N
Adjust the remote node to process send data.
Y
Read controller status
using the FINS command
READ CONTROLLER
STATUS.
Have any reception
errors occurred?
Y
There may be noise affecting the network.
Increase the number of retries or take
measures against noise as described in 2-4
Network Installation.
N
Read memory status
using the FINS command
READ MEMORY STATUS.
Is the network
Y
memory being used more
than 80%?
There may be too much load on the Ethernet
Unit. If the memory exhaustion records show
counts, UDP data may be corrupted. Check
your applications.
N
Read protocol status using
the FINS command READ
PROTOCOL STATUS.
Are any of
the first three items in the
status being counted?
Y
The UDP protocol of the remote node may not
be compatible with that of the Ethernet Unit.
Use another communications service.
N
Return to the procedure
for general problems.
216
Check the remote node for transmission problems using the
next procedure. If nothing is uncovered, go to Network
Connection Problems.
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
Transmission Problems
Transmission Problems occurred.
Is send
processing not
finishing?
Y
Return to the procedure
for general problems.
N
Read protocol status using the
FINS command READ
PROTOCOL STATUS.
Have any failures
to reach the destination
been counted in the ICMP
status?
Y
The UDP socket specified by the
destination UDP port number in the
send parameters is not opening at
the remote node.
N
Read controller status using
the FINS command READ
CONTROLLER STATUS.
Have any send
errors occurred?
Y
There may be too much traffic on the
network and UDP packets may be
getting corrupted. Use TCP sockets or
adjust the network to reduce
excessive traffic.
N
Check the reception status
on the remote node.
Return to the procedure for
general problems.
217
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
8-4-4
TCP Socket Problems
General Problems
General Problems
Go through the procedure in 8-4-2
FINS Communications Problems
(SEND(090)/RECV(098)/
CMND(490)) before starting this
procedure.
Is the response code a
value other than 0000?
Y
Go to 8-4-7 Troubleshooting with
Response Codes.
Y
Go to 8-5 Results Storage Area
Response Codes. (There will be no
response code in the results storage area
if Socket Service Request Switches are
being used.)
Y
There may be too much traffic going on the
network. Reduce network traffic.
N
Is the response code
in the results storage
area a value other than
0000?
N
Read controller status using the
FINS command READ
CONTROLLER STATUS.
Have any send
collisions occurred?
N
Go to Network Connection
Problems.
E
218
N
D
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
Opening Problems
Opening Problems occurred.
N
Are you attempting
an active open?
Y
Is the passive open
not finishing?
Y
Use an active open at the
remote node.
N
Is the response
code in the results storage
area a value other
than 0049?
N
Read socket status using
the FINS command READ
SOCKET STATUS.
Y
Does the port
number being used exist
at the local node?
N
Y
Make sure that the same port number is not being used
simultaneously by more than one process, including FTP services.
Sockets can remain in ESTABLISHED or some later status even if
closed; be sure to close ports from both sides of the connection.
A socket can remain open in TIME WAIT status for up to one minute
on the side that closes the socket first; we recommend that the
active-side port number be set to 0 and that you close the socket
from the active side. If you are using the Socket Service Request
Switches, check the response code to see if it is 0049 Hex.
Return to General
Problems.
Closing Problems
Refer to General Problems on page 218.
219
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
Reception Problems
Reception problems occurred.
Is reception processing
not finishing?
N
Is the remote
node not processing
to send data?
N
Adjust the remote node to process send data.
Y
Y
Read memory status using
the FINS command READ
MEMORY STATUS.
Is the network
memory being used
more than 80%?
Y
There may be too much load on the Ethernet
Unit. If the memory exhaustion records show
counts, processing may be slow. Check your
applications.
N
(If you are using the Socket Service
Request Switches, check the response
code to see if it is other than 0000
Is the response
Hex.)
code in the results storage
area a value other
than 0000?
N
Is the number of
bytes received in the
results storage
area 0?
Y
Y
The remote node's TCP socket has closed.
Close the local socket.
N
Return to the procedure
for general problems.
Transmission Problems
Transmission problem occurred.
Is send processing
finishing?
N
Read socket status using
the FINS command READ
SOCKET STATUS.
Y
Is there the maximum
number of bytes in the send
queue (4,096 bytes)?
N
Return to the procedure for
general problems.
220
Y
Make sure that reception processing is
being performed at the remote node.
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
8-4-5
FTP Service Problems
Connection Problems
Connection problem occurred.
Are you unable
to connect to the
Ethernet Unit's FTP
server?
Y
Is the FTP indicator lit?
Y
The FTP server is connected to another client.
Wait until the client has finished.
N
N
Are the parameter
settings in the host
computer incorrect?
Y
Correct the computer settings. Refer to the
documentation for your computer.
N
Go to Network Connection Problems.
Are you unable to
log in?
N
Check the login name and password settings.
Y
Memory Card
What type of Memory
Card is it?
EM File
Memory
Convert to EM File Memory in the PLC System Setup.
Can you display
the "EM" directory using ls
from the host
computer?
N
Have specified
banks of the EM Area been
converted to EM File
Memory?
N
Y
Y
END
Has the EM File
Memory been initialized?
N
Initialize the EM File Memory from the CXProgrammer or other Programming Device.
Y
Replace the CPU Unit.
Can you display
the MEMCARD directory
using ls from the host
computer?
Y
N
Is a Memory Card
not inserted in the
PLC?
N
Insert a Memory Card.
Y
Initialize the Memory Card. If the problem persists,
replace the Memory Card if necessary.
Y
Is the Memory Card
faulty?
END
221
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
File Transfer Problems
File transfer problem occurred.
Are you not connected to
the FTP server?
Y
Return to the previous procedure.
N
Is the current
N
directory MEMCARD or EM?
Make MEMCARD or EM the current directory (execute
cd /MEMCARD or cd /EM).
Y
Can you
execute get?
N
Is the file you are
attempting to get not actually N
on the Memory Card?
Y
Designate a file actually in the file system.
Y
1
Can you
execute put?
Is there insufficient
free space available
in the file system?
N
Y
Y
Delete unneeded files or use a different Memory Card.
N
1
Return to Startup Problems.
Is the data in the
file transferred with put or
get normal (i.e., not
corrupted)?
N
END
222
Y
Use the type command and change the file data type to
binary before executing put or get.
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
8-4-6
Network Connection Problems
Network connection problem occurred.
Go through the procedure in
Startup Problems before
starting this procedure.
• Firmly secure the cable.
Is the LNK indicator
lit?
N
Y
Is the twisted-pair
cable secured?
N
Y
Is the twisted-pair
N
cable between the Ethernet Unit
and the hub straight
cable?
• Use straight cable.
Y
• Replace first the twisted-pair cable, then the hub,
and then the Ethernet Unit, in order.
Execute the ping
command for all nodes
connected to the network.
Did all nodes
fail to respond to ping
command?
Y
Only SD indicator
is flashing.
• Power may not be being supplied to the hub.
N
Did a particular
node fail to respond to
ping command?
Y
• The twisted-pair cable for that node may be
disconnected.
• The remote node may not support ICMP.
N
Is the remote
node functioning as an
FTP client?
• Connect by FTP.
Y
N
Execute FINS PROTOCOL
STATUS READ.
• If the following parameters are counted, the corresponding
communications services may not be possible with the remote
node.
[IP status]
(2) (3) (5) (6) (All communications services)
[ICMP status] (5) (6) (7) (8) (ping)
[TCP status] (3) reception status (4) (5) (6) (FTP, TCP sockets)
[UDP status] (1) (2) (3) (FINS communications, UDP socket)
• If the following parameters are counted, the load at the Ethernet
Unit may be too high. Adjust the user applications.
[IP status]
(4) (8) (9)
E
N
D
223
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
Mail Not being Sent
S T A R T
Is the HOST indicator
lit?
The mail transmission function cannot be used because no IP
address or host name is set for the SMTP server.
Using the CX-Programmer, make the SMTP settings in the
System Setup. If the host name is used for the server settings,
then the DNS tab settings must be made too.
Y
N
Is the HOST indicator
flashing?
Y
N
Is the SMTP,
POP3, or
DNS error status
bit ON?
Y
N
Is the ERH indicator
flashing?
Y
N
There is a mistake in the Unit Setup. Correct the mistake.
• The SMTP server address is wrong (set to 255.255.255.255
or 127.*.*.*).
• The SMTP server host name is wrong.
• The local mail address is wrong.
• The destination mail address is wrong.
Referring to the error log, correct the communications path.
• The SMTP server address is wrong.
• The IP router table is wrong.
• There is a communications error or a mistake in the
communications path settings.
• If POP before SMTP is required for the SMTP server
connection, SMTP (POP before SMTP) and POP must be
set in the Unit Setup.
Is the user mail
transmission status
"7"?
There is a mistake in the Unit Setup. Correct the mistake.
• The SMTP server address is wrong (set to 0.0.0.0).
• The mail transmission settings in the Unit Setup are wrong
(not set).
Y
N
Is the user mail
transmission status
"0"?
There is a mistake in the send conditions in the Unit Setup's
mail transmission settings. Correct the mistake.
• The Mail Send Switch never turns ON after a start (power
ON) or restart.
• The interval timer is not set, or is set to an interval longer
than intended.
• The send conditions are not set.
Y
N
Is the user mail
transmission status
"6"?
Correct the communications path.
• The SMTP server address is wrong.
• The IP router table is wrong.
• There is a communications error or a mistake in the
communications path settings.
Y
N
Does destination
mail address exist?
N
The mail address set in the Unit Setup is wrong. Correct the
mistake.
Note: Set the destination mail address correctly. If it is incorrect,
mail will stay at the SMTP server.
Y
Is required
information missing from
the mail?
Y
Correct the information in the mail transmission settings in
the Unit Setup.
• Make the settings for the required user data, error log
data, status data, and file attachments.
Y
Clear the following errors.
• If a user-created mail address is wrong, then correct it.
• There may be too much of a load (traffic) at the Ethernet
Unit. Adjust the applications.
N
Did required
mail content fail
to be obtained?
N
E
224
N
D
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
Mail Not being Received
S T A R T
Is the HOST indicator
lit?
The mail reception function (and response mail transmission)
cannot be used because no IP address or host name is set for
the POP3/SMTP server.
Using the CX-Programmer, make the SMTP and POP settings
in the System Setup. If the host name is used for the server
settings, then the DNS tab settings must be made too.
Y
N
Is the HOST indicator
flashing?
Y
N
Is the SMTP,
POP3, or
DNS error status
bit ON?
Y
N
Is the ERH indicator
flashing?
Y
N
Are there responses
Y
to remote mail commands?
N
Is the user mail
transmission status
"0"?
Y
There is a mistake in the Unit Setup. Correct the mistake.
• The SMTP server address is wrong (set to 255.255.255.255
or 127.*.*.*).
• The SMTP server host name is wrong.
• The local mail address is wrong.
Referring to the error log, correct the communications path.
• The SMTP server address is wrong.
• The IP router table is wrong.
• There is a communications error or a mistake in the
communications path settings.
• The POP3 server and account information (user name,
password, mail address) do not match.
Correct the communications path.
• Are the mailer settings correct?
• Are the settings correct for the POP3 and SMTP servers in
the communications path?
• Are the Unit Setup and the mail addresses set for the
servers correct?
• Are the destination mail addresses for remote mail
commands correct?
• Has the network administrator set protection for mail
addresses as a firewall?
From the response code (response status), refer to the section
on receiving mail in the Operation Manual, Construction of
Applications and remove the cause of the error.
N
E
N
D
225
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
Clock Not being Automatically Adjusted
S T A R T
Is the HOST indicator
lit?
The automatic clock adjustment function cannot be used
because no IP address or host name is set for the SNTP
server.
Using the CX-Programmer, make the SNTP settings in the
System Setup. If the host name is used for the server settings,
then the DNS tab settings must be made too.
Y
N
Is the HOST indicator
flashing?
Y
N
Is the SNTP error
status bit ON?
Y
N
Is the ERH indicator
flashing?
Y
N
Is 03C6 stored in
the Ethernet Unit's
error log?
Y
Is the SNTP error
status bit ON?
Y
There is a mistake in the Unit Setup. Correct the mistake.
• The SNTP server address is wrong (set to 255.255.255.255
or 127.*.*.*).
• The SNTP server host name is wrong.
Referring to the error log, correct the communications path.
• The SNTP server address is wrong.
• The IP router table is wrong.
• There is a communications error or a mistake in the
communications path settings.
Clock information cannot be changed because a bus error
occurred between the PLC and the Ethernet Unit.
Turn OFF the power and restart the PLC.
If the problem occurs again, replace the PLC, Backplane, or
Ethernet Unit.
N
N
For some CPU Unit models and lots, there are operation
modes in which clock information cannot be changed.
For the following model and lot numbers, clock information
cannot be changed while using RUN Mode or Monitor Mode
in asynchronous mode.
• CS1G/H-CPU@@H (Lot Nos.: 030430 and earlier)
• CJ1H/G-CPU@@H (All lots)
E
226
N
D
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
8-4-7
Troubleshooting with Response Codes
You can troubleshoot the errors in FINS communications from the response
codes when the SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) instructions have
been used. For the storage areas of the response codes refer to information
on page 143 under 6-6-4 Writing Programs.
The table below lists response codes (main and sub-codes) returned after
execution of FINS commands, the probable cause of errors, and recommended remedies. The response codes provided here are for the Ethernet
Unit. Refer to the FINS Command Reference Manual (W227) or the operation
manuals for the relevant Unit for further information on response codes.
The 6th, 7th, and 15th bits of the response codes have specific functions. The
6th bit will be ON when a non-fatal error has occurred in the PC at the remote
node; the 7th bit will be ON when a fatal error has occurred in the PC at the
remote node; and the 15th bit will be ON when a network relay error has
occurred. Refer to information given after the following table for more information on relay errors.
Bit
7
6
5
First byte
4 3 2
1
0
7
Main response code (MRES)
1: PLC fatal error flag
Second byte
5 4 3 2
6
1
0
Sub-response code (SRES)
1: PLC non-fatal error flag
1: Relay error flag
Main code
Sub-code
Check point
Probable cause
Remedy
00: Normal
completion
00
---
---
---
01: Local
node error
03: Local node
send error
---
Send error in local node was
caused by lack of available
space in internal buffers.
Reduce the load (traffic) on the
Ethernet Unit. Check your user
applications.
The network cannot be
accessed because the IP
address setting is not correct.
The internal buffers are full
because there is too much traffic at the local node, preventing
data from being sent.
Correct the local IP address.
05: Node address Local IP address
setting error
07: Local node
busy, cannot
send
02: Remote
node error
System load
01: Remote node IP address table,
not in network
IP router table
Correct the user application to
reduce traffic at the Ethernet
Unit.
IP address of remote node not Set IP address of remote node
set correctly in IP address table into IP address table and, if interor IP router table.
network transmission is required,
into the IP router table.
No node with the specified unit Check the remote node’s unit
address.
address and make sure the correct one is being used in the control data.
02: No such Unit
Control data in
instruction
05: Response
timeout
Response to
CONTROLLER
STATUS READ
and PROTOCOL
STATUS READ
FINS command
Message packet was corrupted Check the protocol and controller
by transmission error.
status by reading them with FINS
commands. Increase the number of transmit retry attempts.
Control data in
instruction
Response time-out, response
watchdog timer interval too
short.
Increase the value for the
response monitor time in the
control data.
Read error log
The transmission frame may
be corrupted or the internal
reception buffer full.
Read out the error log and correct as required.
227
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
Main code
Sub-code
03: Communi- 01: Communicacations contions controller
troller error
error
02: CPU Unit
error
04: Not executable
(Service not
supported.)
05: Routing
error
10: Command format
error
Check point
Probable cause
ERC indicator on Error occurred in the communithe Controller
cations controller, ERC indicator is lit.
Remote CPU Unit CPU Unit error occurred in the
indicators
PLC at the remote node.
Remedy
Take corrective action, referring
to troubleshooting procedures in
this section.
Check CPU Unit indicators at the
remote node and clear the error
in the CPU Unit (refer to the PC’s
operation manuals)
04: Unit number
setting error
Unit number
Unit number setting error
01: Unsupported
command
Command code
An undefined command has
been used.
Make sure the unit number is
within the specified range and
that the same unit number is not
used twice in the same network.
Check the command code and
be sure the command is supported by the Unit to which you
are sending it.
FINS header
frame length
A short frame (4 bytes) is being Check the FINS header frame
used for the FINS header
length. The Ethernet Unit does
frame.
not support short headers.
01: Routing table Routing tables
setting error
Remote node is not set in the
routing tables.
02: Routing
tables not registered
Routing tables aren’t registered Set routing tables at the local
completely.
node, remote node, and any
relay nodes.
Routing tables
03: Routing table Routing tables
error
Routing table error
04: Too many
relays
Network configuration
01: Command
too long
Command data
The maximum number of relay Redesign the network or reconnodes (2) was exceeded in the sider the routing table to reduce
command.
the number of relay nodes in the
command. Communications are
possible on three network levels,
including the local network.
The command is longer than
Check the command format of
the max. permissible length.
the command and set it correctly.
Be sure broadcast transmissions
don’t exceed 1,473 bytes.
Set the routing tables correctly.
Command data
02: Command
too short
03: Element-data Command data
mismatch
The command is shorter than
min. permissible length.
The designated number of data
items differs from the actual
number in the command data.
Check the command format of
the command and set it correctly.
Check the number of items and
the data, and make sure that
they agree.
05: Header
parameter error
Data for another node on the
same network was received
from the network.
Check the header parameters in
the command data and be sure
the correct command format is
being used.
Command data
An attempt was made to send
response data for a broadcast
address.
228
Set the destination address in
the routing tables.
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
Main code
11: Parameter error
Sub-code
00: Parameter
error
01: No area
specification
03: Address
specification out
of range
04: Address
range exceeded
0B: Response
too long
21: Cannot
write
Check point
Parameters in
command data
Probable cause
The parameters in the command data are incorrect.
The UDP/TCP socket number
was not within the proper
range.
The local UDP port number
might be set to 0.
Remedy
Check the parameters.
Be sure the socket number is
between 1 and 8.
Set the Local UDP port number
correctly.
Memory area
A correct memory area code
Check the command’s memory
code in command has not been used or EM Area area code in the Results Storage
data
is not available.
Area and set the appropriate
code.
First word
The first word is in an inacces- Set a first word that is in an
address in com- sible area or the bit number is accessible area. The bit number
mand data
not 00.
must be 00 for Ethernet Units.
Command data
The address set in the comCorrect the address in the command is not correct.
mand data, being sure that the
start address plus the number of
words does not exceed accessible memory.
Command data
The response frame is too
Correct the number of data elelong.
ments or other parameters in the
command data for which the
response is being returned.
0C: Parameter
error
Parameters in
command data
Parameters are set incorrectly
in the command data.
Check the command data and
correct any parameters that are
incorrect.
08: Cannot
change
IP address conversion method
With respect to a FINS node
address that could not be
dynamically changed, a FINS
message was received from an
IP address that differed from
the Unit Setup.
Referring to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses, correct the
relationships between IP
addresses and FINS node
addresses.
229
Section 8-4
Troubleshooting Procedures
Main code
22: Status
error (operating mode disagreement)
Sub-code
Check point
0F: Service in
Socket status
progress, cannot area
perform operation
Probable cause
The same socket service is
already in progress at the
specified socket number.
Remedy
Use the socket status flag in PC
memory to be sure that socket
service has finished before starting services again.
10: Socket not
open
Socket status
area
The specified socket is not
open.
Open the socket. For TCP sockets, be sure to wait until connection is made.
11: Local node
busy, cannot
send
System load
Correct the user application to
reduce traffic at the Ethernet
Unit.
20
Unit settings
The internal buffers are full
because there is too much traffic at the local node, preventing
data from being sent.
The socket is not open for System Settings.
The socket is not open
because of the remote node
conversion command for the
FINS/TCP connection.
21
22
The socket is reopening
because the connection to the
remote node has closed.
23
The socket is reopening
because of a reception error.
24
The socket is reopening
because of a transmission
error.
25
The socket is reopening
because RST received in
response to keep-alive.
26: FINS/TCP not
connected
The socket is reopening
because of no keep-alive
response.
A connection is already established with the specified
remote node.
30: Connection
not establish
Command data
31: Connection
cannot be
changed
Unit settings and
command data
32: Service
Command data
stopped, cannot
perform operation
40: Incorrect
socket service
mode
High-speed
option for socket
service in Unit
settings
23: Environ05: Parameter
Unit settings
ment error (no error
such Unit)
07: Configuration IP address conerror
version in Unit
settings
230
Correct the settings for the Unit
Setup, the FINS/TCP connection
number, the remote IP address,
and the remote port number.
Correct the settings for the FINS/
TCP connection number, the
remote IP address, and the
remote port number.
The specified connection num- Correct the settings for the Unit
ber is not set as a FINS/TCP
Setup, the FINS/TCP connection
client in the Unit Setup.
number, the remote IP address,
and the remote port number.
While a remote node change
Correct the settings for the FINS/
was being processed for the
TCP connection number, the
specified connection number, a remote IP address, and the
request for a change was
remote port number.
received and the processing
was stopped.
The high-speed option for the Disable the high-speed option or,
socket service was enabled in if it remains enabled, use the
the Unit settings, and the
socket service by manipulating
socket service was used with a specific bits.
CMND(490) instruction.
IP address conversion failed.
Check the IP address and subnet
mask in the System Setup and
be sure that settings are correct.
IP address conversion is set for Check the mode settings in the
automatic conversion only.
System Setup. This error will be
generated for the READ IP
ADDRESS TABLE command
only.
Section 8-5
Results Storage Area Response Codes
Network Relay Errors
For network relay errors using SEND(090) or RECV(098), check the path of
the command using the routing tables and the nature of the error using the
response code to eliminate the cause of the error.
For network relay errors using CMND(490), the location of the relay error is
recorded in the second through third words of the response, as shown below.
Bit
First word
7
6
5
First byte
4 3 2
1
0
7
6
Second byte
5 4 3 2
1
0
5
1
0
1
Command code
7
Second word
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
7
8-5
6
5
4
3
4
3
2
S-b-response code (SRES)
1: PLC non-fatal error flag
1: PLC fatal error flag
Relay error flag
Third word
6
1 Main response code (MRES)
2
1
1 Error network address
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Error node address
Results Storage Area Response Codes
The response codes stored in the Results Storage Area can be used to troubleshoot socket service problems. Refer to Socket Services Parameter Area 1
to 8 (Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit) on page 88 for the location of the response
codes stored in the Results Storage Area.
The UNIX socket service error messages corresponding to the response
codes are given in the following table. Refer to the documentation for the
devices involved when communicating between an Ethernet Unit and other
devices.
Response
UNIX error
code
message
0003
ESRCH
Description
No such process
No such device or address
Bad file number (incorrect socket
specification)
Permission denied
(Broadcast address specified for
remote IP address for active TCP
open)
Probable remedy
Close the local socket and try reopening it.
0006
0009
ENXIO
EBADF
000D
EACCES
000E
EFAULT
Bad address (copy failed between
kernel and user area)
0011
0016
EEXIST
EINVAL
File exists
Invalid argument (socket library
argument error)
0018
EMFILE
Too many open files (More than 32
sockets)
0020
EPIPE
Broken pipe (remote node closed
socket)
003C
EPROTONOSUPPORT
Protocol not supported (protocol
Close the local socket and try reopening it.
other than UDP, TCP, or RAW specified)
003D
003E
EPROTOTYPE
ENOBUFS
Protocol wrong type for socket
No buffer space available
Check the IP address of the remote node and
try to reconnect.
Close the local socket and try reopening it.
Close the local socket.
There is too much load (traffic) on the Ethernet
Unit. Check your user applications.
231
Section 8-5
Results Storage Area Response Codes
Response
UNIX error
code
message
003F
EISCONN
0040
ENOTCONN
0041
EALREADY
0042
EMSGSIZE
0043
EDESTADDRREQ
0044
ENOPROTOOPT
0045
ECONNABORTED
0046
EINPROGRESS
Description
Socket is already connected (connection attempted to open socket)
Socket is not connected (send
attempted to closed socket)
Operation already in progress (connection attempted to existing nonblock connection)
Message too long
Probable remedy
Close the local socket and try reopening it.
Check the length of send data.
UDP or TCP:
1 to 1,982 bytes
UDP broadcasts: 1 to 1,472 bytes
Destination address required (desti- Close the local socket and try reopening it.
nation address not specified)
Protocol not available (unsupported
option specified)
Software caused connection abort
(another task closed socket)
Operation now in progress (nonblock connection ended during processing)
Socket operation on non-socket
0047
ENOTSOCK
0048
0049
EOPNOTSUPP
EADDRINUSE
Operation not supported on socket
Address already in use (UDP or
TCP open request sent for port
already in use)
004A
ECONNREFUSED
Connection refused (TCP socket
(active open) processing refused by
remote node)
004B
ECONNRESET
Close the local socket and try reconnecting.
004C
EADDRNOTAVAIL
004D
EAFNOSUPPORT
004E
ENETUNREACH
Connection reset by peer (TCP
socket closed by remote node)
Can’t assign requested address
(mistake in remote IP address)
Address family not supported by
protocol family
Network is unreachable
004F
EHOSTDOWN
Host is down
Check the remote host and communications
path.
0050
0051
EWOULDBLOCK
EHOSTUNREACH
Operation would block
No route to host
0053
ETIMEDOUT
0063
ESELABORT
0066
(None)
0080
(None)
Connection timed out (TCP timed
out)
Used for internal Ethernet Unit processing
Internal memory cannot be allocated
for processing; the service cannot
be provided.
Timed out for passive TCP open
request
Close the local socket and try reopening it.
The specified node does not exist on the designated IP network segment. Check the communications path.
Check the remote host and communications
path.
Close the local socket and try reopening it.
232
Check the port number.
TCP ports can remain unusable for 1 min after
closing.
Passively open a remote TCP socket, checking
the remote IP address and remote TCP port
number.
Check the setting of the remote IP address and
try reconnecting.
Close the local socket and try reopening it.
Set the path to the remote node in the IP router
table.
Traffic is too high at the Ethernet Unit. Correct
the user application to reduce traffic at the
Ethernet Unit.
Either the remote node is not executing an
active TCP open or there is a block on the network.
Section 8-5
Results Storage Area Response Codes
Response
UNIX error
code
message
0081
(None)
0082
(None)
Description
Closed by close command during
socket servicing
Connection with remote node not
achieved for passive TCP open
request
Probable remedy
No action is necessarily called for.
The remote IP address and TCP port number
settings differ from those of the remote socket
(active side).
233
Results Storage Area Response Codes
234
Section 8-5
Appendix A
Ethernet Network Parameters
Parameter
Value
Description
TCP send buffer
TCP receive buffer
4,096 bytes
4,096 bytes
Maximum capacity of the TCP send buffer
Maximum capacity of the TCP receive buffer
UDP send buffer
UDP receive buffer
9,000 bytes
9,016 bytes
Maximum capacity of the UDP send buffer
Maximum capacity of the UDP receive buffer
FINS receive buffer
RAW send buffer
16,383 bytes
2,048 bytes
Maximum capacity of the FINS receive buffer
Maximum capacity of the RAW send buffer
RAW receive buffer
Hold timer
2,048 bytes
75 s
Resend timer
Continue timer
2MSL timer
IP reassemble timer
Maximum capacity of the RAW receive buffer
The hold timer is used for active open processing of TCP sockets.
An ETIMEDOUT error will occur if connection is not completed within
75 s.
Initial value:
1 s The resend timer is used to monitor completion of reception of arrival
Maximum value: 64 s confirmations when transferring data via socket services, including FTP
server and mail transfer TCP sockets. If the timer setting is exceeded
before arrival confirmation is received, data is resent. Resends are performed from the first timeout (1 s) through the 12th timeout (64 s).
An ETIMEDOUT error will occur after the 12th timeout.
Initial value:
5 s The continue timer starts if preparations have been completed to send
Maximum value: 60 s data but the send window is too small (either 0 or too small) to send the
data and the remote node has not requested that communications be
restarted. Confirmation of the window size is requested from the remote
node when the continue timer times out. The initial value of the timer is
5 s and confirmation processing will continue consecutively with increasingly longer times until the maximum time of 60 s is reached.
60 s
The 2MSL timer starts at the TCP socket that first closes the socket and
will run for 60 s in the TIME_WAIT status.
30 s
A fragmented IP packet is discarded if it cannot be reassembled within 30
seconds.
ARP timer
20 min/3 min
Window size
(initial value of maximum window size)
4,096 bytes
Fragment size
1,500 bytes
Segment size
1,024 bytes
TTL (Time to Live)
30
If a complete ARP table entry (with an Ethernet address) is not referred
to for 20 minutes, it is removed from the table.
An incomplete ARP table entry (no response yet returned to the ARP
request) is removed from the table after 3 minutes.
The initial value of the maximum capacity used to control the convergence of TCP sockets. Actually, the node negotiates with the remote
node and uses the smaller of the values for the two nodes. The window
size will fluctuate with the available space in the TCP reception buffers of
the remote node when processing communications.
Data packets are fragmented into 1,500-byte IP packets. UDP data is
separated into 1,472-byte fragments before sending.
TCP data is separated into 1,024-byte units, unless the segments are different, in which case it will be separated into 536-byte units.
Decremented each time an IP router is passed.
235
Ethernet Network Parameters
236
Appendix A
Appendix B
Buffer Configuration
UDP socket
reception
request buffers
(8 x 9,016 max.)
(See note 1.)
TCP socket
reception
request buffers
(8 x 4,096 max.)
(See note 1.)
IP packet input
queue
(50 max. x
1,500 bytes)
CPU Unit
FTP service
reception buffer
(4,096 bytes)
FINS processing
buffers (192 x
2,020 bytes)
FINS reception
buffer (16,383
bytes max.)
Communications
controller
Network
FINS send
buffer (9,000
bytes max.)
FTP service
send buffer
(4,096 bytes)
IP packet
output queue
(50 max. x
1,500 bytes)
TCP socket send
request buffers (8
x 4,096 max.)
(See note 2.)
UDP socket send
request buffers
(8 x 9,000 max.)
(See note 2.)
Network memory (248K bytes)
237
Buffer Configuration
Appendix B
Network Memory
Most of the buffers used for communications servicing by the Ethernet Unit are administered in a buffer configuration called network memory. Network memory consists of 248K bytes of memory divided into short and long
buffers. The use of short and long buffers is determined by the status of the various services when the Ethernet
Unit is running. The capacity of all buffers cannot be used due to limits in the mounted memory capacity. The
status of the short and long buffers can be accessed by execution the FINS command MEMORY STATUS
READ (2763).
Note 1. The status of UDP and TCP socket reception request buffers can be accessed by executing the FINS
command SOCKET STATUS READ (2764).
2. The status of UDP and TCP socket send request buffers can be accessed by executing the FINS
command SOCKET STATUS READ (2764).
238
Appendix C
TCP Status Transitions
The TCP socket status can be confirmed using the socket status data returned for the FINS command
SOCKET STATUS READ (2764).
CLOSED
ACTIVE OPEN
snd SYN
CLOSE
Passive OPEN
LISTEN
CLOSE
rcv SYN
snd SYN, ACK
SEND
snd SYN
rcv SYN
SYN
RECEIVED
SYN
SENT
snd ACK
rcv ACK of SYN
CLOSE
snd FIN
rcv SYN, ACK
snd ACK
ESTABLISHED
rcv FIN
snd ACK
CLOSE
snd FIN
CLOSED
WAIT
FIN
WAIT-1
rcv ACK of FIN
rcv FIN
snd ACK
FIN WAIT-2
rcv FIN
snd ACK
CLOSE
snd FIN
CLOSING
LAST-ACK
rcv ACK of FIN
rcv ACK of FIN
Timeout=2MSL
TIME WAIT
Status
CLOSED
Connection closed.
LISTEN
SYN SENT
Waiting for connection.
SYN sent in active status.
SYN RECEIVED
ESTABLISHED
SYN received and sent.
Already established.
CLOSE WAIT
FIN WAIT 1
FIN received and waiting for completion.
Completed and FIN sent.
CLOSING
LAST ACK
Completed and exchanged FIN. Awaiting ACK.
FIN sent and completed. Awaiting ACK.
FIN WAIT 2
TIME WAIT
Completed and ACK received. Awaiting FIN.
After closing, pauses twice the maximum segment life (2MSL).
CLOSED
Meaning
239
TCP Status Transitions
240
Appendix C
Appendix D
ASCII Characters
Bits 1 to 4
Bits 5 to 7
Binary
Hex
0000
0
0001
1
0010
2
0011
3
0100
4
0101
5
0110
6
0111
7
1000
8
1001
9
1010
A
1011
B
1100
C
1101
D
1110
E
1111
F
0000
0
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
0001
1
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
0010
2
Space
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0011
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
0100
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
0101
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
0110
6
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
0111
7
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
241
ASCII Characters
242
Appendix D
Appendix E
Maintenance
The Ethernet Unit makes up part of a network. Repair a defective Ethernet Unit as soon as possible as it can
have a negative effect on the entire network. We recommend that customers keep one or more spare Ethernet
Units to allow immediate recovery of the network.
Replacing an Ethernet Unit
Observe the following precautions when replacing the Ethernet Unit.
• Always turn OFF the power supply before replacing the Ethernet Unit.
• Check that the spare Ethernet Unit is operating normally before replacing a defective Unit with it.
• When returning a defective Unit for repairs, provide as much written information as possible on the symptoms of the problem.
• If a problem occurs with poor contacts, wipe the contacts with a clean cloth soaked with industrial alcohol.
Carefully remove any lint remaining on the contacts before replacing the Unit.
Settings after Replacing an Ethernet Unit
After replacing an Ethernet Unit, set the following to the same settings as were used on the previous Unit.
• Unit number
• Node address
Settings after Replacing a CPU
The EEPROM in the PC’s CPU holds the information listed below. This information must be stored in any new
CPU used to replace a defective one.
• Routing tables
• System Setup for the Ethernet Unit
243
Maintenance
244
Appendix E
Appendix F
Inspections
Carry out regular inspections to ensure the Ethernet Unit is functioning perfectly.
Items
Most of the parts that make up an Ethernet Unit are semiconductor components. None of the parts in the Unit
will wear out after a specific lifetime, but some parts may deteriorate due to extreme operating condition.
Therefore, it is important to inspect the Unit regularly.
Inspection Interval
Normally inspect once or twice per year. Choose the inspection period according to the severity of the operating conditions. New installation should be inspected more frequently until they are judged to be stable.
Inspection Items
Correct any of the items in the table below not conforming to the specified standard.
Item
Environment
Mounting
Details
Temperature around Unit
0 to 55°C
Standard
Humidity around Unit
Accumulated dust
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
No accumulated dust
Ethernet Unit firmly attached
Transceiver cable connector fully pushed in
No looseness
No looseness
Condition of transceiver cable
Twisted-pair cable connector fully pushed in
No visible abnormality
No looseness
Condition of twisted-pair cable
No visible abnormality
Tools Required for Inspection
The following tools are needed to inspect the Ethernet Unit:
Standard Tools
• Flat-blade and Phillips screwdrivers
• Tester or digital voltmeter
• Industrial alcohol and a clean cloth
Tools Required Under Special Circumstances
• Synchroscope
• Pen oscilloscope
• Thermometer and hygrometer
245
Inspections
246
Appendix F
Appendix G
Ethernet Unit Web Function
Web Function
Ethernet Units with Unit Ver. 1.3 or later can use a Web browser from a personal computer or other device to
easily make the Ethernet Unit’s system settings and monitor statuses.
Web Function List
The information displayed on the window from the Web browser for the Ethernet Unit is as follows:
Unit Setup Functions
Menu item
Parameter item
Settings
Corresponding CX-Programmer function
CX-Programmer’s Ethernet Unit Setup window
IP address and Protocols
---
System
--IP address
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - IP Address
Net mask
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - Sub-net Mask
Enable CIDR
Unit Setup window - Setup tab - Sub-net Mask - Enable CIDR
FINS/UDP Port
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - FINS/UDP Port
FINS/TCP Port
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - FINS/TCP Port
Address conversion mode
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - Conversion
Auto (Dynamic)
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - Auto (dynamic)
Auto (Static)
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - Auto (Static)
Manual
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - Table used
Auto & Manual
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - Mixed
Destination IP address is changed
dynamically
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - Destination IP Address (Change Dynamically)
Destination IP address is Not changed
dynamically
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - Destination IP Address (Change Dynamically)
ETN11 compatible mode
None
Broadcast option
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - Broadcast
Baud rate
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - Baud Rate
TCP/IP keep-alive
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - TCP/IP keep-alive
Performance of socket service (High
Speed)
Unit Setup window - Setup Tab - Performance of Socket Service - High Speed
FINS/TCP Protected
Unit Setup window- FINS/TCP Tab - Use IP address to protect
SMTP Server (Host name or IP
address)
Unit Setup window- SMTP Tab - Server specification type
POP Server (Host name or IP
address)
Unit Setup window- POP Tab - Server specification type
SNTP Server (Host name or IP
address)
Unit Setup window- Auto Adjust Time Tab - Server specification type
FTP
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab
Login name
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - FTP (Login)
Password
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - FTP (Password)
Port No.
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - FTP (Port No.)
IP address of DNS server
Unit Setup window- DNS Tab - IP Address
Port No.
Unit Setup window- DNS Tab - Port No.
DNS
Unit Setup window- DNS Tab
Retry timer
SMTP
Unit Setup window- DNS Tab - Retry timer
Unit Setup window- SMTP Tab
IP Address (or Host name)
Unit Setup window- SMTP Tab - IP Address or Host name
Port No.
Unit Setup window- SMTP Tab - Port No.
Local mail address
Unit Setup window- SMTP Tab - Local mail address
Option (Use POP before SMTP)
Unit Setup window- SMTP Tab - Use POP before SMTP
247
Appendix G
Ethernet Unit Web Function
Menu item
Parameter item
POP
Corresponding CX-Programmer function
Unit Setup window- POP Tab
IP Address (or Host name)
Unit Setup window- POP Tab - IP Address or Host name
Port No.
Unit Setup window- POP Tab - Port No.
Mail account
Unit Setup window- POP Tab - Account Name
Mail password
Unit Setup window- POP Tab - Mail password
Server access interval time
SNTP
Unit Setup window- POP Tab - Server access interval time
Unit Setup window- Auto Adjust Time Tab
IP Address (or Host name)
Unit Setup window- Auto Adjust Time Tab - IP Address or Host name
Port No.
Unit Setup window- Auto Adjust Time Tab - Port No.
Auto Adjust Time
Unit Setup window- Auto Adjust Time Tab - Auto Adjust Time
Adjust Time
Unit Setup window- Auto Adjust Time Tab - Adjust Time
Retry timer
Unit Setup window- Auto Adjust Time Tab - Retry timer
Option
(Get the time info. from the SNTP
server)
Unit Setup window- Auto Adjust Time Tab - Get the time information from the SNTP
server
WEB Password
Unit Setup window- HTTP Tab - Password
HTTP
Unit Setup window- HTTP Tab
WEB Password (Confirm)
None (for confirmation of Web password)
Port No.
Unit Setup window- HTTP Tab - Port No.
Option (Use Web Function)
Unit Setup window- HTTP Tab - Use Web Function
IP address/router table
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab
IP address table
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - IP Address Table
IP router table
Unit Setup window- Setup Tab - IP Router Table
FINS/TCP
Unit Setup window- FINS/TCP Tab
Connection (1-8)
Unit Setup window- FINS/TCP Tab - No. (1 to 8)
FINS/TCP server / client
Unit Setup window- FINS/TCP Tab - FINS/TCP Mode
IP Address
Unit Setup window- FINS/TCP Tab - IP Address
Auto-allocated FINS node
Unit Setup window- FINS/TCP Tab - Auto allocated FINS node
keep-alive
Unit Setup window- FINS/TCP Tab - keep-alive
Connection 9-16
Unit Setup window- FINS/TCP Tab - No. (9 to 16)
Send Mail
---
Mail address
Unit Setup window- Mail Address Tab
Mail address 1
Unit Setup window- Mail Address Tab - Mail address 1
Mail address 2
Unit Setup window- Mail Address Tab - Mail address 2
Send Mail
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab
Trigger No.
248
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Trigger No.
Trigger option
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Trigger No.
Not Use
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Send mail upon trigger
Software switch
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Software switch
Word value change
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Word value change
Bit value change
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Bit value change
ETN condition change
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - ETN condition (at error storage)
CPU condition change
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - CPU condition
Periodic timer
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Periodic timer
Mail address
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Mail address
Interval time
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Interval time
Include data
---
Send user data
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Send user data
Area
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - User defined mail address
Send Error Log information
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Send Error Log informat.
Send Status information
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Send status information
Send file data / IO memory data
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Send file data / IO memory data
File data
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - File data
IO data (IOM)
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - I/O data (.IOM)
IO data (TXT)
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - I/O data (.TXT)
IO data (CSV)
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - I/O data (.CSV)
File name
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - Attached file name
Area
Unit Setup window- Send Mail Tab - I/O memory data
Appendix G
Ethernet Unit Web Function
Menu item
Parameter item
Receive Mail
Corresponding CX-Programmer function
Unit Setup window- Receive Mail Tab
Mail Address Protection Setting
Unit Setup window- Receive Mail Tab - Protect using mail address
Attached File Enable Settings
Unit Setup window- Receive Mail Tab - Receive file with specified extension only
Command Enable Setting
Unit Setup window- Receive Mail Tab - Receive specified commands only
Status Monitor
Menu item
Corresponding CX-Programmer function
Status View
Unit information
--FINS(0501): CONTROLLER DATA READ
Unit status
Protocol status
FINS(0601): CONTROLLER STATUS READ
---
IP status
ICMP status
FINS(2762): PROTOCOL STATUS READ, IP status
FINS(2762): PROTOCOL STATUS READ, ICMP status
TCP status
UDP status
FINS(2762): PROTOCOL STATUS READ, TCP status
FINS(2762): PROTOCOL STATUS READ, UDP status
Memory status
Socket status
FINS(2763): MEMORY STATUS READ
FINS(2764): SOCKET STATUS READ
Fins status
Mail log
Ethernet Unit’s internal node table
RECEIVE MAIL: READ MAIL LOG
Error log
Send mail status
FINS(2102): READ ERROR LOG
Mail send status 1 to 8
Web Function Password
To prevent unauthorized access to the Ethernet Unit from a Web browser, password entry is required to enable
display and setting of the parameters. Even if the password has not been set, the default password “ETHERNET” must be entered. To change this password, set a new password in the HTTP Tab of the CX-Programmer’s Unit Setup, or use the Web function and select Settings - IP address and Protocols - HTTP.
Note 1. Setting a new Web function password as soon as possible is recommended to prevent unauthorized
access.
2. The Web function can also be disabled by setting in the Web function option.
Using the Web Function (Setting Password)
The Ethernet Unit’s Web window is displayed by accessing the following URL from the Web browser.
URL: http://(Ethernet Unit’s IP address)/0
Use the following procedure to set the Unit’s system settings (HTTP password setting in this example) using
Internet Explorer version 6.0 and the Ethernet Unit’s Web function.
249
Ethernet Unit Web Function
Appendix G
1. Connect to the Ethernet Unit from the Web browser.
In this example, the URL is specified as http://192.168.250.1/0 using the Ethernet Unit’s default IP address.
2. Select Settings from the menu on the left side of the window to display the Settings Menu.
3. Select 1. IP address and Protocols - System to display the Login Password field on the right of the window.
250
Ethernet Unit Web Function
Appendix G
4. Input the default password (“ETHERNET” all in upper case) and click the Login Button.
When login is successful, the following setting window will be displayed.
5. Select HTTP from the menu to display the HTTP setting items.
The following window shows the default settings.
251
Ethernet Unit Web Function
Appendix G
6. Make the required settings (i.e., the password in this example).
To prevent incorrect password entry, set the same password in the WEB Password field and WEB Password
(Confirm) field.
7. After entering the correct password, click the Set Button followed by the Regist Button.
The Set Button is used to transfer the entered values from the personal computer, and temporarily register
them in the Ethernet Unit.
The Regist Button stores the set values that have been temporarily registered in the Ethernet to the flash memory (non-volatile memory) of the CPU Unit. The Ethernet Unit reads the unit settings from flash memory (nonvolatile memory) when the power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted. Therefore, when making the unit settings using the Web function, always click the Set Button before the Regist Button. Otherwise the entered set
values will not be used. The Set Button and Regist Button are provided on the window for each setting item.
Note To prevent unauthorized Web access, the Web function can be disabled. Select HTTP - Option and
deselect the Use Web Function option. Click the Set Button followed by the Regist Button. This setting
is enabled by turning ON the power to the Ethernet Unit again or restarting the Unit. This setting can be
cancelled only through the CX-Programmer Unit Setup (version 5.0 or higher).
8. The functions of the other button are as follows:
• Cancel Button
Use this button to cancel the entered value and display the value that was previously set with the Set Button again. If the Set Button has not been clicked, the value that was read from the CPU Unit’s flash memory (non-volatile memory) when the Ethernet Unit was started will be displayed.
• Reload Button
Use this button read and display the values saved in the CPU Unit’s flash memory (non-volatile memory).
9. To enable the unit settings that have been registered in the CPU Unit’s flash memory (non-volatile memory,
turn the power to the PLC system OFF and ON again, or restart the Ethernet Unit.
252
Index
Numerics
100M indicator, 26
A
Account Name field, 68
applications precautions, xxiii
ARP communications, 16
ASCII characters, 241
Attached file name field, 71
Auto Adjust Time Tab, 52, 74
Auto allocated FINS node field, 65
automatic, 8
automatic clock adjustment, 8, 10, 22, 52
Auxiliary Area, 138
connections, 38
installation, 37
precautions, 35
twisted-pair, 11
CJ-series, 14
CS-series, 14
cascade connections, 36
CJ-series, 14
CS-series, 14
ChangeMode command, 6, 73
CIO Area, 138
allocations, 78
CJ1W-ETN11
comparison, 27
compatibility, 54
clock
automatic adjustment, 8, 10, 22, 52
Close Request Switch, 85
B
Closing Flag, 80
CMND(490) instruction, 8, 17, 19, 141
broadcast test
command, 166
reading results, 166
commands
FINS commands, 158
remote, 6
ChangeMode, 6
ErrorLogClear, 6
ErrorLogRead, 6
FileDelete, 6
FileList, 6
FileRead, 6
FileWrite, 6
FinsSend, 6
IOMRead, 6
IOMWrite, 6
MailLogClear, 6
MailLogRead, 6
PARAMBackup, 6
Test, 6
UMBackup, 6
BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ, 166
Communication Unit Tab, 133
buffers, 196, 235
configuration, 237
communications cables, xxv
baud rate
CJ-series, 14
CS-series, 14
setting, 49
Baud Rate field, 63
Bit value change field, 71
bits
addresses, 90, 160
error status, 83, 205
service status, 82
status of UDP/TCP sockets, 80
BROADCAST DATA SEND, 166
Broadcast field, 62
broadcast setting, 49
Communications Port Enabled Flags, 90, 143
Communications Port Error Flags, 143
C
C200H-PRO27-E, 39
cables
communications, xxv
connectors
recommended models, 35
Contact Output Units
installation, 37
interference with Ethernet, 37
253
Index
precautions, 37
CONTROLLER DATA READ, 162
Controller Link, 10
CONTROLLER STATUS READ, 163
Conversion field, 63
Counter Area, 138
CPU Bus Unit Error Flag, 90
CPU Bus Unit Error, Unit Number Flags, 91
CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags, 90
CPU Bus Unit Number Duplication Flags, 90
D
data areas
FINS communications, 160
Data Received Flag, 8, 80
dedicated control bits, 18
DHCP client, 9
dimensions, 15
CJ-series, 14
CS-series, 14
CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits, 91
DM Area, 138
allocations, 86
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag, 90
DNS client, 22
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error, Unit Number Flags, 91
DNS client function, 10
CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area, 12
format, 54
DNS communications, 16
CPU Bus Units
flags, 90
Restart Bits, 91
DNS Tab, 51, 66
DNS server, 10, 22
Driver Tab, 128
CPU condition field, 71
CQM1-PRO01-E, 39
crimp terminals, xxiv
CS1W-CN114, 39
CS1W-CN224, 39
CS1W-CN624, 39
CS1W-ETN01
compatibility, 54
CS1W-ETN11
comparison, 27
compatibility, 54
CS1W-KS001-E, 39
CSV extension, 73
current consumption
CJ-series, 14
CS-series, 14
Custom 1 to 3 field, 73
CX-Integrator, 12, 39
creating routing tables, 125
CX-Programmer, 39
connecting to PLC, 2, 128
from personal computer, 3
through multiple segments, 3
using wireless LAN, 3
within same segment, 2
Ethernet Unit Setup, 41
E
EC Directives, xxv
echo response packet, 52
electromagnetic fields, xxiii
EM Area, 138
EM File Memory, 7
E-mail
attaching files, 9
mail receive function, 6, 9, 21
mail send function, 5, 20
receiving at PLC, 6
sending data, 5
sending equipment status, 5
EMC Directives, xxv
EMI Standard, xxv
EMS Standard, xxv
ERC indicator, 26
troubleshooting, 204
ERH indicator, 26
troubleshooting, 204
ERROR LOG CLEAR, 168
ERROR LOG READ, 167
ErrorLogClear command, 6, 73
ErrorLogRead command, 6, 73
errors
alignment, 165
controller status, 163
254
Index
error codes, 207
error log, 206
clearing, 168
reading, 167
error status, 205
flags
FINS communications, 164
response codes, 227
short packets, 165
status, 83, 205
unit numbers, 91
UNIX error messages, 231
Ethernet communications, 16
addresses
reading from Unit, 162
exchanging data between PLCs, 4
parameters, 235
Ethernet Connector, 23, 38
Ethernet Unit Setup, 41
Ethernet Units
mounting, 33
reading status, 196
replacing, 243
resetting, 161
memory areas, 160
node addresses, 9
overview, 17
port numbers, 138
response codes, 158, 227
response monitor time, 138
responses, 161
retries, 138
socket numbers, 159
specifications, 117, 137
TCP/IP, 3, 9
testing, 184
troubleshooting, 214
UDP/IP, 2, 9
FINS node addresses
automatic allocation, 9
FINS/TCP, 3, 117, 120
communications, 122
connection numbers, 121
connection status, 122
features, 120
frame format, 121
procedure, 123
TCP port number, 121
ETN condition field, 71
FINS/TCP Mode field, 65
ETN11 mode, 54
converting from ETN21 mode, 59
converting to ETN21 mode, 58
FINS/TCP Tab, 64
ETN21 mode
converting from ETN11 mode, 58
converting to ETN11 mode, 59
FINS/TCP Port field, 62
FINS/UDP, 2, 50, 117, 118
frame format, 118
procedure, 119
UDP port numbers, 119
FINS/UDP Port field, 62
F
FileDelete, 6
FileDelete command, 73
FileList command, 6, 73
FileRead command, 6, 73
FileWrite command, 6, 73
FINS communications, 9, 16
commands, 158, 161
format, 159
from PLCs, 137
sending, 137
socket services, 159
data contents, 138
data length, 137
destination, 137
echo test, 53
FinsGateway, 12, 132
FinsSend command, 6, 73
flags
Closing Flag, 80
Communications Port Enabled Flags, 90
Communications Port Error Flags, 90
CPU Bus Unit Error Flag, 90
CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number Flags, 91
CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags, 90
CPU Bus Unit Number Duplication Flags, 90
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag, 90
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number Flags, 91
Data Received Flag, 8, 80
Error Flags, 164
FTP Status Flag, 82
Opening Flag, 80
Receiving Flag, 80
Results Storage Error Flag, 80
255
Index
Sending Flag, 80
TCP/UDP Open Flag, 80
FTP communications, 16
FTP indicator, 26
FTP server, 7, 9, 20, 51
troubleshooting, 221
FTP Status Flag, 82
IP Address Table field, 63
IP ADDRESS TABLE READ, 189
IP addresses
allocating, 94
configuration, 94
dynamic, 9
setting, 46
Host name field, 67, 68, 74
IP communications, 16
IP addresses
reading from Units, 162
reading tables, 189
IP router tables
reading, 191
status, 192
HTTP Tab, 75
IP Router Table field, 63
hub, 11, 35
connections
cascade, 36
stack, 36
precautions, 36
IP ROUTER TABLE READ, 191
H
Holding Area, 138
HOST indicator, 26
IP router tables, 49
K
keep-alive field, 65
I
I/O allocations, 138
CIO Area, 78
DM Area, 86
I/O tables
creating, 39
ICMP communications, 16
status, 193
indicators, 25
troubleshooting, 204
inspections, 245
installation
cables
connections, 38
Contact Output Units, 37
location, xxiii
precautions, 34
interlock circuits, xxiv
INTERNODE ECHO TEST, 165
internode test, 11
command, 165
Interval time field, 71, 72
IOM extension, 73
IOMRead command, 6, 73
IOMWrite command, 6, 73
IP Address field, 62, 65, 68, 74
256
keep-alive setting, 19, 49
L
limit circuits, xxiv
LNK indicator, 26
Local mail address field, 67
locking devices
precautions, xxiv
Login field, 63
Low Voltage Directive, xxvi
M
mail
status, 87
Mail Address 1 field, 69
Mail Address 2 field, 69
Mail address field, 71
Mail Address Tab, 51, 69
Mail password field, 68
mail receive function, 6, 9, 21
mail send function, 5, 20
Mail Send Switch, 5, 20
mail triggers, 5
MailLogClear command, 6, 73
Index
MailLogRead command, 6, 73
application examples, 53
echo test, 52
main response code, 158
See also MRES
POP server, 22
maintenance, 243
POP Tab, 51, 68
media access method
CJ-series, 14
CS-series, 14
POP3 communications, 16
memory areas
See also data areas
Memory Card, 7
MEMORY STATUS READ, 196
mode settings
reading from Unit, 162
modulation method
CJ-series, 14
CS-series, 14
mounting
Racks, 33
MRES, 159
N
Network Tab, 128, 133
networks
network memory, 196, 238
No. field, 64
node addresses
manipulating rotary switches, 58
setting, 31, 32
POP3 server, 6
Port No. field, 63, 66, 68, 74
port numbers
UDP port
reading from Unit, 162
power supply, xxiii
precautions, xxiv
precautions, xxi
applications, xxiii
Contact Output Units, 37
general, xxii
inspections, 245
installation, 33, 34
operating environment, xxiii
power supply, xxiv
replacing Units, 243
safety, xxii
wiring, 38
Programming Console, 39
Programming Devices
connecting, 39
CX-Net, 39
CX-Programmer, 39
Programming Console, 39
Protect using mail address field, 72
Node Number Switches, 23
PROTOCOL STATUS READ, 192
noise, xxiii
Contact Output Units, 37
protocols, 16
ARP, 16
DNS, 16
FINS, 16
FTP, 16
ICMP, 16
IP, 16
POP3, 16
reading status, 192
SMTP, 16
SNTP, 16
TCP, 16
TCP/IP, 8
UDP, 16
UDP/IP, 8
O
OBJ extension, 73
online editing, xxii
Opening Flag, 80
operating environment
precautions, xxiii
P
PARAMBackup command, 6, 73
Password field, 63
PCMR(260) instruction, 144
PING, 11, 52, 184
257
Index
R
Racks
mounting Ethernet Units, 33
radioactivity, xxiii
RD indicator, 26
Receive file with specified extension only field, 73
Receive Mail Tab, 52, 72
Receive Request Switch, 85
Receiving Flag, 80
RECV(098) instruction, 17, 140
relay tables, 124
RESET, 161
response codes, 227
FINS commands, 158
UNIX error messages, 231
Results Storage Area, 159
response codes, 231
Results Storage Error Flag, 80
Retry timer field, 66
Routing Table Area, 12
routing tables
creating, 124
local network table, 124
relay network table, 124
setting examples, 126
RUN indicator, 26
troubleshooting, 204
S
safety precautions, xxii
SD indicator, 26
Send Error Log information field, 71
Send file data/I/O memory data field, 71
Send Mail Tab, 51, 70
Send Request Switch, 85
Send status information field, 71
Send user data field, 71
SEND(090) instruction, 17, 139
transmission delay, 149
Sending Flag, 80
servers
specifying, 22
service status, 82
Setup Tab, 51, 62
short-circuits
258
precautions, xxiv
signals
precautions, xxiv
SMTP communications, 16
SMTP server, 5, 22
SMTP Tab, 51, 67
SNTP communications, 16
SNTP server, 10, 22
socket option, 159
Socket Service Request Switches, 84
socket services, 18, 51
creating communications applications, 7
FINS communications, 159
Parameter Areas, 88, 231
socket option, 159
Socket Service Request Switches, 84
TCP/IP, 8
troubleshooting, 231
UDP/IP, 8
SOCKET STATUS READ, 198, 239
sockets
closing
TCP, 183
UDP, 173
numbers, 159
opening
TCP, 174, 177
UDP, 169
reading status, 198
receiving data
TCP, 180
UDP, 170
sending data
TCP, 181
UDP, 172
status, 80
TCP sockets
status, 88, 239
troubleshooting, 218
testing communications, 184
UDP sockets
troubleshooting, 215
software
configuration, 16
Software switch field, 71
specifications
Ethernet Units
CJ-series, 14
CS-series, 14
FINS communications, 137
Index
SRES, 159
timers, 235
stack connections, 36
transmission
delays, 149
distance
CJ-series, 14
CS-series, 14
media
CJ-series, 14
CS-series, 14
path
CJ-series, 14
CS-series, 14
startup
procedure, 30
static electricity, xxiii
precautions, xxv
status
reading memory status, 196
reading protocol status, 192
reading socket status, 198
STD extension, 73
Sub-net Mask field, 62
subnet masks, 48, 95
reading from Unit, 162
sub-response code, 158
See also SRES
switches
Socket Service Request Switches, 84
SYSMAC BUS/2, 138
SYSMAC LINK, 138
system configuration, 11
examples, 128
T
TCP Active Open Request Switch, 85
TCP CLOSE REQUEST, 183
TCP communications, 16
sockets
interface, 19
status, 239
troubleshooting, 218
status, 194
TCP indicator, 26
TCP Nodes Tab, 135
TCP OPEN REQUEST (ACTIVE), 177
TCP OPEN REQUEST (PASSIVE), 174
TCP Passive Open Request Switch, 85
TCP RECEIVE REQUEST, 180
TCP SEND REQUEST, 181
TCP/IP, 3, 8, 117
creating communications applications, 7
TCP/IP keep-alive, 49
TCP/UDP Open Flag, 80
terminal blocks, xxiii
Test command, 6, 73
Timer Area, 138
troubleshooting
FINS communications, 214
FTP server, 221
procedures, 213
socket services, 231
startup, 213
TCP sockets, 218
UDP sockets, 215
UNIX error messages, 231
using indicators, 204
using response codes, 227
twisted-pair cables, 11
precautions, 35
recommended models, 35
TXT extension, 73
U
UDP CLOSE REQUEST, 173
UDP communications, 16
sockets
troubleshooting, 215
UDP Nodes Tab, 134
UDP OPEN REQUEST, 169
UDP Open Request Switch, 85
UDP RECEIVE REQUEST, 170
UDP SEND REQUEST, 172
UDP/IP, 2, 8, 117
creating communications applications, 7
UDP/TCP sockets
status bits, 80
UMBackup command, 6, 73
Unit Number Switch, 23
unit numbers
setting, 31, 32
UNIX error messages, 231
Use IP address to protect field, 64
259
Index
Use POP before SMTP field, 67
V
Visual BASIC, 12
Visual C++, 12
W
weight
CJ-series, 14
CS-series, 14
wiring
cables, 38
precautions, 38
word addresses, 90, 160
Word value change field, 71
Work Area, 138
260
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W420-E1-06
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
Date
Revised content
1
July 2003
Original production
02
March 2004
Information was added for new functions available with new versions of the CX-Programmer
and Ethernet Unit, including the Web function, described in new sub-section 2-8 and Appendix
G. The following revisions were also made.
Page xiv: Added information on unit versions.
Page 3: Added information for CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher.
Page 7: Corrected “or” to “and” in paragraph on automatic clock adjustment.
Pages 8 and 9: Added information on Ethernet Units with Unit Ver. 1.3 or later.
Page 12: Added information on CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher.
Page 17: Changed note
Page 25: Corrected information for ERH indicator.
Page 26: Added information on upgrade to unit version.
Page 28: Corrected “00.00.00.00” to “0.0.0.0” in Note 1.
Page 31: Corrected “1.2” to “0.9” and “0.8” to “0.4” in Note.
Page 40: Changed screen.
Page 41: Changed screen, corrected “Right-click” to “Click” in steps 6 and 7, and added new
sub-section on the Web function.
Page 43: Changed screen.
Page 45: Added settings to tables.
Page 47: Added table of settings for HTTP Tab, and swapped “response” and “request” in diagram.
Pages 50 and 58: Changed screen.
Page 59: Added item to table and notes.
Page 60: Corrected “00.00.00.00” to “0.0.0.0” in table.
Page 71: Added information on HTTP Server Setup and changed screen.
Page 84: Changed “07CD hex” to “07C0 hex”
Page 85: Corrected “00.00.00.00” to “0.0.0.0” and corrected information for setting local IP
address.
Page 96: Added information on prohibiting dynamic conversion of remote IP addresses.
Pages 100 and 101: Corrected table headings.
Page 124: Added note.
Page 125: Corrected “Controller Unit” to “Controller Link Unit” in diagram.
Page 126: Corrected “Ethernet Unit” to “Controller Link Unit” in information on relay network
tables, and corrected “2” to “1” for the relay node address.
Pages 141 and 142: Changed “PC” to “PLC.”
Page 197: Removed “(CJ Series only)” from table.
Page 221: Added error codes to table.
Page 229: Added table on TCP status information.
03
June 2005
Information was added for new versions of the Ethernet Unit and minor corrections were also
made, including the following changes.
Page v: Added information on general precautions notation.
Page vii: Removed table.
Page xiii: Added information on warranty and liability.
Page 28: Added table.
Page 36: Changed cable in diagram.
Pages 45 and 247: Replaced diagram.
Pages 85 and 120: Changed n+24 to n+23.
Page 101: Added information on ETN11-compatible mode.
Page 123: Added note.
Page 243: Changed and added new parameter item.
261
Revision History
Revision code
Date
Revised content
04
January 2006
The following changes were made throughout the manual: added CJ1G-CPU@@P, changed
"CX-Net" to "CX-Integrator", and changed "CX-Programmer" to "CX-One".
Page xv: Removed manuals and added others and changed details for manuals W446 and
W336.
Pages xxiv and xxv: Added precautions.
Page 30: Changed the reference for creating I/O tables.
Page 40: Removed model number for the CX-Programmer and added information on relevant
manuals.
Page 41: Added information on unit version restrictions.
Pages 74 and 75: Changed "SMTP" to "SNTP".
Page 100: Removed "to be included in".
Pages 103 and 121: Changed the reference for FINS node address settings.
Page 166: Changed the reference for error code details.
Page 188: Changed the reference page for IP network addresses.
Page 205 and 206: Changed the reference for FINS settings.
05
June 2008
Page xv: Change model and name for W446.
Page 4: Added server graphic and callouts to figure.
Page 6: Removed "(5)" from figure.
Pages 13 and 14: Changed specifications for number of cascade connections.
Page 35: Removed RH509E.
Page 66: Changed "ms" to "s" at bottom left of table.
Page 84: Changed "ON" to "OFF for bit 13 description.
06
April 2009
Added information for unit version 1.5.
Made corrections and revised expressions and notation.
262
OMRON Corporation
Industrial Automation Company
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Automation & Drive Division
Automation Department 1
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81) 75-344-7084/Fax: (81) 75-344-7149
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
One Commerce Drive Schaumburg,
IL 60173-5302 U.S.A.
Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
Authorized Distributor:
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),
Alexandra Technopark, Singapore 119967
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200
OMRON Industrial Automation Global: www.ia.omron.com
© OMRON Corporation 2003 All Rights Reserved.
In the interest of product improvement,
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Printed in Japan
Cat. No. W420-E1-06
0409
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising